JP2024066655A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in gaming. [Solution] The gaming machine executes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance, in which in the first predetermined performance, the first predetermined display changes to a second predetermined display in which the award of a bonus is not confirmed, and the second predetermined display changes to a third predetermined display in which the award of a bonus is confirmed and includes a display that extends outside the outer line of the first predetermined display, and in the second predetermined performance, unlike the display by the storage display means, the outer line changes and a cyclic display is performed with a period of a predetermined time, and if a start condition is satisfied when a number of the start information items stored is less than a predetermined number, the second predetermined performance may be performed, but even if a start condition is satisfied when a number of start information items less than the predetermined number is stored while the first predetermined performance is being performed, the second predetermined performance is not performed. [Selected Figure] Fig. 49

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and slot machine gaming machines (commonly referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that draws a lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot will be awarded based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole, and displays a moving image on a display device, which then freezes and freezes the image in a manner according to the result of the lottery. If the lottery results in a jackpot, the display device freezes and the jackpot image is displayed, creating a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, many gaming machines have been proposed that display symbols on a display device in a dynamic manner and stop the symbols in a manner that corresponds to the lottery result while also implementing effects that indicate the expectation of a win (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-220861 A

However, there is room for further improvement in this type of presentation. Therefore, the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that is able to prevent a decline in interest in gaming by incorporating improvements in the presentation.

Means 1: Acquisition means for acquiring start information when a start condition is satisfied;
a determination means for determining whether to grant a benefit based on start information in which a start condition is satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
A pattern changing means for changing a pattern when the determination is made by the determination means;
a storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of start information that the start condition is not satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
A storage display means for displaying that the information is stored in the storage means;
a pre-determination means for determining whether the determination means should determine to grant a privilege based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied, before the determination by the determination means is made;
A performance determination means for determining a performance based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A performance display device on which the performance is displayed;
An operation means operable by a player,
The performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The first predetermined performance is a performance in which a first predetermined display is performed using a predetermined area that is a part of the display area of the performance display device, the first predetermined display changes to a second predetermined display by changing the display mode inside the first predetermined display, and the second predetermined display can be changed to a third predetermined display including a display that protrudes outside the outline of the first predetermined display, and the change from the first predetermined display to the second predetermined display does not confirm the award of the bonus, but the change from the second predetermined display to the third predetermined display confirms the award of the bonus,
The second predetermined effect is different from the display by the memory display means, and is an effect in which an outline line changes and a cyclic display is performed with a predetermined time period as a cycle,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the start condition is satisfied when the memory means stores a number of the start information that is less than the predetermined number, the second predetermined performance may be performed, but when the first predetermined performance is being performed and the memory means stores a number of the start information that is less than the predetermined number, the second predetermined performance will not be performed even if the start condition is satisfied.

In one aspect of the present invention, the gaming machine changes from the first predetermined display to the second predetermined display in the first predetermined performance, and can further change from the second predetermined display to the third predetermined display. Although the change from the first predetermined display to the second predetermined display does not confirm the award of a bonus, the change from the second predetermined display to the third predetermined display confirms the award of a bonus, so that the player can enjoy hoping for the change from the first predetermined display to the second predetermined display, and from the second predetermined display to the third predetermined display. In addition, since the third predetermined display includes a display that protrudes outside the outline of the first predetermined display, the player can easily recognize that the award of a bonus has been confirmed by the protruding display. Furthermore, in the second predetermined performance, the outline line changes and a cyclic display is performed with a period of a predetermined time, making it easier for the player to recognize the second predetermined performance, which tends to increase the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, when a first predetermined effect that may result in the awarding of a bonus is being performed, the second predetermined effect that is easier for the player to recognize is not executed, allowing the player to concentrate on the first predetermined effect (see, for example, paragraphs [0645] to [1063], Figures 39 to 58, etc.).

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a front view showing an example of a schematic external appearance of a pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. Figure 3(a) is a flowchart showing the control processing steps performed by the main control MPU of the main control board when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, and Figure 3(b) is a flowchart showing the processing steps for timer interrupt control that is periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special symbol process processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process. 4 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for control performed by a peripheral control MPU mounted on a peripheral control board when power is applied to a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance when a valid operation period for an attack performance occurs (a period during which a specified operation on a specified operation part is detected, or which ends when a specified time has passed from the start of the period), and an operation to launch an attack is performed during the valid operation period. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance when a valid operation period for an attack performance occurs (a period during which a specified operation on a specified operation part is detected, or which ends when a specified time has passed from the start of the period), and an operation to launch an attack is performed during the valid operation period. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect when the operating unit is not operated. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect in which operation of the operation section has already begun at the start of the effective operation period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect in which operation of the operation section has already begun at the start of the effective operation period. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance in which the rotation operation unit 302 is operated before the valid operation period in another example of the second performance pattern of the attack performance. FIG. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing other configuration examples of the pressing operation unit and the rotating operation unit. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect that can be cancelled. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect that can be cancelled. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a strong boss is encountered in an exploration quest presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a strong boss is encountered in an exploration quest presentation. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a character discovers a weak boss that is a rare animal in a search quest presentation. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a search quest presentation. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which two selected characters are unable to discover a rare animal in a search quest presentation. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a search quest presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a search quest presentation. This is another example of exploration quest presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the final battle reach of the game "Daruma-san ga Koronda." FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the final battle reach of the game "Daruma-san ga Koronda." FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the chance game of Daruma-san ga koronda. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a relay race performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. A figure showing another example of a relay station effect and a section breakthrough effect included in a relay performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay race performance. A figure showing an example of the data structure of a fluctuation pattern table. A figure showing an example of a timing chart of the reach selection preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach selection preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach selection preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing another example of a reach selection preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a star change effect executed during a reach selection notice effect. A figure showing an example of a timing chart of the reach promotion announcement performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach promotion preview performance. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach promotion preview performance. A figure showing an example of a timing chart of a reach execution notice performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach execution notice presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach execution notice presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach execution notice presentation. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation when no weapon is selected in the reach execution preview presentation. A figure showing an example of the data configuration of a character equipment allocation table used in the reach execution preview performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a couple presentation. A figure showing an example of the data configuration of a pattern allocation table for determining the performance pattern of the smart ball croon performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a smart ball croon performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a smart ball croon performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance in which a ball rotates on a crane in a smart ball crane performance.

[1. Example of a Pachinko Machine Configuration]
1 is a front view showing an example of a schematic external appearance of a pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall. The pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 5 that is visible from the player's side and has a game area 5a into which the player can shoot game balls and into which the game balls can flow down.

The game area 5a includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) are dispensed. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 4 balls) are dispensed and a first special lottery is executed. The first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 are collectively referred to simply as the starting openings.

When a gaming ball passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is held. If a winning ticket is selected in the normal lottery, an opening/closing member (not shown) provided in the second starting port 2004 opens for a predetermined time. A gaming ball can enter the second starting port 2004 only when the opening/closing member is open. When a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number of gaming balls (e.g., one) are paid out and a second special lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special lottery, is held. The first special lottery and the second special lottery are collectively referred to as simply the special lottery.

In the play area 5a, multiple obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front. When the game ball hits the obstacle nails, the speed at which the game ball flows down is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball, allowing the player to enjoy watching its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails, the play area 5a also has a windmill (not shown) at an appropriate position that rotates when the game ball hits it.

When a jackpot is won in the first or second special lottery, the game transitions to a jackpot game state, and the large prize opening 2005 opens. When a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 15 balls) are paid out. In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening 2005 is repeatedly opened and closed. In addition, the game area 5a is arranged to surround an area where game balls do not flow down, and in this area where game balls do not flow down, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is arranged.

The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a pressing operation unit 303 and a rotation operation unit 302, which are each a presentation operation unit that can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 is an operation unit that can be pressed by the player. The rotation operation unit 302 is an annular operation unit arranged around the lower side of the pressing operation unit 303, and is an operation unit that can be rotated by the player. The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in one direction (for example, only clockwise) or in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise). In addition, the rotation operation unit 302 is equipped with a detection unit that can detect operation by the player.

The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a handle unit 500 that can be operated by a player to shoot game balls stored in an upper tray (not shown) into the game area 5a. The handle unit 500 includes a handle lever, a handle touch sensor, and a shot stop button. When the handle touch sensor detects contact with the player's palm, fingers, etc. and the handle rotates a predetermined amount or more, the game ball is shot out, and the more the handle is rotated, the stronger the game ball is shot out. Also, even if the handle touch sensor detects contact and the handle has rotated a predetermined amount or more, if the shot stop button is operated, the game ball will not be shot out.

Although not visible in FIG. 1, an outlet that penetrates from front to back is formed at the lowest point in the play area 5a (behind the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302). Game balls that flow down to the bottom end of the play area 5a are guided to the outlet and are discharged through the outlet to the rear of the play board 5.

Figure 2 is a block diagram showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 63 attached to the main body frame, and each of them is responsible for controlling the game. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the display of performance images on the performance display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 63 is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of game balls by rotating the handle.

The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a main control MPU, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has built-in watchdog timers that monitor its operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 receives detection signals from the first start port sensor 3052, which detects game balls received in the first start port 2002, the gate sensor 2801, which detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003, the second start port sensor 2401, which detects game balls received in the second start port 2004, the general prize port sensor 3051, which detects game balls received in the general prize port 2001, the large prize port sensor 2402, which detects game balls received in the large prize port 2005, the outlet sensor 3053, which detects game balls received in the outlet, and the magnetic sensor 2404, which detects unauthorized magnetism within the play area 5a, via the main control I/O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting drive signals to the second start port solenoid 2415 and the attacca solenoid 2418, etc., and outputs drive signals from the main control I/O port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal hold indicator, first special pattern indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special pattern indicator, second special hold number indicator, round indicator, etc. of the function display unit 1400.

The main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 63, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 63. Furthermore, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 63, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The payout control board 63, which controls the payout of game balls, is equipped with a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b that controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery using the ball delivery solenoid 145, an error LED indicator (not shown) that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch (not shown) for releasing an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the ball tank (not shown), tank rail (not shown), ball guidance unit (not shown), and payout device (not shown) to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance and starting the ball removal operation.

The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payouts on the payout control board 63, is equipped with a payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payouts are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port. In addition, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball out detection sensor 574, and the payout detection sensor 591.

The detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit and the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port. In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator to the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port, transmits commands for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls actually paid out to an external terminal via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. There are strong errors that are reported by stopping play, and weak errors that are reported while play continues. An error detected by the fired ball sensor (not shown) that detects the game ball B shot into the play area 5a and an error that detects illegal magnetism within the play area 5a are examples of strong errors. Examples of weak errors include a full tank error (an error indicating that the tank is full of game balls B stored in the far cover unit (not shown) based on a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor (not shown) provided in the far cover unit (not shown) that receives game balls that have been missed into the game area 5a and discharges them to the lower tray (not shown)), a ball out error (an error indicating that there are no game balls B in the payout device (not shown) based on a detection signal from a ball out detection sensor 574 installed in the payout device), and a counting switch error (an error indicating that there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 591, which is installed in the payout passage (not shown) in the payout device and detects game balls B, based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591).

The launch control unit 633b controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145. The launch control unit 633b controls the launch solenoid 542 and the ball delivery solenoid 145 so that 100 game balls B are shot out toward the game area 5a per minute.

In the handle unit 500, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle, and the shot stop button sensor 194, which detects whether the player wishes to forcibly stop shooting the game ball, are input to the launch control input circuit and then input to the launch timing control circuit. The handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects the rotation position of the handle. The strength with which the game ball is shot toward the play area 5a is electrically adjusted according to the detected rotation position.

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511.

The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by this sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board side light emission data from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to the decorative board 184, in order to output lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on the decorative board 184 such as the game board 5 and door frames, based on these various commands, and transmits drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various presentation units to the drive motors of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board. It transmits the signal to a motor or drive solenoid, transmits door side light emission data consisting of door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on a decorative board 184 such as a door frame, transmits control data (display commands) indicating a screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512, and also outputs a control signal (sound command) to the sound source IC for extracting sound information from the sound ROM.

In addition, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 and the rotation detection sensor 347 of the rotation operation unit 302 are input to the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and controls the playback of music, sound effects, and other sounds that match various performances from speakers 354 installed on the door frame, main body frame, etc.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU uses the built-in WDT and the external WDT together to diagnose whether its own system is out of control.

The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data for the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

Next, an example of the control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. Figure 3(a) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the control process executed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 3(a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first initializes the data stored in various registers and the RAM built into the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as the main control built-in RAM) in step S1, provided that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated. The RAM clear switch is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch also outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to operation before a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed since power was turned on, and if the main control MPU determines that a clear signal has been input when power is turned on, it executes an initialization process (step S1) to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags, etc.) in the main control built-in RAM. Then, if the RAM clear switch is not operated when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the information saved in the main control built-in RAM in the backup process is referenced without executing the initialization process (step S1), and a recovery process is executed to restore the state according to that information. Also, if the RAM clear switch is operated when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, an initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process, and the pachinko machine 1 is set to its initial state. Also, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to a non-time-saving state.

Next, in step S2, the random number is updated within a predetermined range. That is, the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is provided with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used in the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special pattern stops, variable random numbers used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for controlling the variable display of the special pattern, reach random numbers used in the lottery process for whether or not to make a reach (whether or not to execute a performance) as a game performance executed by the performance display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special pattern, pattern random numbers (first pattern random number, second pattern random number) used in the lottery process for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that a jackpot has occurred based on the special random numbers, and random numbers (normal random numbers) used in the lottery process for the winning or losing of the winning that triggers the opening of the second starting hole 2004.

In this example, the reach random number is configured to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, whether the start winning is made at the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the reach random number is obtained from the same counter that updates the reach random number. However, the execution rate of the reach performance may be made different by obtaining the reach random number from a counter with a different range of random numbers that update the reach random number, or the execution rate of the reach performance may be made different by providing a reach judgment table that is compared with the obtained reach random number and is a first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second reach judgment table that is corresponding to the second special symbol and has a judgment value different from that of the first reach judgment table.

In the process of step S2, only the random numbers that are not related to winning or losing (variable random numbers) are updated and the random number counter is operated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this manner, basically only the process of step S2 is repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

Figure 3 (b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control that is periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 3(b), in this interrupt control, first, as the process of step S11, a register save process is performed. Next, as the process of step S12, detection signals are input from various sensors such as the gate sensor 2801, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the first count sensor that detects the game ball B received in the large prize port 2005, the general prize port sensor 3001, various magnetic sensors, etc. Then, as the process of step S13, a random number update process is performed to update the value of the random number counter that generates the random number. Note that, in the process of step S13, the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special pattern and the normal pattern is stopped are updated, and the counter operation of the random number counter is performed.

After updating the random number in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes special symbol process processing, which includes a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, as the process of step S14. Note that this special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, the relevant process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second special symbol process flag) that indicates the progress of the game and is stored in the main control built-in RAM.

Then, in step S15, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes normal symbol process processing, which includes a lottery process for determining whether or not a winning combination will result in the opening of the second starting hole 2004. In this normal symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is basically selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag, which indicates the progress of the game.

When the special symbol process (step S14) and normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs step S16 to transmit the command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the special symbol process to the peripheral control board 1510, etc. Then, in step S17, it performs step S17 to transmit the command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510, etc.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs information output processing in step S18, which outputs data such as winning information to be supplied to the hall management computer.

Next, in step S19, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a prize ball process that outputs a payout control command to the payout control board 63 so that prize balls corresponding to the signals are paid out to the player when the detection signals of the first start hole sensor 3052, the second start hole sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, the general winning hole sensor 3051, etc. are in the ON state. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 63 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, and pays out prize balls to the player. In this example, when game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 and the first start hole sensor 3052 turns on, "3 balls" are paid out to the player; when game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 and the second start hole sensor 2401 turns on, "1 ball" is paid out; when game ball B enters the big prize hole 2005 and the first count sensor turns on, "15 balls" are paid out; and when game ball B enters the general prize hole 2001 and the general prize hole sensor 3051 turns on, "8 balls" are paid out to the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process in step S20 to check the increase or decrease in the number of reserved memories. Then, in step S21, it executes a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine. After that, it controls the drive of the actuator that operates at all times (step S22), restores the contents of the above register (step S23), and ends this control when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24).

In this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS due to the above control. Note that, although in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by timer interrupt processing, the interrupt processing may, for example, only set a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred. In this case, however, the game control process is executed by main processing.

Figure 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14). Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in Figure 4, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes the start-up winning determination process (S31).

An example of the start winning determination process will be described. When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2002, it obtains from the random number counter a first special random number for determining the result of the first special lottery, a reach random number for determining whether a reach will be executed, a first pattern random number, and a variable random number for determining a variable pattern. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the number of reserved first special random numbers in the main control built-in RAM, with a predetermined number (e.g., four) as the upper limit (in other words, if the number of reserved memories has already reached the upper limit, the update process is not performed).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may also execute a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the acquired first special random number, reach random number, first pattern random number, and variable random number, whether the display result of the first special pattern variable display is to be a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach display as a game display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game display to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning.

In this pre-judgment process, a pre-judgment table (not shown) is compared with the acquired first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, and variable random number to determine in advance pre-judgment information indicating whether or not a jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot if a jackpot will occur, whether or not a reach presentation will be executed as a game presentation executed by the presentation display device 1600 if a jackpot will not occur, the type of game presentation to be executed, etc. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 transmits a command that corresponds this pre-judgment information to the value of the counter in the reserved memory (i.e., which reserved first special random number the pre-judgment information corresponds to) to the peripheral control board 1510 before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started (the start condition is met), so that the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the so-called pre-reading presentation corresponding to the start winning before the variable display corresponding to the start winning is started (the start condition is met).

The process performed when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004 is similar to the process performed when a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, although the random numbers and tables used for the judgment are different, so a description of this process will be omitted.

Following the start determination process of step S31, the main control MPU determines whether or not a jackpot execution flag indicating that control is being performed for a jackpot game is set (step S32), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, executes a jackpot control process (step S36) to control the jackpot game. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern stops (the result of the hit determination and the content of the jackpot type) indicates, for example, a "15R jackpot", the jackpot winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected that 10 game balls B have entered the jackpot winning hole 2005, and the opening and closing pattern is repeated 15 times to control to a 15R jackpot game.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the jackpot opening 2005, a process for setting a time-saving flag is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control (control executed in the time-saving state) is being executed, and is set when the jackpot game based on the time-saving controlled jackpot ends after the jackpot game ends, and is reset by the first special symbol stop process described later or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process processing described later.

In addition, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, the main control MPU executes a first special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops (step S34) on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is "0" (step S33), and executes a second special pattern process including a lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops (step S35) on the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserved memory area is not "0" (step S33).

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S34). The first special symbol process executed in step S34 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S35 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, on the condition that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85), one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag. Note that if the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following processes.

1. First special pattern normal processing (step S80) in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read and a lottery process is performed based on the first special random number to determine the display mode when the variable control of the first special pattern is stopped.

2. First special symbol stop pattern setting process (step S81) in which the display mode when the control of the first special symbol's fluctuation is stopped is determined based on the results of a lottery process for the display mode when the control of the first special symbol's fluctuation is stopped.

3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process is performed for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number and the variation mode of the performance display executed in response to the first special symbol on the performance display device 1600.
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S83) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.

5. A first special pattern stop process (step S84) that stops the display of the first special pattern so that the display mode of the first special pattern when the control of the first special pattern is stopped, determined based on the result of a lottery process, is displayed on the first special pattern display of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S1 to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed.

An example of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) will be described. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, if the counter value of the first special reserved number counter is 0 or more, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 reads out random numbers (e.g., first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) from the main control built-in RAM, subtracts 1 from the first special reserved number counter, and shifts the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, which are stored in each memory area of the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM, in a first-in first-out manner. Furthermore, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a winning judgment process, which is a lottery process for winning or losing the big win or small win, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the first special pattern process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the first special pattern stop pattern setting process (step S81), the first special pattern normal processing ends.

In the hit determination process described above, the hit determination table stored in the ROM with the main control is compared with the special random number (the first special random number read in the first special random number normal processing when the first special symbol normal processing is being performed, and the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing when the second special symbol normal processing is being performed) to determine whether or not a hit has been won, and the hit flag is set according to the result of the determination. If a hit has not been won, that is, if it is determined to be a miss, the reach determination table stored in the ROM with the main control is compared with the reach random number read (the reach random number read in the first special symbol normal processing when the first special symbol normal processing is being performed, and the reach random number read in the second special symbol normal processing when the second special symbol normal processing is being performed) to determine whether or not to execute a reach, and if so, what type of reach to execute, and the reach flag is set according to the result of the determination.

An example of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) will be described. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, that is, the result of the hit determination process, and determines the stopped big hit symbol or the losing symbol based on the determination result. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 transmits a determination result notification command indicating the lottery result (indicating the type of big hit, small hit, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the mode of the stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) to the peripheral control board 1510, and updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the first variable pattern setting process (step S82).

An example of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) will be described. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for a jackpot corresponding to the determined type of jackpot if the jackpot flag is set, selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for a reach if the reach flag is set, and selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for a miss if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, i.e., a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed). Each variation pattern table is stored in the ROM built into the main control board.

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in the normal processing of the first special symbol to determine the variation pattern to be executed, and a variation pattern command is sent to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern is to be started, thereby starting the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (the start condition is met). The main control MPU also sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for only the variation time determined in this manner, and the performance control is performed on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

In addition, in the variation pattern table of this example, for example, the variation time corresponding to the first special random number is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time-saving state and 4 to 60 seconds in the time-saving state, and similarly, the variation time corresponding to the second special random number is set to 13 to 60 seconds in the non-time-saving state and 2 to 60 seconds in the time-saving state.

When the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is determined whether the counter value of the time-saving count counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0", and if this counter value is not "0", the time-saving count counter is counted down, and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving count counter is "0". If the counter value is "0" as a result, a time-saving end flag is set, which indicates the end of the time-saving control.

If it is determined that the time-saving counter is not "0", this process ends when the first special pattern process flag is updated (step S155) so that the process transitions to the first special pattern change process (step S83).

An example of the first special symbol fluctuation process (step S83) will be described. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 subtracts 1 from a fluctuation timer in which a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern (step S82) is set. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery-selected fluctuation time has elapsed, the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

An example of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84) will be described. When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop pattern determined in the first special symbol stop pattern setting processing on the first special symbol display of the functional display unit 1400, and transmits a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special symbol.

Next, when the time-saving end flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag and also resets the time-saving flag. This ends the time-saving control and starts control of the non-time-saving state when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been displayed in a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times).

In the time-saving state, in order to cause the game ball B to enter the second starting hole 2004, an instruction recommending a so-called right hit (hereinafter also referred to as a right hit instruction) is executed using the performance display device 1600 and the speaker 354, etc. As described above, when a predetermined number of special pattern changes are completed after the time-saving state begins, the time-saving state ends, and the game returns to the normal state (non-time-saving state). When the game returns to the normal state, the right hit instruction ends, and an instruction recommending a so-called left hit (hereinafter also referred to as a left hit instruction) is executed using the performance display device 1600 and the speaker 354, etc.

For example, if the number of time-saving cycles is 100 (i.e., the time-saving cycle ends when 100 special symbol variations have occurred since the time-saving cycle began), then, for example, by inserting game ball B into second starting hole 2004 during the 100th variation from the start of the time-saving cycle (i.e., the final variation of the time-saving cycle), a maximum of four second special symbol variations can be performed in the normal state after the time-saving cycle ends.

In other words, after the time-saving state ends, the second special symbol change (which can mainly be performed during the time-saving state) is executed, but since the state is still normal, a state occurs in which a left-hit command is executed, which is a different hitting method from during the time-saving state.

When the jackpot variation of the second special pattern variation ends, the jackpot game begins, and in the jackpot game, the right-hit command is executed in the same way as during the time-saving state in order to make the game ball enter the big prize hole.

In the normal state after the time-saving feature has finished, if a player hits from the right, the player can enter a lottery that is different from the special lottery that is normally drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003, but since the probability of winning in the normal lottery is extremely low (or zero), it is difficult for game ball B to enter second starting hole 2004, and there are fewer opportunities to enter the special lottery compared to when a player hits from the left, meaning the probability of winning a jackpot is lower. If a player hits from the right in this way when a left-handed hit is required (specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls pass through gate 2003 within a predetermined time), a left-handed hit warning effect is executed to warn the player to hit from the left. The left-handed hit warning effect does not appear in situations when a right-handed hit is required, such as during a time-saving feature or jackpot game.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether the jackpot flag is set, and when it determines that the jackpot flag is set, it sets a jackpot start command indicating that a jackpot game corresponding to the type of jackpot is to start, sets the waiting time until the jackpot game starts (the time during which a display indicating that the jackpot game is to start is displayed, etc.) in the interval timer, and further sets the jackpot in progress flag and the time-saving flag, and updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing. When it determines that the jackpot flag is not set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing without executing the above processing.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. Pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S91) in which the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big prize game will start based on the fact that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have stopped changing and become big prize symbols, or the player waits until the next round starts.

2. Large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open when the special pattern stops changing and becomes a large winning pattern, or when the next round starts, and the large prize opening 2005 is closed after being open for a long time (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the first or second count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have entered the large prize opening 2005 (step S92)

3. Post-opening process of the jackpot hole (step S93) that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot game has ended when all rounds are completed.

The jackpot process flag is operated in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 3) to indicate that the pre-opening process (step S91) of the jackpot opening should be performed. In addition, in the processing during opening of the jackpot opening (step S92), at the start of a round in which the jackpot opening 2005 is controlled to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and at the end of a round in which the jackpot opening 2005 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game presentation corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker 354, etc.

Figure 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal pattern process (step S15).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and that game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs gate section passing processing as the process of step S802, such as first obtaining the normal random number of the normal pattern from the random number counter and storing it in the normal pattern reserved memory area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal pattern process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed depending on the normal pattern process flag.

1. Normal pattern normal processing (step S803) in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read and a lottery process is performed based on the read normal random number to determine the display mode when the variable control of the normal pattern is stopped.

2. A normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation processing that waits until the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805)

4. A normal pattern stop process (step S806) that stops the display of the normal pattern so that the display mode when the normal pattern change control is stopped, determined based on the results of a lottery process for the display mode when the normal pattern change control is stopped, is displayed on the normal pattern display of the functional display unit 1400.

5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped indicates a state that suggests a "normal symbol win", a process to control the reception of the game ball B into the second starting hole 2004 is executed (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is manipulated in the processing of step S1 described above to indicate that the normal processing of the normal symbol (step S803) should be performed.

An example of the gate passage process (S802) will be described. If the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and it is determined that a game ball has passed through the gate 2003, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are obtained from the random number counter, and the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the reserved memory of the normal random numbers in the main control built-in RAM with a predetermined number (e.g., 4) as the upper limit (in other words, if the number of reserved memories has already reached the upper limit, the update process is not performed). Then, the normal pattern process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the normal pattern normal process (step S803).

An example of the normal pattern normal processing (S803) will be described. When the normal pattern process flag indicates that the normal pattern normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 judges whether there is a variable display control of the normal pattern in the reserved state based on the counter value of the counter of the normal reserved memory. As a result, if it is judged that there is a variable display control of the normal pattern in the reserved state, the random number stored in the first memory area of the random numbers (e.g., normal random number, normal pattern variable random number) related to the display mode of the normal pattern stored in the normal pattern reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU is read from the same RAM. Then, the count of the normal reserved number counter is decremented by 1, and the random numbers (normal random number, normal pattern variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal pattern is stopped, which are stored in each memory area of the normal reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU, are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Then, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the read normal random number with the normal winning judgment table stored in the main control built-in ROM, and judges whether it is a normal winning. If it judges it to be a normal winning, it sets a normal winning flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a normal winning, and determines the normal winning pattern as the pattern when the fluctuation control of the normal pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the normal pattern). On the other hand, if it judges it not to be a normal winning, it determines the normal losing pattern as the pattern when the fluctuation control of the normal pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the normal pattern).

After the lottery process for the normal symbols has been performed in this manner, a normal symbol determination result notification command corresponding to the lottery results (indicating either a normal symbol win or a loss) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804).

An example of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) will be described. When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, if the time-saving flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal symbol variation pattern determination table during time-saving stored in the main control built-in ROM with the normal random number read in the normal symbol normal process, and if the time-saving flag is set, compares the normal symbol variation pattern determination table during non-time-saving stored in the main control built-in ROM with the normal random number read in the normal symbol normal process to determine the normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern) to be executed. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a normal symbol variation pattern command that notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of normal symbol variation in the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and starts the normal symbol variation display displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (start condition is met).

When the main control MPU determines the normal pattern change pattern, it sets the normal pattern change time corresponding to the determined normal pattern change pattern in the normal pattern change timer. This allows the performance control to be performed on the normal pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 (the change display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device) for only the normal pattern change time corresponding to the determined normal pattern change pattern.

In addition, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during non-time-saving in this example, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to, for example, 20 seconds. On the other hand, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during time-saving in this example, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to, for example, 0.8 seconds so that the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during non-time-saving. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, when the normal pattern variable display control is started, this process ends when the normal pattern process flag is updated so that the process transitions to the normal pattern variable process (step S805).

An example of the normal symbol change process (step S805) will be described below. When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol change process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 subtracts 1 from the normal symbol change timer in which the normal symbol change time is set. Then, when the normal symbol change time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the normal symbol change time has elapsed, the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

An example of the normal symbol stop processing (step S806) will be described below. When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs display control to display the normal symbol stop pattern determined in the normal normal symbol processing on the normal symbol display of the functional display unit 1400, and transmits a normal symbol stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the derived display of the first special symbol stop pattern.

Next, when the normal winning flag is set, the opening pattern of the second starting hole 2004 according to the current game state is set using the opening pattern table for normal winning stored in the main control built-in ROM. Specifically, if the second starting hole 2004 is controlled to a non-time-saving state when it starts to open, if a lottery result indicating a normal winning is obtained by a lottery based on a normal random number, the opening hole solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting hole 2004 is turned on to execute opening pattern A in which the second starting hole 2004 opens and closes in a short opening mode (for example, 0.05 seconds). As a result, when opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting hole 2004, the time for which the second starting hole 2004 opens is short, and it is difficult to enter a game ball when the second starting hole 2004 is in an open state. In other words, even if the second starting hole 2004 opens and closes in a non-time-saving state, almost no game balls enter the hole.

On the other hand, if the second starting hole 2004 is controlled to the time-saving state when it starts to open, when the lottery result based on the normal random number results in a normal winning lottery, the starting hole solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting hole 2004 is turned on to execute opening pattern B in which the second starting hole 2004 opens and closes in a long opening mode (e.g., 1.5 seconds). As a result, when opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern for the second starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2004 opens for a long time, and the game ball can enter the hole when the second starting hole 2004 is in the open state.

When the opening pattern of the second starting hole 2004 is set, a normal winning start command is set to indicate that a normal winning game is to start, and the normal pattern process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the normal electric role opening process. The normal winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the normal winning game presentation according to the type of normal winning indicated by the normal winning start command can be executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker 354, etc.

In addition, if the normal symbol hit flag is not set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the normal symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol normal processing, which is the initial value, without executing the above-mentioned processing.

An example of the normal electric feature opening process (step S807) will be described below. If it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in an open state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 ends this process when it controls the second starting port 2004 to a closed state by turning off the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 if a predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the set opening pattern) has elapsed since the second starting port 2004 was controlled to an open state.

In addition, if it is determined that the second starting port 2004 is in a closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 ends this process when it is time to open the second starting port 2004 by turning on the starting port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 and controlling the second starting port 2004 to an open state.

If it is not the time to open the second start hole 2004, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a normal win end command when the number of times the second start hole 2004 has been opened reaches a predetermined number (the number of times the second start hole 2004 has been opened in the set opening pattern). Then, this process ends when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the initial value of normal symbol normal processing. The normal win end command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the normal win end command, it can end the performance of the normal symbol win game being executed by the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker 354, etc.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. Figure 8 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs an initial setting process (step S501). This initial setting process includes processes such as clearing the RAM built into the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process is started to monitor whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes the 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is counted up (the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is incremented by 1), and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, i.e., when 16 ms have passed, the 16 ms progress flag T is set and the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (to 0). In this way, the 16 ms progress flag T is set to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set to "0". When the 16 ms progress flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms progress flag T is "1"), the 16 ms progress flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is executed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady-state processing, processing is executed to control the performance display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker 354, etc., based on commands received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady-state processing is completed, the process returns to step S502, and the above-mentioned steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is executed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of 16 ms steady-state processing executed every 16 ms in the sub-main processing. In the 16 ms steady-state processing, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the performance control process of step S602, control processing related to the performance display device 1600 is executed based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (first fluctuation pattern setting process and second fluctuation pattern setting process).

In addition, in the sound control process of step S603, control processes related to the speaker 354 provided in the pachinko machine 1 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamps and LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 are executed. In the information output process of step S605, processes such as sending lamp and LED lighting signals to various decorative boards 184, 273, etc. are executed. In the random number update process of step S606, processes are executed to update the random numbers used for various settings in the performance control process (step S602).

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady-state processing is completed within 16 ms. Even if it takes more than 16 ms from the start of the 16 ms steady-state processing to the end of the 16 ms steady-state processing, the 16 ms steady-state processing is not executed from the beginning (from the command analysis processing of step S601) immediately after 16 ms have elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady-state processing. In other words, if 16 ms have elapsed during the execution of the 16 ms steady-state processing, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and the 16 ms steady-state processing is started when it is determined in step S502 after the end of the 16 ms steady-state processing that the 16 ms elapsed flag has been set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady-state processing to update the various random numbers, but the time (timing) at which the various random numbers are updated is not limited to this. For example, the various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady-state processing.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation control process (step S602). In the presentation control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five processes depending on the presentation process flag that indicates the progress of the game and is stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510.

1. After performing processing to control the performance display device 1600, LED, speaker 354, etc. based on the variation pattern command (first variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the first special pattern, second variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the second special pattern) that indicates the variation pattern of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) analyzed in the command analysis processing, a variation performance start processing (step S711) that changes the performance process flag to a value corresponding to the variation performance processing

2. A process during variable performance (step S712) that measures the time that has elapsed since control of the performance display device 1600, LEDs, speaker 354, etc. was started, and processes such as controlling the performance display device 1600, LEDs, speaker 354, etc. are performed according to the elapsed time, and the above-mentioned performance process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variable end process according to the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) has elapsed.

3. Processing to derive and display a predetermined display result based on receiving a stop display command instructing to stop the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), changing the above-mentioned performance process flag to a value corresponding to the variable performance start processing if it is a miss, changing it to a value corresponding to the big hit performance processing if it is a big hit, and changing it to a value corresponding to the small hit performance processing if it is a small hit (step S713)

4. A jackpot performance process (step S714) in which the performance display device 1600 is processed to execute display control during the jackpot game based on the reception of a jackpot start command that instructs the start of the jackpot game, and the performance process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variable performance start process when the jackpot game ends.

By the above processing, the effect display device 1600 will display the decorative pattern changes in synchronization with the display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) displayed by the special pattern display devices (first special pattern display device of the functional display unit 1400, second special pattern display device of the functional display unit 1400). If the special pattern does not change for a specified period of time, the effect display device 1600 will display a demo screen (a specified video including the characters and story that appear in the effect of the pachinko machine 1, an explanation of the effect, the model name, and the manufacturer name, etc.) indicating that the machine is waiting for customers.

[2. Attack Production]
11 and 12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an attack effect when an operation effective period of the attack effect (a period during which a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation unit is detected or a period that ends when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the period) occurs and an operation for launching an attack is performed during the operation effective period. The attack effect is an effect that is executed, for example, before the reach effect starts during a fluctuation in which the reach effect is executed, or during a fluctuation in which the reach effect is not executed. The attack effect is an effect that is executed, for example, when a start winning is made at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the jackpot flag is set, and when the reach flag is set, regardless of which fluctuation pattern is selected, and is an effect that is executed when a start winning is made at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected.

In an attack performance, an effective operation period occurs, and when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit during the effective operation period, an ally character (a white character in the figure) launches an attack of either a punch or a kick against an enemy character (a character with diagonal lines in the figure). If the attack hits the enemy character, the performance progresses to a reach performance, and if the enemy character avoids the attack, the performance does not progress to a reach performance, and the decorative pattern stops with a miss combination and the ongoing variation ends. Note that, for example, when a variation pattern in which a reach is executed is selected, the allocation in which an ally character executes a punch performance in an attack performance is smaller than the allocation in which an ally character executes a kick performance (for example, the allocation in which a punch is executed is 1/3 of the allocation in which a kick is executed), and when a variation pattern in which a reach is not executed is selected, the allocation in which an ally character executes a punch performance in an attack performance is larger than the allocation in which an ally character executes a kick performance (for example, the allocation in which a punch is executed is 3 times the allocation in which a kick is executed).

The first presentation pattern that is performed when an attack presentation is being performed encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (e.g., pressing (a so-called single press)), and the second presentation pattern that is performed when an attack presentation is being performed encourages the continuous operation of the rotation operation unit 302 (e.g., continuing a rotation by a predetermined amount for a predetermined period of time or more, which is an operation different from pressing (a so-called single press) which is the operation of the pressing operation unit 303).

In this example, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated clockwise up to 360 degrees (for example, when it is rotated clockwise 360 degrees, a stopper is activated to prevent it from rotating further clockwise), and one step of rotation clockwise rotates it 10 degrees, so it can be rotated up to 36 steps. The rotation detection sensor 347 provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 (how many steps it has been rotated). The range of clockwise rotation from the initial position of the rotation operation unit 302 does not have to be the above-mentioned 360 degrees, and may be any value between 45 degrees and 360 degrees, for example.

Note that in the diagram, the effects branch into the upper and lower rows, but the effects before the branching are common to both the first and second effect patterns, the effects written in the upper row after the branching are the effects of the first effect pattern, and the effects written in the lower row after the branching are the effects of the second effect pattern.

In the first presentation pattern, an effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs. When the pressing detection sensor 381 provided in the pressing operation unit 303 changes from an off state to an on state during the effective operation period, the operation period ends, and as a post-operation presentation corresponding to the operation, a reach suggestion presentation in which the ally character attacks the enemy character (a presentation in which the rate at which a reach is executed differs depending on whether a punch or kick appears) and a presentation in which the attack hits the enemy character or is avoided by the enemy character are executed.

In the second effect pattern, an effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 occurs. During this effective operation period, when the rotation detection sensor 347 provided on the rotation operation unit 302 detects a right rotation of a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter, five steps or more) from the initial position, an effect in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura is executed as an in-operation effect corresponding to that operation. This in-operation effect in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura continues to be executed as long as a right rotation of five steps or more of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302.

Furthermore, in the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate right for 3 seconds for 5 steps or more during the operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302, the operation valid period ends, and as post-operation presentations, a reach suggestion presentation in which the ally character attacks the enemy character (presentation in which the expectation of the reach being executed differs depending on whether a punch or kick appears) and a presentation in which the attack hits the enemy character or is avoided by the enemy character are executed. In the first presentation pattern, if the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from an off state to an on state during the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303, the operation valid period ends, and in the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate right for 3 seconds during the operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302, the operation valid period ends. In other words, the operation for ending the operation valid period is different between the first presentation pattern and the second presentation pattern. In the second presentation pattern, the conditions for the end of the valid operation period and the execution of the post-operation presentation may be that the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 continues continuously for a predetermined time during the valid operation period regardless of the amount of rotation, that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by 5 steps or more during the valid operation period or is operated for a predetermined time in total regardless of the amount of rotation, or that the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined step (for example, the maximum amount of rotation of 36 steps) during the valid operation period, etc.

The effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first presentation pattern and the effective operation period of the rotating operation unit 302 in the second presentation pattern are both 10 seconds. The effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first presentation pattern may be longer or shorter than the effective operation period of the rotating operation unit 302 in the second presentation pattern. However, since the operation required for the operation to cause the post-operation performance in the second presentation pattern (continuing the right rotation of the rotating operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds during the effective operation period of the rotating operation unit 302) is longer than the operation to cause the post-operation performance in the first presentation pattern (changing the pressing detection sensor 381 from the off state to the on state during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303), it is desirable that the effective operation period of the rotating operation unit 302 in the second presentation pattern is longer than the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first presentation pattern.

11(A) shows a state in which all the decorative symbols have changed and an attack performance has started. In FIG. 11(A), a message is displayed on the performance display device 1600 indicating that if the punch of the ally character hits the enemy character, it is a chance. The decorative symbols are multiple rows of symbols that are displayed on the performance display device 1600 and indicate the result of a special lottery. The decorative symbols are, for example, three rows of left decorative symbols, middle decorative symbols, and right decorative symbols. The three rows of decorative symbols start to change when the special symbol change starts, and then, for example, the left decorative symbols, right decorative symbols, and middle decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in that order. When all the decorative symbol rows are finally stopped and displayed, the result of the special lottery is shown to the player by the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed. When the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character in the attack performance, the decorative symbols form a reach after the attack performance ends, and the reach performance is executed. A state in which a decorative pattern reach has been formed is a state in which all decorative patterns in multiple rows (e.g., three rows of left, middle, and right decorative patterns) except for one decorative pattern (e.g., the middle decorative pattern) are stopped in the same display mode (e.g., the left and right decorative patterns are the same pattern) (however, this is a so-called temporary stop state in which they appear to be stopped even though they are slightly shaking up and down), and the one decorative pattern is fluctuating.

In FIG. 11(A), the effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 has not started (the player does not know whether a first presentation pattern will be executed in which the pressing operation unit 303 is required to be operated during the effective operation period, as in the presentation from FIG. 11(C) onwards, or a second presentation pattern will be executed in which the rotating operation unit 302 is required to be rotated during the effective operation period, as in the presentation from FIG. 11(C') onwards), and the player has not yet operated the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302.

In FIG. 11(B), an ally character and an enemy character are displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a line suggesting that the ally character will soon attack is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. In FIG. 11(B), the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 has not yet started, and the player has not yet operated the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302. In addition, the player does not know whether the first or second performance pattern will be executed.

After FIG. 11(B), if it is determined that the first presentation pattern is to be executed, the presentation will transition to FIG. 11(C) or later, and if it is determined that the second presentation pattern is to be executed, the presentation will transition to FIG. 11(C') or later. First, the case where the presentation transitions to FIG. 11(C) (where it is determined that the first presentation pattern is to be executed) will be described. Following FIG. 11(B), in FIG. 11(C), the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 starts, and a gauge 1603 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period and a display prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 (an image imitating the pressing operation unit 303 and a message saying "Press!") are displayed on the presentation display device 1600. Note that in FIG. 11(C), the player has not yet operated the pressing operation unit 303.

In FIG. 12(D), the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 is progressing, and the remaining time of the effective operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 is decreasing, but the player has not yet operated the pressing operation unit 303.

Figure 12 (E) shows the state where the player operates the pressing operation unit 303 during the valid operation period (the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in by a height tmax from the initial position of the pressing operation unit 303 before Figure 12 (D), and a press is detected), and the post-operation performance has started. Specifically, a reach suggestion performance is being performed in which the ally character throws a punch (which has a lower chance of being reached than a kick) at the enemy character, and it has not yet been notified whether the punch will hit the enemy character.

Figure 12 (F) is a continuation of the post-operation performance, in which the enemy character steps back to avoid the punch of the ally character, and it is announced that the performance will not progress to a reach performance, and the post-operation performance ends. In the post-operation performance, a sound corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation performance (for example, a different sound depending on whether the ally character's attack is a punch or a kick, and a different sound depending on whether the ally character's attack hits or not) is output from speaker 354, and a lamp lights up in a mode corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation performance (for example, a different light emission mode depending on whether the ally character's attack is a punch or a kick, and a different light emission mode depending on whether the ally character's attack hits or not).

When the first presentation pattern is being executed in a variation in which a reach is being executed, the reach suggestion presentation in FIG. 12(E) (a presentation in which an ally character throws a punch or kick) is followed by a presentation in FIG. 12(F) in which the ally character's attack hits the enemy character (a presentation informing the player that the performance will progress to a reach presentation), ending the post-operation presentation, which then progresses to a reach presentation. In the post-operation presentation of the first presentation pattern in a variation in which a reach is being executed, a sound corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation presentation (which may be the same sound as when the performance does not progress to a reach or a different sound) is output from speaker 354, and a lamp is illuminated in a mode corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation presentation (which may be the same illumination mode as when the performance does not progress to a reach or a different illumination mode).

Following the performance shown in Figure 12 (F), the decorative patterns stop when a combination is reached that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a miss (a combination in which the display mode of at least one of the left decorative pattern, center decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern is different from the display mode of the remaining decorative patterns), and the ongoing special pattern variation ends (not shown).

Next, we will explain the case where the effect of FIG. 11(C') (where it has been decided that the second effect pattern will be executed) is transitioned to. Following FIG. 11(B), in FIG. 11(C'), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 starts, and a gauge 1603 indicating the remaining time of the effective operation period and a display encouraging the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 (an image imitating the rotation operation unit 302 and the message "Spin!") are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Note that in FIG. 11(C'), the player has not yet operated the rotation operation unit 302.

In FIG. 12(D'), the operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302 progresses and the remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the gauge 1603 decreases. Furthermore, because the player has rotated the rotation operation unit 302 to the right five steps or more, an in-operation performance is executed in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura, a sound corresponding to the aura is output from the speaker 354, and a lamp lights up in the color of the aura. Note that the display mode of the aura, such as the color and size, suggests an attack (punch or kick) to be performed by the ally character, thereby suggesting the likelihood of a reach being executed before the post-operation performance.

In FIG. 12(E'), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 ends when the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate right for 3 seconds for 5 steps or more during the effective operation period, and the post-operation performance begins. Specifically, a reach suggestion performance is performed in which the ally character throws a punch at the enemy character (which has a lower expectation of a reach being executed than a kick), and it has not yet been notified whether the punch will hit the enemy character. FIG. 12(F') is a continuation of the post-operation performance, in which the enemy character steps back to avoid the ally character's punch, and it is notified that the performance will not progress to a reach performance, and the post-operation performance ends. Following the performance in FIG. 12(F'), the decorative symbols stop in a combination that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a miss, and the special symbol variation that is being performed ends (not shown).

Figure 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an attack effect when the operation unit is not operated. First, an example in which it has been decided that the first effect pattern will be executed will be described. Following Figure 11 (C), in Figure 13 (D2), similar to Figure 12 (D), the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 progresses and the remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the gauge 1603 decreases, but the player does not operate the pressing operation unit 303.

In FIG. 13(E2), the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 has progressed further, and the remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the gauge 1603 has further decreased. Also, in FIG. 13(E2), the player has not operated the pressing operation unit 303, and the same display as FIG. 13(D2) is being performed, except for the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the gauge 1603. In FIG. 13(F2), even though the entire operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 has elapsed and the operation valid period has ended, the pressing operation unit 303 has not been operated, and the attack effect has ended without a post-operation effect being performed. Following the effect in FIG. 13(F2), the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating that the result of the special lottery is a miss, and the ongoing special symbol variation ends (not shown).

Next, an example will be described in which it has been decided that the second presentation pattern will be executed. Following FIG. 11(C), in FIG. 13(D'2), similar to FIG. 12(D'), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has progressed and the remaining time of the effective operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 has decreased. In FIG. 13(D'2), the player has not operated the rotation operation unit 302 (no right rotation of five steps or more has been made), so the presentation during operation in which an ally character is surrounded by an aura has not been executed.

In FIG. 13 (E'2), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has progressed further, and the remaining time of the effective operation period indicated by the gauge 1603 has further decreased. In FIG. 13 (E'2), the player has not yet started operating the rotation operation unit 302 (right rotation of 5 steps or more has not continued for 3 seconds), so the same display as in FIG. 13 (D'2) is shown, except for the display of the remaining time of the effective operation period of the gauge 1603, and no in-operation performance is executed.

Figure 13 (F'2) shows a state in which the condition that the rotation operation unit 302 rotates right for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds during the operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302 is not met, and the operation valid period ends when the entire operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302 has elapsed, and the attack effect ends without a post-operation effect being performed. Following the effect of Figure 13 (F'2), the decorative symbols stop in a combination that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a miss, and the special symbol variation being performed ends (not shown). Note that when the rotation operation unit 302 rotates right for 5 steps or more during the operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302, an effect in which an ally character is surrounded by an aura is performed as an in-operation effect, but unless the rotation operation unit 302 rotates right for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds by the end of the operation valid period, the post-operation effect will not be executed.

In addition, if the effective operation period ends without any operation being performed during the first and second attack effect patterns to execute a post-operation effect, after the effective operation period ends, an effect similar to the post-operation effect (i.e., an ally character attack is launched, and then an effect in which an ally character notifies the player whether or not the attack will progress to a reach effect depending on whether or not the attack hits) may be performed, and then an effect in which decorative patterns stop in a combination that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a miss, or a reach effect may be executed.

Figures 14 and 15 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a performance in which the operation of the operation part has started at the start of the operation effective period of the attack performance. Figure 14 (A) is the same as Figure 11 (A). First, an example of a transition to Figure 14 (B3) (where it has been decided that the first performance pattern will be executed) will be explained. Following Figure 14 (A), in Figure 14 (B3), a performance similar to that in Figure 11 (B) is being performed, and the player is already operating the pressing operation part 303 (the pressing operation part 303 has been pressed down by a height tmax from the initial position of the pressing operation part 303 in Figure 12 (A), and a pressing operation has been detected). In Figure 14 (B3), the pressing operation part 303 has been operated and is in an on state, but the operation effective period has not started, so the post-operation performance is not being executed.

In FIG. 14 (C3), the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 has started. In FIG. 14 (C3), the player is still operating (pressing) the pressing operation unit 303 from FIG. 14 (B3). In other words, the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 is in the ON state before the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs, and has not changed from the OFF state to the ON state since the operation valid period started. In this case (i.e., even if the pressing operation unit 303 is in the operated state at the start of the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303, if there is no change from the non-operated state to the operated state during the operation valid period), the post-operation performance does not occur. In addition, if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated at the same time as the operation valid period starts in FIG. 14 (C3) (i.e., the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 is in the ON state just at the start of the operation valid period), the same performance as that in FIG. 14 (C3) and after is performed.

In FIG. 15 (D3), the player continues to operate the pressing operation unit 303 (keeps it pressed) from FIG. 14 (B3). In this way, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in a state of being operated at the start of the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 continues thereafter, the pressing detection sensor 381 equipped to the pressing operation unit 303 does not change from the OFF state to the ON state during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303, so the post-operation performance is not executed even though the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated. Therefore, no sound corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation performance is output from the speaker 354, and the lamp is not illuminated in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation performance. In FIG. 15 (D3), the same performance as in FIG. 12 (D) is performed. In addition, if the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a lamp that is illuminated when the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated (pressure detection sensor 381 is on), the lamp is illuminated when the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated at the start of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, and is also illuminated when the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated at the start of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is continuing.

In FIG. 15 (E3), the player continues to operate the press operation unit 303 (keeps it pressed) from FIG. 14 (B3). The press detection sensor 381 equipped to the press operation unit 303 does not change from the off state to the on state during the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303, so the post-operation performance is not executed. Therefore, no sound corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation performance is output from the speaker 354, and the lamp is not illuminated in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the display mode of the post-operation performance. In FIG. 15 (E3), the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 has progressed further, and the remaining time indicated by the gauge 1603 has further decreased.

In FIG. 15 (F3), the entire valid operation period has elapsed. Also, in FIG. 15 (F3), the player is still operating (keeps pressed) the press operation unit 303 from FIG. 14 (B3), and the press detection sensor 381 equipped to the press operation unit 303 has not changed from the OFF state to the ON state during the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303, so no post-operation performance is performed. Following the performance in FIG. 15 (F3), the decorative patterns stop in a combination that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a miss, and the ongoing special pattern variation ends (not shown).

14 (B3), the same effects are performed for both the first and second presentation patterns, so the player does not know which presentation pattern is being executed. If it is determined that the first presentation pattern is to be executed, and the pressing operation unit 303 is operated before the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs and the pressing detection sensor 381 is in an on state at the start of the operation effective period, if the post-operation presentation is executed, the reach suggestion presentation (the presentation in which the ally character throws a punch or kick) is suddenly executed at the same time as the operation effective period begins, which will extremely surprise the player. Therefore, when it is determined that the first presentation pattern is to be executed, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated before the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs and the pressing detection sensor 381 is in an on state at the start of the operation effective period, the post-operation presentation is not executed. In addition, if it has been determined that the first presentation pattern will be executed, and the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated before the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs and the pressing detection sensor 381 is in the on state at the start of the effective operation period, the post-operation presentation will not be executed if the operation is continued, and even if the operation is stopped (i.e., even if the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from the on state to the off state), the post-operation presentation will not be executed.

If the pressing operation unit 303 is in an operating state before the valid operation period occurs, if the operation is stopped during the valid operation period and the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again (i.e., if the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from an on state to an off state and then changes from the off state to an on state), the post-operation performance will be executed.

Next, an example of a transition to FIG. 14(B'3) (where it has been decided that the second presentation pattern will be executed) will be described. Following FIG. 14(A), in FIG. 14(B'3), a presentation similar to that in FIG. 11(B) is being performed, and the player has already rotated the rotation operation unit 302 five or more steps to the right. In FIG. 14(B'3), the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated five or more steps to the right, but the effective operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 has not yet begun, so the presentation during operation is not being executed.

In FIG. 14(C'3), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has started. In FIG. 14(C'3), the player is still operating the rotation operation unit 302 (rotating it to the right for 5 steps or more) from FIG. 14(B'3). In other words, the right rotation of 5 steps or more of the rotation operation unit 302 was detected before the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 occurred, and the rotation detection sensor 347 is still detecting the rotation of 5 steps or more at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302. As long as the right rotation of 5 steps or more of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., there is no need to change the rotation detection sensor 347 of the rotation operation unit 302 from the off state), an operation-in-progress performance in which an ally character is surrounded by an aura similar to that of FIG. 12(D') appears. Therefore, in FIG. 14(C'3), a right rotation of five or more steps of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, and therefore the in-operation effect appears from the start of the effective operation period. Note that if the rotation operation unit 302 has not been operated before the start of the effective operation period of FIG. 14(B'3), if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by five or more steps from the start of the effective operation period in FIG. 14(C'3), the in-operation effect will start at the point at which the right rotation of five or more steps of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected.

In FIG. 15 (D'3), continuing from FIG. 14 (B'3), the rotation operation unit 302 is still being operated (rotated to the right for more than five steps), but since the rotation operation unit 302 has not been rotated to the right for more than five steps for three seconds during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 (three seconds have not yet elapsed since the start of the effective operation period), the during operation performance continues but the post-operation performance is not performed, and the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 progresses further, causing the remaining time indicated by the gauge 1603 to decrease.

In FIG. 15 (E'3), continuing from FIG. 14 (B'3), the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate to the right for 3 seconds for 5 steps or more during the operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302 ends, and the post-operation performance begins. Specifically, a reach suggestion performance is being performed in which the ally character throws a punch at the enemy character (which has a lower expectation of a reach being executed than a kick), and it has not yet been notified whether the punch will hit the enemy character. FIG. 15 (F'3) is a continuation of the post-operation performance, in which the enemy character steps back to avoid the punch of the ally character, and it is notified that the performance will not progress to a reach performance, and the post-operation performance ends. Following the performance of FIG. 15 (F'3), the decorative symbols stop with a combination that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a miss, and the special symbol variation being performed ends (not shown).

In the second presentation pattern, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right for 5 steps or more before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the effective operation period starts, the during-operation presentation in which the ally character is wrapped in an aura is executed. Therefore, even if a player who gets extremely nervous when seeing the reach suggestion presentation rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for 5 steps or more before the start of the effective operation period and the effective operation period starts, if the rotation operation unit 302 is stopped to the right for 5 steps or more before continuing to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for 3 seconds during the effective operation period (by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by less than 5 steps, or by not rotating it at all), the player does not need to see the reach suggestion presentation. Note that in the second presentation pattern, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right for 5 steps or more before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the effective operation period starts, the during-operation presentation in which the ally character is wrapped in an aura does not need to be executed. In the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated five or more steps to the right before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the effective operation period begins, even if the during operation presentation in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura is not executed, if the rotation operation unit 302 is stopped from rotating five or more steps to the right before continuing for three seconds during the effective operation period (by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by an amount less than five steps, or by not rotating it at all), the reach suggestion presentation will not be seen.

In the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by 5 steps or more at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation is stopped before the post-operation presentation appears, and the rotation operation unit 302 is restarted to rotate to the right by 5 steps or more during the effective operation period, but the rotation operation unit 302 cannot continue to rotate to the right by 5 steps or more for 3 seconds by the end of the effective operation period, the post-operation presentation is not performed as shown in FIG. 15 (F3). In other words, in the second presentation pattern, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by 5 steps or more at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation is stopped before the post-operation presentation appears, the reach suggestion presentation cannot be made to appear unless the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by 5 steps or more by 3 seconds before the end of the effective operation period.

In the above example, the attack effect is a pre-reach effect that indicates whether it will develop into a reach effect, but it may also be possible to execute an attack effect as a reach effect. Also, when an attack effect that is a pre-reach effect that indicates whether it will develop into a reach effect is executed and it is announced that it will develop into a reach effect, it may be possible to execute an attack effect as a reach effect in the same change (i.e., in the reach effect that will develop into).

In the attack performance as a reach performance, the ally character launches either a punch or a kick attack, and if the ally character's attack hits the enemy character, a jackpot is announced, and if the ally character's attack is avoided by the enemy character, a miss is announced. Note that, for example, the allocation for determining that an ally character will execute a performance in which they will throw a punch in an attack performance in a jackpot fluctuation (a fluctuation in which the jackpot flag is set) is smaller than the allocation for determining that they will execute a performance in which they will throw a kick (for example, the allocation for throwing a punch is 1/3 of the allocation for throwing a kick), and the allocation for determining that an ally character will execute a performance in which they will throw a punch in an attack performance in a fluctuation that is not a jackpot fluctuation is larger than the allocation for determining that they will execute a performance in which they will throw a kick (for example, the allocation for throwing a punch is 3 times the allocation for throwing a kick).

When the pressure detection sensor 381 changes from the OFF state to the ON state during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, the first pattern of the attack performance as a reach performance is executed as a post-operation performance in which the friendly character attacks the enemy character (the rate at which a jackpot is notified varies depending on whether a punch or kick appears) and the attack hits the enemy character or is avoided by the enemy character. Note that the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first pattern of the attack performance as a reach performance may be the same length as or different from the effective operation period in the first performance pattern of the attack performance (performances in Figures 11 (A) to 12 (F)), which is the performance before the reach that indicates whether it will develop into a reach performance.

In the second pattern of attack effects as reach effects, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by 5 steps or more during the operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302, an effect in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura is executed as an in-operation effect. The operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302 in the second pattern of attack effects as reach effects is the second attack effect pattern (which may be the same length as or different from the operation effective period in the effects of Figures 11 (A) to 12 (F')) that is a pre-reach effect that indicates whether it will develop into a reach effect. In the second pattern of attack effects as reach effects, when the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate to the right by 5 steps or more for 3 seconds during the operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302, an effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character (the rate at which a jackpot is notified varies depending on whether a punch or kick appears) and an effect in which the attack hits the enemy character or is avoided by the enemy character are executed as post-operation effects.

In the first presentation pattern of the attack presentation as a reach presentation, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is kept pressed before the start of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 as shown in Figs. 14(B3) to (C3) and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed at the start of the effective operation period (because the pressing detection sensor 381 provided in the pressing operation unit 303 does not change from the off state to the on state during the effective operation period), the post-operation presentation is not executed at the start of the effective operation period. However, since whether or not the jackpot notified by the attack presentation as a reach presentation has been won is important information for the player, it is desirable that at least a part of the post-operation presentation (for example, both the presentation of the punch or kick in Fig. 12(E) (presentation suggesting the expectation of a jackpot) and the presentation of the presentation of the jackpot in Fig. 12(F) notifying whether or not the jackpot has been won, or only the presentation of Fig. 12(F)) be performed when the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 ends because a predetermined time has passed since the start of the effective operation period.

In addition, since whether or not a jackpot has been won is important information for the player, in the second presentation pattern of the attack presentation as a reach presentation, when the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 ends because a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, it is desirable to perform at least a part of the post-operation presentation (for example, both the presentation of throwing a punch or kick (presentation suggesting the expectation of a jackpot) in FIG. 12(E) and the presentation of notifying whether or not a jackpot has been won in FIG. 12(F), or only the presentation in FIG. 12(F)). For example, even if the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated right for 5 steps or more at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, but the right rotation is stopped and the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more is resumed during the effective operation period, but the duration of the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more is less than 3 seconds by the end of the effective operation period, it is desirable to perform at least a part of the post-operation presentation when the effective operation period ends.

In addition, in the second performance pattern of the attack performance, an operation may be prompted to another operation unit instead of the rotation operation unit 302. This other operation unit is, for example, an operation unit capable of a rotation operation, other than the rotation operation unit 302. This other operation unit may also be an operation unit capable of an operation different from a rotation operation (i.e., an operation different from a rotation operation is prompted). In addition, the operation unit prompted to be operated in the first and second performance patterns of the attack performance may be the same operation unit or different operation units.

For example, in the second attack performance pattern, the player may be prompted to operate the pressing operation unit 303 (i.e., the same operation unit as the operation prompted in the first performance pattern) instead of the rotation operation unit 302 (the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs instead of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302). In this case, in the second attack performance pattern, the player is prompted to operate the pressing operation unit 303 by long pressing or repeated taps (continuous operations on the pressing operation unit 303) instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for five or more steps for three seconds.

In the second attack performance pattern, when the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be pressed for a long time instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for 3 seconds, if the pressing detection sensor 381 is in the ON state during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 (regardless of the change of the pressing detection sensor 381 from the OFF state to the ON state), an effect in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura is executed as an effect during operation. In other words, in the second attack performance pattern, when the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be pressed for a long time instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for 3 seconds, the pressing detection sensor 381 being in the ON state during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 corresponds to the rotation operation unit 302 being rotated to the right for 5 steps or more during the operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302 when the rotation operation unit 302 is prompted to be rotated in the second attack performance pattern.

In addition, in the case where a long press of the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted instead of continuing the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds in the second attack performance pattern, if the pressing operation unit 303 continues to be pressed for a predetermined time during the operation valid period (if the pressing detection sensor 381 continues to be in the on state for a predetermined time), the post-operation performance appears. In other words, in the case where a long press of the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted instead of continuing the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds in the second attack performance pattern, the pressing detection sensor 381 continuing to be in the on state for a predetermined time during the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 corresponds to the rotation operation unit 302 continuing to rotate 5 steps or more to the right for 3 seconds during the operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302 when the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is prompted in the second attack performance pattern.

In the second attack performance pattern, when the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be repeatedly hit instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for 3 seconds or more, an effect in which the ally character is surrounded by an aura is executed as an effect during operation when the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from the OFF state to the ON state during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303. In other words, in the second attack performance pattern, when the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be repeatedly hit instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 to the right for 3 seconds or more, the change of the pressing detection sensor 381 from the OFF state to the ON state during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 corresponds to the rotation operation unit 302 being rotated to the right for 5 steps or more during the operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302 when the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is prompted in the second attack performance pattern. However, in the case where the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be repeatedly hit instead of continuing the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds in the second attack performance pattern, if the pressing detection sensor 381 is in the on state at the start of the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303, a performance in which the ally character is covered with an aura is executed as an in-operation performance. Note that the in-operation performance in which the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be repeatedly hit in the second attack performance pattern is erased when a predetermined time has elapsed since the pressing detection sensor 381 became in the on state. However, when the in-operation performance in which the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be repeatedly hit instead of continuing the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds is being executed in the second attack performance pattern, if the pressing detection sensor 381 changes to the off state and then changes to the on state again, the in-operation performance is started again. In other words, if the pressure detection sensor 381 turns off and then turns on again before a predetermined time has elapsed since the in-operation performance began, the in-operation performance will continue without ending.

In addition, in the second attack performance pattern, instead of continuing the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds, if the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be pressed a predetermined number of times during the effective operation period (if the pressing detection sensor 381 is turned on a predetermined number of times), the post-operation performance appears. In other words, in the second attack performance pattern, instead of continuing the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 for 5 steps or more for 3 seconds, if the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be pressed a predetermined number of times during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing detection sensor 381 being turned on a predetermined number of times during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 corresponds to the rotation operation unit 302 continuing to rotate 5 steps or more to the right for 3 seconds during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 when the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is prompted in the second attack performance pattern.

Note that a second attack performance pattern may be performed after a first attack performance pattern is performed in the same variation. For example, a first attack performance pattern is performed as a pre-reach performance indicating whether it will develop into a reach performance, and after the first performance pattern, a second attack performance pattern is executed as a reach performance in the same variation.

In addition, the first attack performance pattern may be performed after the second attack performance pattern is performed in the same variation. For example, the second attack performance pattern is performed as a pre-reach performance indicating whether it will develop into a reach performance, and after the second performance pattern, the first attack performance pattern is executed as a reach performance in the same variation.

Figure 16 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a presentation in which operation of the rotation operation unit 302 has begun at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 in the second presentation pattern of the attack presentation. In the second presentation pattern of the attack presentation in Figure 16, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated five or more steps to the right at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty is incurred in which operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is invalidated for a predetermined time (hereinafter, eight seconds) from the start of the effective operation period.

Figure 16 (A) is similar to Figure 11 (A). Following Figure 16 (A), in Figure 16 (B'4), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has not started, and a message ("Don't turn until the gauge appears!!") urging the player not to operate the rotation operation unit 302 before the start of the effective operation period is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In FIG. 16 (C'4), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has not yet started, and the same effect as in FIG. 11 (B) is being performed, but the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated five or more steps to the right. FIG. 16 (D'4) shows the state in which the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has started. Because the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated five or more steps to the right at the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty has occurred in which operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is invalid for eight seconds from the start of the effective operation period. In FIG. 16 (D'4), a message indicating that the penalty has occurred ("Rotation is invalid for eight seconds because it was rotated before the gauge appeared") is displayed on the effect display device 1600, superimposed on the effect display of FIG. 13 (D'2).

In addition, in FIG. 16 (D'4), due to a penalty that invalidates the operation, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by 5 steps or more, but the effect of the ally character being surrounded by an aura as part of the during-operation effect is not performed, and this is not counted toward the duration of the 5 steps or more right rotation that is a condition for causing the post-operation effect to appear.

In FIG. 16 (E'4), 8 seconds have passed since the start of the valid operation period (i.e., since the penalty started), so the penalty is released and operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is now valid. Note that the valid operation period for the rotation operation unit 302 continues to progress even while the penalty is occurring, so the initial 10-second valid operation period has only 2 seconds remaining when the penalty is released in FIG. 16 (E'4).

Therefore, when a penalty occurs, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated five or more steps to the right from the time the penalty is released until the end of the effective operation period, the post-operation effect cannot be made to appear (because there are two seconds remaining in the effective operation period when the penalty is released, and the condition for making the post-operation effect appear is that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated five or more steps to the right for three seconds during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302). Note that if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated five or more steps to the right during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 after the penalty is released, the effect of an ally character being surrounded by an aura will be executed as an during-operation effect.

In FIG. 16 (E'4), the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 has elapsed, and therefore the effective operation period has ended, and the attack effect ends without a post-operation effect being performed. Following the effect in FIG. 16 (E'4), the decorative symbols stop in a combination that indicates that the result of the special lottery is a miss, and the ongoing special symbol variation ends (not shown).

In the above example, the penalty time is set to 8 seconds from the start of the valid operation period, but the penalty time may be set to 7 seconds or less from the start of the valid operation period so that the reach suggestion effect can appear even if operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is started after the penalty has ended.

Figure 17 is a schematic diagram showing another example of the configuration of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation operation unit 302 in this example can be rotated clockwise from the initial position within a range of up to 360 degrees (for example, when it is rotated clockwise 360 degrees, a stopper is activated to prevent further clockwise rotation), and one step of clockwise rotation results in a 10 degree rotation, allowing a maximum of 36 steps of rotation, which is similar to the rotation operation unit 302 in Figures 11 to 16. The rotation operation unit 302 is also similar to the rotation operation unit 302 in Figures 11 to 16 in that it is equipped with a sensor that can detect the amount of rotation (how many steps it has been rotated).

The rotating operation unit 302 in this example further includes a specific detection unit (not shown) capable of detecting a specific operation. The specific operation detected by the specific detection unit may be, for example, a touch by the player, or a pressing or rotation by the player. The specific detection unit may be provided so as to cover the entire rotating operation unit 302 (i.e., if the specific operation is a touch, the specific detection unit will come into contact with the rotating operation unit 302 when the rotating operation unit 302 is operated), or may be provided so as to cover a part of the rotating operation unit 302 (i.e., if the specific operation is a touch, the rotating operation unit 302 can be operated without touching the specific detection unit). The pachinko machine 1 also includes a movable body 310 that is attached to the game board 5, for example, and that is shaped like a chicken character and is located outside the game area 5a (it may be located above, below, to the right, or to the left of the game area 5a).

In FIG. 17(a), the rotation operation unit 302 is in the initial position, that is, the amount of rotation is zero. At this time, the pressing operation unit 303 is in the initial position (the initial position in this example is the lowest position, and in the initial position, a part of the pressing operation unit 303 is hidden by the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., the part is not visible to the player because of the rotation operation unit 302), and a part of the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes from the rotation operation unit 302), and cannot be pressed. Note that when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the initial position, the entire pressing operation unit 303 may be hidden by the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., the entire pressing operation unit 303 is not visible to the player because of the rotation operation unit 302). Also, in FIG. 17(a), the movable body 310 is not moving.

In FIG. 17(b), the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r1 steps from the initial position. When the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise from the initial position, the pressing operation unit 303 starts to protrude, and when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated to r1 steps, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes t1 from the initial position (i.e., the area of the pressing operation unit 303 that is not visible due to the rotating operation unit 302 is reduced compared to the state in FIG. 17(a)). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes from the initial position (i.e., as long as the rotating operation unit 302 has only rotated clockwise from the initial position, regardless of whether a specific operation has been performed on the specific detection unit), the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. In this way, the pressing operation unit 303 can be operated only when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, allowing the player to enjoy complex operations.

When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r1 steps or more, if the specific detection unit provided on the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 performs a periodic operation (here, a swinging operation from side to side). In FIG. 17(b), the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r1 steps, and the specific detection unit provided on the rotation operation unit 302 detects the specific operation, so the movable body 310 swings left and right, with a swing width of w1. If the specific detection unit does not detect the specific operation, the movable body 310 will not move even if the rotation operation unit 302 rotates by r1 steps or more. In addition, as described above, the specific detection unit may be arranged to cover the entire outer circumferential surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In this case, for example, if the specific operation detected by the specific detection unit is contact, the player will inevitably come into contact with the specific detection unit when he rotates the rotation operation unit 302, so that the movable body 310 will move when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 by r1 steps or more.

When the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the greater the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, the greater the range of movement of the movable body 310. Also, if the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the operation of the movable body 310 may start at the point when the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 starts, even if the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is less than r1 steps.

In FIG. 17(c), the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise r2 (>r1) steps from the initial position (i.e., the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise r2-r1 steps from the state in FIG. 17(b) where the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise r1 steps from the initial position), and the player is performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotating operation unit 302. When the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated r2 steps, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes from the initial position by a maximum protrusion amount tmax (>t1) (i.e., the area of the pressing operation unit 303 that is not visible due to the rotating operation unit 302 is reduced compared to the state in FIG. 17(b)). Furthermore, in FIG. 17(c), the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated r2 (>r1) steps, and the specific detection unit provided on the rotating operation unit 302 detects the specific operation, so the movable body 310 swings left and right, with a swing width of w2 (>w1).

Note that within the range of 0 to r2 steps of the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, the larger the amount of rotation, the greater the amount of protrusion of the pressing operation unit 303; however, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by more than r2 steps, the amount of protrusion of the pressing operation unit 303 remains tmax. On the other hand, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by an amount greater than r2 steps, the width by which the movable body 310 swings continues to increase until the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by the maximum rotation amount rmax. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotating right by the maximum rotation amount rmax, the movable body 310 swings left and right by the maximum swing width wmax.

In FIG. 17(d), the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise (r2<) r3 (< maximum rotation amount rmax) steps from the initial position (i.e., in FIG. 17(c), the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise r2 steps from the initial position, and then rotated clockwise r3-r2 steps), and the player is performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotating operation unit 302. Even if the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise up to r3 steps (which is r2 steps or more), the pressing operation unit 303 remains in a state of protruding by tmax, which is the maximum protrusion amount, from the initial position. Also, when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated r3 (>r2) steps and the specific detection unit provided on the rotating operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 swings left and right, and the swing width is (maximum swing width wmax>) w3 (>w2).

In FIG. 17(e), the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise (r3<) r4 (< maximum rotation amount rmax) steps from the initial position (i.e., in FIG. 17(d), the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise r3 steps from the initial position, and then rotated clockwise r4-r3 steps), and the player is performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotating operation unit 302. Even if the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated up to r4 steps (which is r2 steps or more), the pressing operation unit 303 remains in a state of protruding tmax, which is the maximum protrusion amount, from the initial position. Also, when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r4 (>r3) steps, if the specific detection unit provided on the rotating operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 swings left and right, and the swing width is (maximum swing width wmax>) w4 (>w3).

Note that even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotating to the right, the movable body 310 does not move when the specific detection unit does not detect a specific operation, but when a specific operation is performed on the specific detection unit while the rotation operation unit 302 is maintained in its right rotation, the movable body 310 suddenly moves with a width corresponding to the amount of rotation. Specifically, for example, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotating to the right by r4 steps, the movable body 310 does not move when the specific detection unit does not detect a specific operation, but when a specific operation is performed on the specific detection unit while the rotation operation unit 302 is maintained in its right rotation by r4 steps, the movable body 310 suddenly swings with a swing width w4.

In FIG. 17(f), the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r4 steps from the initial position, the player is performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position. When the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position, the operation of the movable body 310 stops regardless of the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, and even if the specific detection unit detects a specific operation. Note that when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise from the initial position, the player is performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided on the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position, if the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is stopped, the movable body 310 operates according to the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. In addition, the drive member for swinging the movable body 310 left and right operates with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position while the movable body 310 is operating, for example, when the movable body 310 returns to the initial position, stoppers are activated on the left and right of the movable body 310, thereby stopping the operation of the movable body 310.

In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise from the initial position, a specific operation is being performed on the specific detection unit, and the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position, the operation of the movable body 310 is stopped by configuring the detection of the specific operation by the specific detection unit to be invalidated by the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, or by configuring the detection of the specific operation to be blocked from input (i.e., the specific operation on the specific detection unit is invalidated when the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated).In addition, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated while pressing the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 will not protrude as long as the pressure on the pressing operation unit 303 is maintained.

In the illustrated example, the volume of the rotation operation unit 302 is drawn smaller than the volume of the pressing operation unit 303, but the volume of the protruding portion when the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes to tmax may be smaller than the volume of the rotation operation unit 302.

In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise from the initial position by r1 steps or more, and the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation and the movable body 310 operates periodically, it is desirable that the operation mode of the movable body 310 changes, such as the operation speed of the movable body 310 becoming faster or the operation range becoming wider, as the number of steps by which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise increases. In the example of FIG. 17, an example is described in which the operation range of the movable body 310 becomes larger as the number of steps by which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise increases, but although the operation range and operation period of the movable body 310 are the same, the speed at which the movable body 310 starts moving from the initial position and moves to the maximum operation range may be increased. Specifically, for example, when the movable body 310 operates, the movable body 310 repeats a series of operations in which it moves from the initial position to the right, returns to the initial position, stops at the initial position, moves from the initial position to the left, and returns to the initial position. At this time, for example, the movable body 310 moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range on the right side taking time t1-kr (where t1 and k are positive constants, r is the number of steps by which the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated to the right, and t1 and k are determined so that t1-kr>0 even when r is the maximum value), returns from the maximum operating range on the right side to the initial position taking time t2 (a positive constant), stops at the initial position for time t3+2kr (where t3 is a positive constant), moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range on the left side taking time t1-kr, and returns from the maximum operating range on the right side to the initial position taking time t2 (a positive constant). As a result, the greater the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, the smaller the value of the time t1-kr, and therefore the greater the speed at which the movable body 310 moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range on the right and left sides, but the operating range of the series of operations and the time required for the series of operations, that is, the operating cycle of the series of operations (t1-kr)+t2+(t3+2kr)+(t1-kr)+t2=2t1+2t2+t3, can be kept constant regardless of the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. Note that, as the number of steps in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise increases, the operating range and operating cycle of the movable body 310 are the same, but the speed at which the movable body 310 moves from the initial position to the maximum operating range increases. In this case, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed to the initial position while the movable body 310 is performing a periodic operation, the periodic operation of the movable body 310 is stopped regardless of the speed of the movable body 310.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 does not protrude to the maximum protrusion amount tmax, pulling the pressing operation unit 303 (i.e., performing an operation on the pressing operation unit 303 to apply a force in the opposite direction to the direction of the force applied to the pressing operation unit 303 when pressing) can cause the pressing operation unit 303 to protrude to the maximum protrusion amount tmax, and at this time the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated clockwise according to the protrusion amount of the pressing operation unit 303. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 does not protrude to the maximum protrusion amount tmax in response to the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, pulling the pressing operation unit 303 to the maximum protrusion amount tmax without operating the rotation operation unit 302 can cause the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate to r2 steps even without the player operating the rotation operation unit 302. Furthermore, by pulling the pressing operation unit 303 to perform a specific operation on the specific detection unit, the state shown in FIG. 17(c) can be achieved without the player operating the rotating operation unit 302, and the periodic movement of the movable body 310 can begin.

17(b), the movable body 310 can start to operate even if the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is less than the minimum amount of rotation (r2 steps) for making the pressing operation unit 303 reach the maximum protrusion amount tmax. However, the movable body 310 may not operate until the amount of rightward rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined amount of rotation (e.g., r3 steps) that is greater than the r2 steps, which is the minimum amount of rotation for making the pressing operation unit 303 reach the maximum protrusion amount tmax. In other words, the movable body 310 may not operate even if the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes to the maximum protrusion amount tmax. In addition, if the movable body 310 can start operating for the first time when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated beyond the state in which the pressing operation unit 303 first protrudes to the maximum protrusion amount tmax (for example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is rotated r3 steps, which is greater than the r2 steps that are the rotation amount of the rotating operation unit 302 for the pressing operation unit 303 to first protrude to the maximum protrusion amount tmax), the movable body 310 will not operate even if the specific detection unit provided in the rotating operation unit 302 detects a specific operation after the pressing operation unit 303 is pulled to the maximum protrusion amount tmax.

In the example of FIG. 17, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is described as protruding upward from the top surface of the rotation operation unit 302, but the protruding pressing operation unit 303 may be provided so as to protrude from a part of the side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in the outward direction of the side surface. The protruding pressing operation unit 303 may be attached to the rotation operation unit 302, or the protruding pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 may be integrated. In addition, when the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is provided so as to protrude from a part of the side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in the outward direction of the side surface, it is desirable that the surface area exposed to the outside of the rotation operation unit 302 when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the initial position is about 1/30 to 1/5 of the surface area of the side surface of the rotation operation unit 302.

FIGS. 18 and 19 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a cancelable attack effect. Note that canceling an attack effect means that the attack effect is stopped and another effect is performed instead, or that the effect is not performed at all. A cancelable effect is an effect that can be determined in both a variation pattern in which a reach is executed and a variation pattern in which a reach is not executed. Note that in FIG. 19, the effects are branched into an upper section and a lower section according to the operation on the operation unit. In the example of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17, as well as a specific detection unit.

A cancelable attack effect is cancelled if a right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e. the attack effect is stopped and ends at that point. For example, if it is cancelled before a reach suggestion effect in which an ally character launches a punch or kick attack, no reach suggestion effect will be performed, and no effect will be performed to notify whether the attack will develop into a reach depending on whether it hits). Note that in a cancelable attack effect, if force is applied so that the press operation unit 303 does not protrude (i.e. the press operation unit 303 is not moved from its initial position), the attack effect will not be cancelled even if the rotation operation unit 302 detects a right rotation. If the detection of rotation operations by the rotation operation unit 302 is configured to be invalidated by the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, or if the detection of specific operations is blocked for input, even if the pressing operation unit 303 does not have a sensor for detecting pressure, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right while the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed (i.e., while the pressing operation unit 303 is not protruding), the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is invalidated, and the attack effect is not canceled.

Note that a cancelable attack effect is always within the valid operation period of the rotation control unit 302, and the attack effect can be cancelled by operating the rotation control unit 302 at any time from the start of the attack effect (from the time a message similar to that in FIG. 11(A) is displayed) to the end of the attack effect (until the effect in which the attack hits or is avoided by the enemy character similar to that in FIG. 12(F) and FIG. 12(F') ends). Also, if a predetermined time has passed since the start of a cancelable attack effect without the attack effect being cancelled, a reach suggestion effect is displayed in which the ally character launches an attack (punch or kick) at the enemy character, and an effect is displayed to notify the player whether the attack will develop into a reach in which the enemy character avoids the ally character's attack or the attack will hit the enemy character.

In Fig. 18(A), the same effect as in Fig. 11(A) is being performed. In Fig. 18(A), the rotation operation unit 302 is not being operated, so the pressing operation unit 303 is in the initial position and does not protrude, so the pressing operation unit 303 cannot be pressed, the movable body 310 is not moving, and the attack effect continues without being canceled.

In FIG. 18(B), a message indicating that the attack effect will be cancelled when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated ("Spin if you don't want to see the effect!") is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 18(B), the rotation operation unit 302 is not operated, so the pressing operation unit 303 is not protruding from the initial position and cannot be pressed, the movable body 310 is not moving, and the attack effect continues without being cancelled. Note that if a cancelable attack effect has started even before the message in FIG. 18(B) is displayed (for example, even at the timing of FIG. 18(A)), the attack effect can be cancelled. Note that the effect in FIG. 18(B), which displays a message indicating the operation to cancel the attack effect, does not have to be performed.

In FIG. 18(C), the same effect as in FIG. 11(B) is being performed, but since the entire attack effect is during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, the gauge 1603 indicating the remaining time of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302 is not displayed. In FIG. 18(C), since the rotation operation unit 302 is not being operated, the pressing operation unit 303 is not protruding from the initial position and cannot be pressed, the movable body 310 is not operating, and the attack effect continues without being canceled.

First, an example of transition to FIG. 19(D) (an example of canceling an attack effect) will be described. FIG. 19(D) shows a state in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r1 step in the state of FIG. 18(C), and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. However, in FIG. 19(D), the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated. At this time, the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected without detecting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303, so the attack effect is canceled (ended). In FIG. 19(D), the attack effect is canceled and only the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but when the attack effect is canceled, the stopped decorative pattern and an image that is not displayed in a cancelable attack effect (for example, an image different from either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in a cancelable attack effect) may be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 19(D), the rotation operation unit 302 has been rotated clockwise by r1 steps, causing the pressing operation unit 303 to protrude to t1, and the specific detection unit has detected a specific operation, causing the movable body 310 to move to a width of w1. In this way, when the conditions for canceling the attack effect are met, the movable body 310 is moving, so even if the attack effect is canceled, the player's interest in the game will not decrease as long as he or she watches the movement of the movable body 310.

As described above, when a cancelable attack effect is being performed, the attack effect may be canceled simply by detecting a specific operation on the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302. In this case, the attack effect can be canceled without the pressing operation unit 303 protruding, and without operating the movable body 310, and the attack effect is always canceled in order to operate the movable body 310 (because the conditions for operating the movable body 310 include the specific detection unit detecting a specific operation) (i.e., the movable body 310 cannot be operated when a cancelable attack effect is being performed). Also, in a cancelable attack effect, there may be a timing when the attack effect is not canceled even if a specific operation is detected on the specific detection unit provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

In FIG. 19(E), the attack effect is canceled, but the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r3 steps, and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. Some players may feel bored if nothing is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the attack effect is canceled, so an effect in which an ally character swings a punch is displayed on the effect display device 1600, provided that the amount of clockwise rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is within a predetermined range (here, r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps) and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. In FIG. 19(E), the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r3 (>r2) steps, so the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes to tmax, and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, so the movable body 310 operates with a width w3. When this ally character is practicing a punch, the color of the fist may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot in the ongoing variation (for example, when an ally character is punching with a white fist, the likelihood of a jackpot in the ongoing variation is lower than when the ally character is punching with a red fist). Note that instead of the effect of an ally character practicing a punch, the attack effect described in Figures 11 to 16 may be executed, or an effect different from the cancelable attack effect (an effect in which a display different from the ally character or enemy character displayed in the attack effect is displayed) may be executed.

The performance of an ally character practicing a punch may be executed immediately when the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, or may not be executed immediately after the detection of these operations, such as when the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation and a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects the specific operation. Also, the performance of an ally character practicing a punch may be executed with a predetermined probability when the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation (i.e., it does not necessarily have to be executed even if these operations are detected).

In addition, after a cancelable attack effect is cancelled, the next special pattern change may start and an effect in which an ally character practices a punch may be performed, provided that the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps, and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. In addition, in the special change that starts next after a cancelable attack effect is cancelled, an effect may be performed in which an ally character makes a fighting pose but does not practice a punch (an example of an effect that suggests that an effect in which an ally character practices a punch will be performed in the next special pattern change), provided that the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps, and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, and further an effect in which an ally character practices a punch may be performed in the next special pattern change.

In FIG. 19(F), after the attack effect is canceled, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r4 steps, and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. In FIG. 19(F), the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r4 (>r2) steps, so the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes to tmax, and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, so the movable body 310 operates at a width w4. When the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more, and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation, a message is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This message may be displayed so that it appears to the player as if it is coming from the chicken of the movable body 310. The message "You're shaking too much and you're going to get dizzy. Stop it, fall..." in FIG. 19(F) is a message that encourages the player to reduce the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. The player can enjoy the message even more when he sees it. If the player follows the message to reduce the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, the amount of movement of the movable body 310 will be reduced, and the load on the movable body 310 can be reduced. The message may be, for example, a message that encourages the player to reduce the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, such as "You're shaking too much and you're going to get dizzy. Reduce the amount of rotation...", or the message may also suggest to what extent the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 should be reduced (for example, to less than r4 steps). The message is not displayed when the conditions that the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation are not met.

If the conditions for displaying the message of FIG. 19(F) are met while the display of FIG. 19(E) is continuing, the message of FIG. 19(F) may be displayed superimposed on the display of FIG. 19(E). However, in order to make the message of FIG. 19(F) easier for the player to recognize and to quickly reduce the load on the movable body 310, when the display of FIG. 19(E) and the message of FIG. 19(F) are displayed superimposed, it is desirable that in the area where the display of FIG. 19(E) and the message of FIG. 19(F) are displayed superimposed, the message of FIG. 19(F) has a higher display priority (i.e., the message of FIG. 19(F) is displayed closer to the viewer than the display of FIG. 19(E)).

Note that the message in FIG. 19(F) is a message conveying that the amount of movement of the movable body 310 is too large, and therefore it is desirable for it to be displayed immediately when the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects the specific operation; however, it may be displayed a predetermined time after the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects the specific operation (i.e., it does not have to be displayed immediately), or it may be displayed with a predetermined probability when the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects the specific operation (i.e., it does not necessarily have to be displayed even if these operations are detected).

19(E) and 19(F), an effect was described in which an ally character practices a punch only when the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, and a message is displayed encouraging the player to reduce the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation. In addition to this effect, a message encouraging the player to increase the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, such as "If you turn it more, a kick practice effect will occur!", may be displayed only when the amount of right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, and an effect in which an ally character practices a kick may be displayed when the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation.

The effect of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect started. The message in FIG. 19(F) is erased when a predetermined time has elapsed since the message started to be displayed. If the pressing operation unit 303 is operated when the display of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) or the message in FIG. 19(F) is displayed, the movement of the movable body 310 stops, but the effect of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) and the display of the message in FIG. 19(F) do not end until the predetermined time has elapsed. In other words, the movement of the movable body 310 stops even when the effect of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) or the message in FIG. 19(F) is displayed.

The predetermined time from the start to the end of the performance in which the ally character practices a punch in FIG. 19(E) and the predetermined time from the display to the disappearance of the message in FIG. 19(F) may be the same as or different from the predetermined time. Furthermore, the predetermined time from the start to the end of the performance in which the ally character practices a punch in FIG. 19(E) may be a time determined from a plurality of times. Each of the plurality of times may be different from the predetermined time from the display to the disappearance of the message in FIG. 19(F), or some of the plurality of times may be the same as the predetermined time for displaying the message in FIG. 19(F).

19(E) ends after a predetermined time has elapsed, but if the conditions for executing the performance of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) are satisfied again after the performance ends, the performance of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) may be executed again. If the conditions for executing the performance of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) are satisfied again while the performance of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) is being executed, the count of the predetermined time may be cleared and the count may be reset and restarted when the conditions are satisfied again (i.e., the time for which the performance of the ally character practicing a punch is executed may be extended), or the count of the predetermined time may be continued without being cleared (i.e., the time for which the performance of the ally character practicing a punch is executed may not be extended). Similarly, the message in FIG. 19(F) is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed, but if the conditions for displaying the message in FIG. 19(F) are met again after the message in FIG. 19(F) has been erased, the message in FIG. 19(F) may be displayed again. Also, if the conditions for displaying the message in FIG. 19(F) are met again while the message in FIG. 19(F) is being displayed, the count of the predetermined time may be cleared and the predetermined time may be reset and counting may be resumed when the conditions are met again (i.e., the display time of the message may be extended), or the count may continue without clearing the predetermined time (i.e., the display time of the message may not be extended).

It is desirable that the effect of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) and the effect of the message in FIG. 19(F) being displayed cannot be cancelled (i.e., cannot be stopped by the player's operation). When the message in FIG. 19(F) is displayed, if the condition for starting the display of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) is met, the message in FIG. 19(F) may be erased (i.e., the display of the message in FIG. 19(F) may be cancelled on the condition that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation). The fact that the condition for starting the display of the ally character practicing a punch in FIG. 19(E) is met means that the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 has become less than r4 steps, and it is considered that the player has reduced the amount of rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 in accordance with the message in FIG. 19(F).

An example of a transition from FIG. 18(C) to FIG. 19(D') (an example in which the attack effect is not cancelled) is described. FIG. 19(D') shows a state in which, in the state of FIG. 18(C), a force is applied to the pressing operation unit 303 so that the pressing operation unit 303 does not protrude, while the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise by r1 steps, and the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 detects a specific operation. In a cancelable attack effect, even if the rotation operation unit 302 rotates clockwise, by not protruding the pressing operation unit 303 (i.e., by preventing the pressing operation unit 303 from moving from its initial position), the attack effect continues without being cancelled, and the same effect as FIG. 12(E) is performed, and the movable body 310 does not move.

If the pressing operation unit 303 does not protrude in this way, the attack effect will not be canceled even if the rotation operation unit 302 is operated (even if the operation necessary for cancellation is performed), so a player who does not want to accidentally cancel an attack effect can simply not protrude the pressing operation unit 303 during a cancelable attack effect.

In FIG. 19(E'), the rotation operation unit 302 remains rotated clockwise by r1 steps, and no force is being applied to the pressing operation unit 303, so the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes to t1. In other words, because the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes and only the rotation operation unit 302 is rotating clockwise, the same effect as in FIG. 12(F) is not performed, and the attack effect is canceled, as in FIG. 19(D), and the movable body 310 also moves with a width of w1.

19(D) and 19(E'), when an attack effect is cancelled, a special sound may be output from the speaker 354, or a special image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The output of the special sound and/or the display of the special image may be performed in place of a cancelable attack effect. For example, a special sound may be output from the speaker 354 or a special image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 simply by performing a specific operation on the specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 during the operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302. In this case, the special sound may be output or the special image may be displayed even though the movable body 310 is not moving. This allows the player to concentrate on the special sound or special image without being distracted by the movement of the movable body 310.

Following the effect of FIG. 19(E'), if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, the effect of FIG. 19(E) can be executed, and if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated r4 steps or more and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, the effect of FIG. 19(F) can be executed.

In the cancelable attack effects of Figs. 18 and 19, not only is it possible to prevent the reach suggestion effect from appearing like the attack effect of Fig. 13, but it is also possible to cancel the effects before the reach suggestion effect (such as the display of the message explaining the cancelable attack effect in Figs. 18(A) and 18(B), or the display of the ally character and enemy character in Fig. 19(C) before the ally character starts attacking), so that players who tend to become tense when watching attack effects can calmly proceed with the game by canceling the effects before the reach suggestion effect. Also, in the cancelable attack effects of Figs. 18 and 19, the effect can be canceled even after the reach suggestion effect has started, so that the player can cancel the effect even at a timing after the reach suggestion effect has started when the player has a hunch that the reach suggestion effect will not suggest that the reach effect will be executed.

In addition, it is desirable that the operation unit for canceling an attack effect be limited to a portion of the operation units of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the only operation unit for canceling an attack effect is the rotation operation unit 302). If an attack effect could be canceled by operating any operation unit of the pachinko machine 1 during the attack effect, there is a risk that a player who did not intend to cancel the attack effect would unintentionally cancel it. However, in order to make it easy to cancel an attack effect, it may be possible to make it possible to cancel an attack effect by operating any operation unit of the pachinko machine 1.

The cancelable attack effects in Figures 18 and 19 may appear in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the probability-varying state, but it is preferable that they not appear during a jackpot game. This is because if a player accidentally cancels an effect midway during a jackpot game, the player's sense of elation at winning the jackpot will be diminished. Note that not all effects that cause an effective period of the rotation operation unit 302 are cancelled by the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 during that effective period, or by a specific operation on a specific detection unit of the rotation operation unit 302 during that effective period (i.e., there are some effects that cannot be cancelled among the effects that cause an effective period of operation of the rotation operation unit 302).

In addition, since some players do not want to see any attack effects at all because they increase the tension too much, for example, if the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is maintained (a state in which an operation to cancel a cancelable attack effect is being performed) when a cancelable attack effect is not being performed (this may be before a cancelable attack effect begins or after a cancelable attack effect is canceled), the cancelable attack effect itself may not appear. Since the operation to cancel a cancelable attack effect (whether the operation is the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the specific detection unit detecting a specific operation) is included in the conditions for operating the movable body 310, a cancelable attack effect is not executed when the movable body 310 is operating (the operation of the movable body 310 and a cancelable attack effect are not executed simultaneously). However, a player who rotates the rotation control unit 302 to the right while not protruding the pressing control unit 303 when a cancelable attack effect is not being performed is considered to be a player who intends to see a cancelable attack effect, so it is desirable that a cancelable attack effect be able to appear if the pressing control unit 303 is not protruding, even if the rotation control unit 302 is maintained in the right direction when a cancelable attack effect is not being performed.

As described above, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pulled from its initial position, the rotating operation unit 302 rotates to the right according to the amount of protrusion of the pressing operation unit 303 without directly operating the rotating operation unit 302. Therefore, if the condition for canceling the attack effect is the detection of a specific operation by the specific detection unit, the specific operation is contact, and the specific detection unit is attached to cover the entire outer circumferential surface of the rotating operation unit 302, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pulled without operating the rotating operation unit 302 and without the specific detection unit detecting the specific operation, the rotating operation unit 302 rotates to the right, but the specific detection unit attached to the rotating operation unit 302 does not detect the specific operation (contact), so even though the rotating operation unit 302 rotates to the right and the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, the attack effect can be continued without being canceled.

In addition, the cancelable attack effects in Figures 18 and 19 may be performed when the game is not in progress (when neither winning games, including big win games and small win games, nor special pattern variations are being executed). In a cancelable attack effect performed when the game is not in progress, for example, a fortune-telling effect (not showing the results of a special lottery) is performed. A cancelable attack effect performed when the game is not in progress is started, for example, when a predetermined time has passed since the game entered a state where the game is not in progress, without detecting the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 (i.e., without performing an operation to cancel the cancelable attack effect). If the rotation operation unit 302 is operated during a cancelable attack effect performed when the game is not in progress, the attack effect is canceled. When a predetermined operation unit other than the rotation operation unit 302 (operation unit for canceling a cancelable attack effect) is operated during a cancelable attack effect performed when a game is not in progress, an effect in which an ally character launches an attack (punch or kick) at an enemy character and an effect in which the enemy character avoids the ally character's attack or the attack hits the enemy character (for example, according to a predetermined distribution, it is determined whether the enemy character avoids the ally character's attack or the attack hits the enemy character) are performed, and if the enemy character avoids the ally character's attack, a "bad luck" is announced as the fortune-telling result, and if the ally character's attack hits the enemy character, a "good luck" is announced as the fortune-telling result. Note that, in a cancelable attack effect performed when a game is not in progress, the condition for executing the effect in which an ally character launches an attack (punch or kick) at an enemy character and the effect in which the enemy character avoids the ally character's attack or the attack hits the enemy character may be that a predetermined time has passed since the start of the attack effect without being canceled. In addition, when a cancelable attack effect is being performed while the game is not progressing, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not protruded so that the attack effect is not canceled, the game progress may remain stopped as long as the operation is maintained.

For players who have cancelled a cancelable attack effect but still want to see it, the cancelable attack effect may be executed again after a predetermined time has elapsed since the attack effect was cancelled (or after the attack effect had ended without being cancelled) unless the rotation control unit 302 is rotated right (unless the same operation as that for cancelling the attack effect is performed). During this predetermined time, the stopped decorative pattern and an image that is not displayed in the cancelable attack effect (for example, an image different from either the ally character or the enemy character that is displayed in the cancelable attack effect) may be displayed. Even if the rotation control unit 302 is rotated right after cancelling an attack effect, the cancelable attack effect may be displayed again with a predetermined probability after a predetermined time has elapsed since the cancellation.

For example, when an operation is performed on the rotation operation unit 302 that allows the effects of Figures 19(E) and 19(F), which are the effects after canceling an attack effect (rotation of r3 steps or more and detection of a specific operation by the specific detection unit), the player may be given a privilege such as making it easier to achieve a starting win or being able to receive a favorable special lottery. Also, for example, the effect in which an ally character practices a punch in Figure 19(E) and the effect in which a message is displayed in Figure 19(F) may be effects that are performed under specified conditions. The state in which the game ball B is being launched is an example of the predetermined condition, and the strength with which the game ball B is launched determines whether the effect of the ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) is executed or the message in FIG. 19(F) is displayed (for example, the strength with which the game ball B is launched must be within a first predetermined range in order to execute the effect of the ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E), and the strength with which the game ball B is launched must be within a second predetermined range (the minimum value of the second predetermined range is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the first predetermined range) in order to display the message in FIG. 19(F). In addition, the effect of the ally character swinging a punch in FIG. 19(E) and the effect with the message in FIG. 19(F) are displayed may be executed not only after a cancelable attack effect is canceled, but also if the above-mentioned predetermined conditions are met.

In addition, instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in Figures 11 to 16, the pressing operation unit 303 shown in Figure 17, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 may be applied.

In the case where the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 having a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are applied instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, in the first performance pattern of the attack performance, when the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 starts in FIG. 11 (C) and FIG. 14 (C3), and the pressing detection sensor 381 changes from the OFF state to the ON state during the operation effective period, the post-operation performance is executed. However, when the rotating operation unit 302 is not rotated to the right, the pressing operation unit 303 does not protrude. Therefore, in order to perform the post-operation performance in the first performance pattern of the attack performance, it is necessary to rotate the rotating operation unit 302 to the right to make the pressing operation unit 303 protrude and turn the pressing detection sensor 381 to the OFF state, and then operate the pressing operation unit 303 to turn the pressing detection sensor 381 to the ON state during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the case where the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are applied instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, in the second performance pattern of the attack performance, when the operation effective period of the rotating operation unit 302 occurs in FIG. 11 (C'), FIG. 14 (C'3), and FIG. 16 (D'4), and the right rotation of the rotating operation unit 302 of a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter, r1 step or more at which the movable body 310 can start moving) is detected during the operation effective period, the operation in progress performance is executed. Also, when the right rotation of the rotating operation unit 302 of a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter, r1 step or more at which the movable body 310 can start moving) is continuously detected for a predetermined time (hereinafter, 3 seconds) during the operation effective period of the rotating operation unit 302, the post-operation performance is executed. However, in FIG. 16, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by a predetermined amount or more (r1 steps or more) after the start of the attack effect (the start of the display of the message in FIG. 16(A)) and before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty of a predetermined time is initiated from the start of the effective operation period in FIG. 16(D'4), and until the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by the predetermined amount or more (r1 steps or more), the during-operation effect is not executed, and it is not counted toward the duration of the right rotation of the predetermined amount or more (r1 steps or more) that is a condition for causing the post-operation effect to appear.

When the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are applied instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, in the second performance pattern of the attack performance, a performance during operation may be executed on the condition that a right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 of a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter, r1 steps or more at which the operation of the movable body 310 can start) is detected during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation. In this case, when the performance during operation is being performed in the second performance pattern, the condition for the movable body 310 to operate is also satisfied, so the movable body 310 operates. However, in Fig. 16, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by a predetermined amount or more (r1 step or more) after the start of the attack performance (start of displaying the message in Fig. 16(A)) and before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty of a predetermined time is started from the start of the effective operation period, and until the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by a predetermined amount or more (r1 step or more) and the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, the movable body 310 operates but the operation-in-progress performance is not executed. Also, in the second performance pattern of the attack performance, a post-operation performance may be executed on the condition that, during the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, the detection of the right rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 by a predetermined amount or more (hereinafter, r1 step or more at which the operation of the movable body 310 can start) and the detection of the specific operation by the specific detection unit are detected continuously at the same time for a predetermined time (hereinafter, 3 seconds). However, in FIG. 16, if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right by a predetermined amount or more (r1 steps or more) after the start of the attack effect (the start of the display of the message in FIG. 16(A)) and before the start of the effective operation period of the rotation operation unit 302, a penalty of a predetermined time is initiated from the start of the effective operation period in FIG. 16(D'4), and until the predetermined time has elapsed, it is not counted in the duration of the detection of the right rotation of a predetermined amount or more (r1 steps or more) and the detection of the specific operation by the specific detection unit, which are conditions for causing the post-operation effect to appear.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are applied instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the minimum rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 required for the during-operation performance to be performed in the second performance pattern of the attack performance and the rotation amount required for the attack performance to be canceled in the cancelable attack performance in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 may be the same or different. In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are applied instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the minimum rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 required for the after-operation performance to be performed in the second performance pattern of the attack performance and the rotation amount required for the attack performance to be canceled in the cancelable attack performance in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 may be the same or different. It should be noted that the cancelable attack effects in Figures 18 and 19 may be performed when the game is not in progress (when neither a winning game, including a big win game and a small win game, nor a special pattern change is being performed), but it is preferable that the attack effects in Figures 11 to 16 are performed only when a special pattern change is being performed.

In the case where the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are applied instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, it is desirable that a specific operation is required to execute the attacking performance of FIG. 11 to FIG. 16 for a player who does not want to see the attacking performance. Specifically, for example, in order to execute the attacking performance of FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the rotating operation unit 302 must be rotated right by r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps, the specific detection unit must detect the specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 must not be operated (protruding from the initial position). On the other hand, the cancelable attacking performance of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 can be canceled at any time even by a player who does not want to see the attacking performance, so it may be possible for it to appear regardless of the amount of rotation of the rotating operation unit 302.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 having a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the condition for executing the first performance pattern of the attack performance and the condition for executing the second performance pattern of the attack performance may be different. For example, the first performance pattern of the attack performance may be executed on the condition that the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps, the specific detection unit detects the specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated (i.e., the movable body 310 operates with a width of w3 or more and less than w4), and the second performance pattern of the attack performance may be executed on the condition that the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r4 steps or more, the specific detection unit detects the specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated (i.e., the movable body 310 operates with a width of w4 or more and wmax or less).

In this case, the shortest time required for the second pattern of the attack performance (the time required for the performance of FIG. 12(E') and FIG. 12(F') to end after the performance of FIG. 11(A) starts and the rotation operation unit 302 continues to rotate right for 3 seconds for 5 steps or more from the start of the operation effective period of the rotation operation unit 302) is shorter than the shortest time required for the first pattern of the attack performance (the time required for the performance of FIG. 12(E') and FIG. 12(F') to end after the performance of FIG. 11(A) starts and the pressing operation unit 303 changes from the OFF state to the ON state at the start of the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303). In other words, the shortest time required for the performance performed when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r4 steps or more and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated is shorter than the shortest time required for the performance performed when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are applied instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302, the expectation of a reach effect being executed is higher (i.e., the probability that an attack by an ally character will hit an enemy character is higher) when the first performance pattern of the attack effect is executed than when the second performance pattern of the attack effect is executed. In other words, the expectation of a reach effect being executed is higher in the performance performed when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated than in the performance performed when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r4 steps or more and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are applied instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the second attack performance pattern (e.g., the performance in FIG. 11(A) to FIG. 12(F')) is executed than when the first attack performance pattern (e.g., the performance in FIG. 11(A) to FIG. 12(F)) is executed. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r4 steps or more and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated than when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more and less than r4 steps and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated.

11 to 16, even if the pressing operation unit 303, the rotating operation unit 302 equipped with a specific detection unit, and the movable body 310 shown in FIG. 17 are used instead of the pressing operation unit 303 and the rotating operation unit 302 in FIG. 11 to 16, the attack presentation in FIG. 11 to 16 is an presentation that cannot be cancelled (i.e., cannot be stopped by the player's operation). In addition, after the rotation operation unit 302 is operated in the cancelable attack presentation in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 to cancel the cancelable attack presentation, the first presentation pattern of the attack presentation may be executed under the condition that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r3 steps or more but less than r4 steps, the specific detection unit detects the specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated (protruding from the initial position). In addition, after the rotation operation unit 302 is operated in the cancelable attack performance of Figures 18 and 19 to cancel the cancelable attack performance, the second performance pattern of the attack performance may be executed under the conditions that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated right by r4 steps or more, the specific detection unit detects a specific operation, and the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated.

[3. Exploration Quest Production]
Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are collectively referred to simply as "variation". The search quest performance will be explained. The search quest performance is, for example, a performance that starts after the variation starts and before the decorative symbol forms a reach, ends before the decorative symbol forms a reach, or continues after the decorative symbol forms a reach.

In the exploration quest presentation, two characters are selected from multiple types of characters (here, "hunters" or "villagers"), and the two selected characters search for and defeat rare animals. If the two selected characters discover a rare animal, attack it, and defeat it, a big win is announced. Also, if the two characters fail to discover a rare animal in the exploration quest presentation, a loss is announced.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, if the two characters discover a rare animal and are attacked by it, an endurance presentation is executed. In the endurance presentation, if the two characters withstand the attack from the rare animal, a jackpot is announced, and if they cannot withstand it, a loss is announced.

In addition, when the endurance performance of the exploration quest performance is successful and a jackpot is announced, a reward performance (for example, a message that is only displayed when the endurance performance is successful is displayed) should always be executed, or a special benefit that is advantageous to the player (for example, a transition to a jackpot game state with the greatest number of rounds) should always be granted.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, there are strong bosses and weak bosses as rare beasts that the two characters can discover, and the probability of winning is higher when the weak boss is discovered than when the strong boss is discovered.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, if two different characters are selected, the two different characters may not be able to find the rare animal and a loss may be announced (i.e., two different characters may be selected only if a loss has been selected). In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, if the background at the start of the exploration quest presentation is the same, it is desirable that the probability of a jackpot (the rate of a jackpot) is higher when two hunters are selected than when two villagers are selected.

Figures 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a presentation in which a strong boss is encountered in an exploration quest presentation. Figures 20 and 21 explain the exploration quest presentation that is executed in a normal gameplay state in which there is no time-saving state and no chance of a bonus.

Figure 20 (A) shows the state where the change has started, and a display indicating that the exploration quest display has started is displayed on the display device 1600. Also, in Figure 20 (A), a pending display corresponding to a pending change and a pending display corresponding to a change being executed (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as simply pending displays) are displayed on the display device 1600.

The first background hatched with vertical lines is displayed as the background image on the effect display device 1600. The first background is a background image that can only be displayed in normal game mode, and is the background with the lowest chance of winning a jackpot. When the exploration quest effect in FIG. 20(A) starts, BGM1 is output from the speaker 354. BGM1 is BGM that can only be output in normal game mode, and is the BGM with the lowest chance of winning a jackpot.

Figure 20(B) shows the state in which Hunter 1601 has been selected as the first character. Hunter 1601 is a white character in the figure, and is holding a sword as a weapon. When the first character is selected, the first background and the hold display are displayed on the performance display device 1600, as in Figure 20(A), and BGM1 continues to be output from speaker 354. Also, in Figure 20(B), a line is displayed on the performance display device 1600 indicating that Hunter 1601, the first character, is looking for a partner character to search for rare animals together.

In FIG. 20(C), in addition to the first hunter 1601, another hunter 1601 is displayed as a second character on the performance display device 1600. Both hunters 1601 are holding swords, and when the second hunter 1601 is displayed (when the same character is displayed as the first and second hunters), an effect selected from a number of effects (in the example shown in the figure, a star, and the probability of a jackpot differs depending on the type of effect) is displayed on the weapon (here, the sword) he is holding. Note that the swords held by the first hunter 1601 and the second hunter 1601 may have different designs. Also, in FIG. 20(C), decorative patterns form a reach.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, the probability of winning is higher if the first and second characters are both Hunters 1601 than if they are both Villagers. However, when Background 1 is displayed as the background image and BGM 1 is output at the start of the exploration quest presentation as shown in FIG. 20, it is desirable that a win is not guaranteed even if the first and second characters are both Hunters 1601 (in other words, it is desirable that the first and second characters can both become Hunters 1601 even in the case of a miss).

In addition, in FIG. 20(C), when a second hunter 1601 is displayed in addition to the first hunter 1601, the BGM output from the speaker 354 is changed to BGM2. Furthermore, when a second hunter 1601 is displayed in addition to the first hunter 1601 (when the same character is displayed as the first and second hunters), a special sound may be output in an output mode selected from a plurality of output modes. Note that the probability of hitting the jackpot differs depending on the output mode of the special sound (for example, the length of time it is output). This change in BGM and output of the special sound can make the player understand that the displayed character is about to begin searching for rare animals in earnest.

It is desirable that the above-mentioned special sound is output only when two of the same characters (two hunters 1601 or two villagers) are displayed on the performance display device 1600 (i.e., it is desirable that it is not output when one hunter 1601 and one villager are displayed).

In Figure 20(D), the two hunters 1601 hide their weapons (i.e. the swords that were displayed up until Figure 20(C) are no longer displayed) and the scene shifts to a full-scale search for rare animals. However, to allow the player to recognize that the characters have not changed between Figure 20(C) and Figure 20(D), the display mode of the two hunters 1601 themselves has not changed (i.e. the hunters 1601 themselves are displayed in the same way in Figure 20(C) and Figure 20(D)).

In this way, each character (hunter 1601 and villager) has a display mode in which they hold a weapon and a display mode in which they do not hold a weapon, and when multiple characters are displayed at the same time, they are displayed in the same display mode (i.e., when multiple characters are displayed at the same time, all of the multiple characters are holding weapons, or none of the multiple characters are holding weapons).

In addition, in FIG. 20(D), the background displayed on the performance display device 1600 changes to a second background hatched with dots. While the second background is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the weapon held by the character is not displayed, and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is not displayed (only the pending display corresponding to the change being executed is displayed). By hiding the pending display corresponding to the pending change in this way, the player can concentrate on the performance of searching for the rare animal.

When the background displayed on the performance display device 1600 is the second background, not only the pending display corresponding to the pending change but also the pending display corresponding to the change being executed may be hidden. Also, in FIG. 20(D), the BGM output from the speaker 354 changes to BGM3.

It is desirable that the display size of the character when the second background is displayed on the performance display device 1600 is smaller than the display size of the character when the first background before FIG. 20(C) is displayed. This is because there is a possibility of encountering a rare animal when the second background is displayed, and this is to draw the player's attention to the display of the rare animal rather than the character.

Also, as between FIG. 20(C) and FIG. 20(D), when a character changes from holding a weapon to not holding a weapon, the character (and the weapon) may go through a state in which it is not visible (for example, the character may not be displayed on the performance display device 1600, or a predetermined movable body provided on the pachinko machine 1 may move to a position overlapping the display area of the character on the performance display device 1600, making it invisible). When a character changes from holding a weapon to not holding a weapon, the character may be temporarily hidden, thereby reducing the player's sense of tension. Also, it is desirable to make the background invisible (for example, a single-color background) at the time when the character is temporarily hidden.

Fig. 20(E) shows the state where the hunter 1601 has found a rare animal. In Fig. 20(E), two unarmed hunters 1601 and a rare animal, a strong boss 1610 with a crest and beak, are displayed on the performance display device 1600. In addition, BGM3 is output from the speaker 354. Note that instead of suddenly displaying the rare animal, for example, a valid operation period for a specific operation unit (e.g., the pressing operation unit 303) may be generated, and the rare animal (either the strong boss 1610 or the weak boss) may be displayed when either the specific operation unit has been operated during the valid operation period or the valid operation period has ended.

In FIG. 20(F), two hunters 1601 are being attacked by a strong boss 1610. After the two characters are attacked by a rare animal, the game transitions to an endurance performance. In FIG. 20(F), BGM 3 is being output from speaker 354.

When a character without a weapon is displayed and a certain effect (for example, an effect in which a character encounters a rare animal and engages in a battle) is being performed, for example, a dropped weapon (i.e., an object that was displayed together with the character when the first background was displayed) may be displayed. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation that the character will make use of the weapon. It is desirable that the probability of a jackpot is higher when a dropped weapon is displayed than when it is not displayed.

Figure 21 (G) shows the state when the endurance performance has begun. In Figure 21 (G), the two hunters 1601 (characters attacked by rare animals) are shown using their weapons to maintain their balance so as not to fall. Furthermore, a cut-in occurs of a character other than the two hunters 1601 (i.e., a villager 1602 who is not selected), and a performance is executed in which the cut-in villager 1602 is shown trying to go and rescue the two hunters 1601 who are about to fall.

It is desirable that the two hunters 1601 (characters attacked by rare animals) who are about to fall and the cut-in character perform dynamic effects. Specifically, for example, by having the two hunters 1601 who are about to fall repeatedly stagger from side to side, the player can easily recognize that the two hunters 1601 have not yet fallen. Also, for example, by having the cut-in character repeatedly stomp his feet, the player can hope that the cut-in character will come to the rescue of the two hunters 1601 and succeed in the endurance effect. Also, the length of time that this dynamic effect is performed may suggest whether the endurance effect will be successful (for example, the dynamic effect is performed for a longer period of time if the endurance effect is successful than if it fails).

In addition, in FIG. 21(G), the character displayed in the cut-in is holding a weapon just like the hunter 1601 (the weapon held by the villager 1602 is a metal club). In this way, in addition to the hunter 1601 who is about to fall during the endurance performance, the villager 1602 is displayed as a helper character, and by the fact that the displayed character is holding a weapon again, the player is given a sense of hope that the hunter 1601 will not fall but will get up.

In addition, in FIG. 21(G), background music is not output from the speaker 354 in order to draw the player's attention to whether the hunter 1601 will fall. In FIG. 21(G), a character attacked by a rare animal uses a weapon to maintain balance so as not to fall, and dedicated background music may be output when a cut-in of a character that was not selected occurs.

In addition, in FIG. 21(G), the background displayed on the performance display device 1600 reverts to the first background so as not to make the player overly hopeful that the hunter 1601 will not be defeated. Furthermore, in FIG. 21(G), pending displays corresponding to changes being made and pending displays corresponding to changes that are on hold are displayed on the performance display device 1600. In other words, the character displayed when the first background is displayed is holding a weapon, and all pending displays are displayed when the first background is displayed.

To indicate to the player that the endurance performance will begin, two hunters 1601 (characters attacked by rare animals) carrying weapons and a villager 1602 (helper character) carrying a weapon may be displayed after FIG. 20(F) and before FIG. 21(G). Then, for example, the endurance performance of FIG. 21(G) begins a predetermined time later (e.g., 3 seconds) after the display of the two hunters 1601 (characters attacked by rare animals) carrying weapons and the villager 1602 (helper character) carrying a weapon begins.

In FIG. 21(G), in order to make the player hopeful that the arrival of the help character will lead to success in the endurance performance, it is desirable for the display size of the help character to be larger than the display size of the two hunters 1601, who are the first and second characters.

When the same character as the character attacked by the rare animal comes to the rescue in the endurance performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a different character comes to the rescue. For this reason, a different character is always displayed in the cut-in in FIG. 21(G), and a message suggesting that the same character will come to the rescue is displayed in FIG. 21(H), which will be described later, to give the player a sense of excitement. When the same character as the character attacked by the rare animal comes to the rescue in the endurance performance, a jackpot is confirmed, and when a different character comes to the rescue, a loss is confirmed.

Also, as between FIG. 20(F) and FIG. 21(G), when a character changes from not holding a weapon to holding a weapon, the character (and weapon) may go through a state in which it is not visible (for example, the character may not be displayed on the performance display device 1600, or a predetermined movable body provided on the pachinko machine 1 may move to a position overlapping the display area of the character on the performance display device 1600, making it invisible). When a character changes from not holding a weapon to holding a weapon, the player's sense of tension can be alleviated by temporarily hiding the character. Also, it is desirable to make the background invisible (for example, a single-color background) at the time when the character is temporarily hidden.

Following FIG. 21(G), the display transitions to FIG. 21(H) or FIG. 21(J). In FIG. 21(H), a message saying "I'll get there first!" (a message suggesting that a character other than the help character displayed in FIG. 21(G), i.e., a hunter 1601, will come to the rescue) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Note that in FIG. 21(H), the first background is displayed as the background image of the performance display device 1600, but in order to give the player a sense of anticipation by the fact that a character other than the help character displayed in FIG. 21(G) will come to the rescue, a background different from the first background (for example, a background dedicated to displaying the message) may be displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 21(H), BGM4 (i.e., BGM different from BGM1-3) is output from speaker 354 to give the player a sense of exhilaration that hunter 1601 is coming to the player's rescue. In addition, in FIG. 21(H), the first background continues to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, but a special background different from the first and second backgrounds may be displayed to give the player a sense of exhilaration. In addition, in FIG. 21(H), all pending displays are hidden to draw the player's attention to the above-mentioned message (if the conditions for additional pending changes are met while the pending displays are hidden, the changes are additionally pending but the pending displays remain hidden).

In FIG. 21(I), two hunters 1601 have not fallen because a new hunter 1601 has come to their aid, i.e., the durability presentation has been successful, and the decorative symbols have stopped in a winning combination. In FIG. 21(I), three hunters 1601 (three identical characters) are displayed, including the two hunters 1601 attacked by the rare animal and the one hunter 1601 who has come to their aid, and all of the hunters 1601 are holding weapons (swords). To keep the player excited, BGM4 continues to be output from the speaker 354. It is advisable to display a display indicating that the game has been controlled (transitioned) to the winning game state (an example of an advantageous state) at the timing when the game state is controlled to the winning game state (an example of an advantageous state) after the display of FIG. 21(I).

In FIG. 21(J), which transitions from FIG. 21(G), the two hunters 1601 have fallen despite the villager 1602 coming to their aid, meaning that the endurance performance has failed, and the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination. In FIG. 21(J), two hunters are displayed who have fallen after being attacked by a rare animal, along with one villager 1602 who has come to their aid (i.e., two of the same characters and one different character), with both characters holding weapons (the hunter 1601 has a sword, and the villager 1602 has a metal club). In FIG. 21(J), background music is not being output from the speaker 354 to avoid stimulating the player's sense of disappointment.

The time from when the state of FIG. 21(G) begins until the state of FIG. 21(J) is reached and the fluctuation ends is within a predetermined time (e.g., within 3 seconds), and the time from when the state of FIG. 21(G) begins until the state of FIG. 21(I) is reached and the fluctuation ends, via the state of FIG. 21(H), is longer than the predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds). As a result, the time from when the endurance performance begins to when the fluctuation ends is longer when the endurance performance is successful compared to when it is unsuccessful, allowing the player to enjoy the successful endurance performance for longer.

The expected probability of a jackpot in the variation may also be indicated by the length of time from when the character holding the weapon in FIG. 21(G) is displayed again until the transition to the next presentation (FIG. 21(H) or FIG. 21(J)). For example, if the time from when the character holding the weapon in FIG. 21(G) is displayed again until the presentation changes to that in FIG. 21(H) is 5 seconds, and the time from when the character holding the weapon in FIG. 21(G) is displayed again until the presentation changes to that in FIG. 21(J) is 3 seconds, then if the presentation does not change even after 3 seconds or more have passed since the character holding the weapon in FIG. 21(G) was displayed again, this indicates that the endurance presentation was successful (i.e., this indicates that a jackpot has been announced).

It is also desirable that the rate at which the endurance performance fails is higher than the rate at which the endurance performance succeeds. If the rate at which the endurance performance succeeds is high, the player will be less likely to appreciate the reward performance that is executed when the endurance performance is successful, or the advantageous benefits that are given to the player.

21(I) and 21(J), the display size of the help character may be larger than the display size of the two hunters 1601, the first and second characters, to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the hunter 1601 or the villager 1602 has appeared as the help character, or the display size of all the characters may be the same to make it easier for the player to recognize all the displayed characters. After the display size of the help character is displayed larger than the display size of the two hunters 1601, the first and second characters, all the characters may be displayed at the same size (the display size of the first and second characters may be matched to the display size of the help character, the display size of the first and second characters may be matched to the display size of the help character, or the display size of all the characters may be matched to a size different from the size in which the first and second characters were displayed and the size in which the help character was displayed).

It is also desirable that the display size of the characters when it is determined that the endurance performance in FIG. 21(I) and FIG. 21(H) has been successful or unsuccessful be larger than the display size of the characters at the start of the endurance performance in FIG. 21(G). This is to allow the player to recognize which character's endurance performance has been successful or unsuccessful.

For example, a zone effect related to a search quest effect may be executable. For example, when a rare animal discovery confirmation zone effect is executed, the character will always be able to find a rare animal, suggesting a higher chance of winning compared to when the rare animal discovery confirmation zone effect is not executed. This rare animal discovery confirmation zone effect may be executed when the search quest effect is executed (however, it may start from a timing before the rare animal is discovered), or may be executed as a look-ahead effect from a change before the search quest effect is executed. The zone display indicating that a rare animal discovery confirmation zone effect is being executed has a higher display priority than the background display (i.e., the zone display is displayed in the foreground in an overlapping display area of the zone display and the background display), but a lower display priority than the character or weapon (i.e., the character or weapon is displayed in the foreground in an overlapping display area of the zone display and the character or weapon).

In addition, after a character holding a weapon is displayed when the first background is displayed as in Figures 20(B) to 20(C), it is desirable that the rate at which the situation does not change (as in the presentation explained in Figure 24 below) is higher than the rate at which the situation changes to one in which a character not holding a weapon is displayed as in Figure 20(D) and subsequent images. This can heighten the player's sense of anticipation when the situation changes to one in which a character not holding a weapon is displayed.

In addition, when the transition from FIG. 20(C) to FIG. 20(D) occurs when the display changes from one in which a character is holding a weapon to one in which a character is not holding a weapon, it is desirable to change from the one in which a character is holding a weapon to the one in which a character is not holding a weapon without a period in between in which no character is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to notice the change in whether or not a character has a weapon, as a character without a weapon suddenly changes to one holding a weapon, making it easier to build anticipation.

On the other hand, when the transition occurs from a situation in which a character is not holding a weapon to a situation in which a character is holding a weapon, such as when transitioning from Figure 20 (F) to Figure 21 (G), it is desirable to change from a situation in which a character is not holding a weapon to a situation in which a character is holding a weapon, with a period in between in which the character itself (including the weapon) is not displayed.

Incidentally, even when the transition is from FIG. 20(C) to FIG. 20(D) where a character holding a weapon is displayed to a character not holding a weapon, it may be possible to change from a character holding a weapon to a character not holding a weapon after a period in which the character itself (including the weapon) is not displayed.

Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a character discovers a rare animal, a weak boss, in a search quest presentation. Figure 22 (E2), which transitions from Figure 20 (D), shows the state in which a hunter 1601 has discovered a rare animal. In Figure 22 (E2), two unarmed hunters 1601 and a rare animal, a weak boss 1611, which does not have a crest or beak, are displayed on the presentation display device 1600. It is assumed that the character has a higher chance of winning when he discovers the weak boss 1611 than when he discovers the strong boss 1610. Also, in Figure 22 (E2), a second background is displayed as the background on the presentation display device 1600, and BGM3 continues to be output from the speaker 354.

In FIG. 22 (F2), in addition to two unarmed hunters 1601 (characters from FIG. 22 (E2)), one unarmed helper character hunter 1601 also joins the battle, making a total of three characters launching a preemptive attack on the weak boss 1611. When a character launches a preemptive attack on a rare animal, the durability effect is not executed. Also, when a character launches a preemptive attack on a rare animal, it is preferable that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the durability effect is executed. Note that the one helper character without a weapon is displayed in an area overlapping with the weak boss 1611, but the display priority of the helper character is higher (i.e., the helper character is displayed closer to the weak boss 1611).

When a hunter 1601 is selected as the first and second characters, the character is more likely to launch a preemptive attack on a rare animal (i.e., the character is less likely to be attacked by a rare animal) than when a villager 1602 is selected. Also, when a weak boss 1611 is selected as the rare animal, the character is more likely to launch a preemptive attack on a rare animal (i.e., the character is less likely to be attacked by a rare animal) than when a strong boss 1610 is selected as the rare animal.

In FIG. 22 (G2), an effect is performed in which three characters, two hunters 1601 and one helper hunter 1601, have defeated the weak boss 1611, and the decorative symbols stop in a winning combination. Also, in FIG. 22 (G2), the second background is displayed as the background on the effect display device 1600, and BGM3 continues to be output from the speaker 354. Note that after FIG. 22 (G2), an effect may be performed in which the hunter 1601 not holding a weapon changes to the hunter 1601 holding a weapon.

At the timing when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state after FIG. 22 (G2), a display indicating that the game state has been controlled (transitioned) to the jackpot game state (one example of an advantageous state) may be displayed. This allows the player to feel a sense of elation all at once by the display indicating that the game state has been controlled to the jackpot game state. A display indicating that the game state will be controlled (transitioned) to the jackpot game state (one example of an advantageous state) may be displayed before the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state (specifically, for example, at the start of the fluctuation in which the search quest performance is executed, or at the time when the special random number corresponding to the fluctuation in which the search quest performance is executed is reserved). This allows the player to be notified of the jackpot at an early stage, giving the player a sense of surprise.

In FIG. 22 (F2), if a character different from the first and second characters (here, villager 1602) is selected as the helper character, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the same character is selected (or a miss may be confirmed). In FIG. 22 (F2), if the same character as the first and second characters is selected as the helper character, a jackpot may be confirmed (i.e., a transition to FIG. 22 (H2) may not be made).

In FIG. 22 (H2), a presentation is given showing that a total of three characters, two hunters 1601 and one helper hunter 1601, have escaped to the weak boss 1611, and furthermore, the background image displayed on the presentation display device 1600 returns to the first background, and no background music is output from the speaker 354.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, various background images such as the first background, the second background, and the third background described below can be displayed on the presentation display device 1600, so the transparency of the character and image may be changed to allow the player to enjoy the background images.

Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a search quest presentation. In the search quest presentation of Figure 23, BGM 3, which was output when the character encountered a rare animal in the search quest presentations of Figures 20 to 22, is output from speaker 354 when the change starts (BGM 3 can suggest that a rare animal will be encountered, i.e. BGM 3 functions as a precursor presentation for an encounter with a rare animal), and the background displayed on presentation display device 1600 is a third background hatched with horizontal straight lines.

In the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23 (an exploration quest presentation in which BGM 3 is output at the start of the change and the background is the third background), it is desirable that the character always encounters a rare animal (or that the rate of encountering a rare animal is higher than in the exploration quest presentations in FIG. 20 to FIG. 22).

As a result, when the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23 begins, a player who hears BGM 3 (which is output when a rare animal is encountered in the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 21-FIG. 22) can get a sense of anticipation that the character will encounter a rare animal.

Figure 23 (A3) is similar to Figure 20 (A) except that the third background is displayed as the background image on the performance display device 1600 and BGM3 is output from the speaker 354.

In FIG. 23 (B3), the third background is displayed as the background image on the performance display device 1600, and BGM3 is output from the speaker 354. Furthermore, in FIG. 23 (B3), the character Hunter 1601 is hiding his weapon (i.e., the weapon is not displayed) while searching for his companions.

As mentioned above, in the presentations of Figures 20 and 22, when the character encounters a rare animal, the weapon is hidden, so by having the hunter 1601 hide the weapon in advance in Figure 23 (B3), the player can get a sense of anticipation that the character will encounter a rare animal. Note that the character displayed in the exploration quest presentation of Figure 23 always does not have a weapon.

Figure 23 (C3) is similar to Figure 20 (C), except that the third background is displayed as the background image on the performance display device 1600, BGM 5 is output from the speaker 354, and the character is hiding his weapon. In other words, in Figure 23 (C3), when a second hunter 1601 is displayed in addition to the first hunter 1601 (when the same character is displayed as the first and second hunters), the same special sound as in Figure 20 (C) may be output. Note that BGM 3 may continue to be output in place of BGM 5 even after Figure 23 (C3).

23(D3) to 23(F3) are similar to Fig. 22(E2) to 22(G2), except that the third background is displayed as the background image on the performance display device 1600, and BGM5 is output from the speaker. In the exploration performance in which the first background was displayed at the start of the variation, when a second character identical to the first character is additionally displayed in Fig. 20(C3), BGM2, which is not output at other times, is output from speaker 354, but when a second character identical to the first character is additionally displayed in Fig. 23(C3), BGM5, which is also output from Fig. 23(D3) onwards, is output from speaker 354. In FIG. 23 (C3), BGM2 (BGM output when two of the same characters begin to be displayed in the exploration quest presentation that begins with the display of the first background) may be output, or dedicated BGM for when two of the same characters begin to be displayed in the exploration quest presentation that begins with the output of BGM3 may be output.

Note that BGM3 may be output from speaker 354 throughout the entire exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23. In other words, in the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23, the BGM may change and BGM3 may continue to be output, so the length of time BGM3 is output is indefinite. For example, if the length of time BGM3 is output is indefinite and the longer the time BGM3 is output, the higher the chance of a jackpot, the player can wait with tension for when BGM3 will end. On the other hand, in FIG. 20, BGM3 is output when the two characters are actively searching for and battling rare animals, so the length of time BGM3 is output is constant.

In the exploration quest presentation of FIG. 23, i.e., in which the third background is displayed as the background image on the presentation display device 1600 and BGM3 is output from the speaker 354 from the start of the fluctuation, in order not to spoil the player's sense of anticipation heightened by the third background and BGM3, it may be arranged so that a jackpot is confirmed when two hunters 1601 (who give a stronger sense of anticipation than the villagers 1602) are searching for a rare animal.

In addition, when the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23 is executed, the player's sense of expectation is heightened by the third background and BGM 3 that has been output since the start of the fluctuation, so it is desirable that the rate of winning the jackpot is higher than when the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 20 to FIG. 22 is executed (the exploration quest presentation in which the first background is displayed as the background image on the presentation display device 1600 and BGM 1 is output from the speaker 354).

Note that in the exploration quest presentation in which the third background of FIG. 23 is displayed, when a specific presentation (for example, a presentation after an encounter with a rare animal or a presentation in which two or more of the same characters are displayed) is not being performed, the BGM output from the speaker 354 is interrupted (the BGM simply stops or changes to another BGM) by operating a specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303), and the BGM can be output again when the specific operation unit is operated again. Note that, in order to draw the player's attention to the fact that the BGM will be interrupted by the operation, no operation sound is output in association with the operation to interrupt the BGM. On the other hand, in the exploration quest presentation in which the third background is not displayed, as in FIG. 20 to FIG. 22, the BGM output from the speaker 354 is not interrupted even if a specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303) is operated.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation in which the third background of FIG. 23 is displayed, when a specific presentation (for example, a presentation after an encounter with a rare animal or a presentation in which two or more of the same characters are displayed) is not being performed, an icon display whose appearance can be changed in response to the operation of a specific operation unit (for example, the pressing operation unit 303) may be displayed on the presentation display device 1600. Therefore, when the specific operation unit is operated when the specific presentation is not being performed, the output of the BGM output from the speaker is interrupted and the appearance of the icon display changes. Then, when the specific operation unit is operated again, the BGM is output again and the appearance of the icon display can be changed again (it may return to the original appearance or may change to a different appearance). On the other hand, in the exploration quest presentation in which the third background is not displayed, such as in FIG. 20 to FIG. 22, the icon display is not displayed on the presentation display device 1600 regardless of the operation of the specific operation unit. The icon display may include information related to the BGM being output from the speaker 354.

The exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23 is preferably executed in a game state that is advantageous to the player in a time-saving state or a special probability state (for example, a game state in which the probability of hitting a jackpot is higher than in the game state in which the exploration quest presentation in which the first background is displayed is executed) in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation with the third background and BGM3, whereas the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 20 to FIG. 22 is preferably executed in a normal game state that is neither a time-saving state nor a special probability state.

Figure 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation in which two selected characters are unable to find a rare animal during an exploration quest presentation. Figure 24 (A4) is similar to Figure 20 (A). Figure 24 (B4) is similar to Figure 20 (B), except that a villager 1602 holding a weapon (iron club) is selected as the first character.

In FIG. 24(C4), in addition to the first villager 1602, a hunter 1601 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a second character, with the villager 1602 holding a metal club and the hunter 1601 holding a sword. In FIG. 20(C), when the same character as the first character is displayed as the second character, a predetermined effect is displayed on the weapon he is holding. However, if the first character and the second character are different, the player will not encounter a rare animal and will ultimately be notified of a miss, so the predetermined effect is not displayed in order to avoid unnecessarily increasing the player's expectations. Also, in FIG. 24(C4), the decorative pattern forms a reach. Also, in FIG. 24(C4), in order to avoid unnecessarily increasing the player's expectations, the background music output from the speaker 354 remains BGM1, and no special sounds are output.

In Fig. 24 (D4), unlike Fig. 20 (D), there is no effect of hiding the weapons to avoid being noticed by the rare animal (i.e., the weapons remain displayed), and the two characters search for the rare animal. This suggests to the player that the two characters will not encounter the rare animal.

In addition, in FIG. 24 (D4), in order to avoid unnecessarily increasing the player's expectations, the background image displayed on the performance display device 1600 remains as the first background, all pending displays remain displayed, and the BGM output from the speaker 354 remains as BGM1.

In FIG. 24 (E4), when it appears that two characters have discovered a rare animal, it turns out that it is the other villager 1602 who has discovered it (i.e., the rare animal is not discovered), and the decorative patterns stop in a losing combination. Also, in FIG. 24 (E4), the background image displayed on the performance display device 1600 remains the first background, and BGM is not being output from the speaker 354.

Note that in FIG. 24, an effect in which two different characters are selected and a rare animal cannot be encountered is described, but an effect in which a rare animal cannot be encountered may also be executed even if the same two characters are selected. That is, for example, the effects of FIG. 20(A) to FIG. 20(C) may be executed, followed by the effects of FIG. 24(D4) and FIG. 24(E4) (wherein the first and second characters in FIG. 24(D4) and FIG. 24(E4) are hunters 1601, as in FIG. 20(C), and the third character is a villager 1602 different from the first and second characters).

In addition, instead of transitioning from FIG. 24(C4) to FIG. 24(D4), the first and second characters selected may be temporarily hidden, and the first and second characters may be reselected. This character reselection may be repeated multiple times. Also, it is desirable that the more times the character reselection is performed, the higher the chance of a big win. In the character reselection, the same combination of characters as the first and second characters selected immediately before may be selected, or a different combination of characters may be selected. For example, if reselection is repeated in which the first and second characters are both hunters, the special sound described in FIG. 20(C) is output each time the second hunter 1601 is displayed in addition to the first hunter 1601, that is, the special sound can be output multiple times with one change.

Also, instead of transitioning to FIG. 20(D) or FIG. 20(D4) after the first and second characters are selected as in FIG. 20(C) or FIG. 24(C4), a specified character that is neither a hunter 1601 nor a villager 1602 may be displayed as the third character, and then the first and second characters may be reselected.

Figures 25 and 26 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of an exploration quest presentation. In the exploration quest presentation of Figures 25 and 256, similar to the exploration quest presentation of Figure 23, from the start of the fluctuation, the third background is displayed as a background image on the presentation display device 1600, and BGM3 is output from the speaker 354. Also, in the exploration quest presentation of Figures 25 and 26, an endurance presentation is performed.

Figures 25 (A5) to 25 (D5) are similar to Figures 23 (A3) to 23 (D3), except that villager 1602 is selected as the first and second characters, respectively.

Figure 25 (E5) shows a state in which two villagers 1602 are being attacked by a weak boss 1611. The performance display device 1600 continues to display the third background as the background image, and only the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change is displayed, and BGM5 is output from the speaker 354.

In FIG. 25 (F5), an endurance performance is being performed. In FIG. 25 (F5), the performance display device 1600 continues to display the third background as the background image, all pending displays are displayed, and BGM is not being output from the speaker 354. Also, in the endurance performance when the performance display device 1600 displays the third background, the characters (the two villagers 1602 who are characters attacked by rare animals, and the hunter 1601 (different from the villagers 1602) who is a cut-in character) do not carry weapons. This is because the player's expectations have already been raised by the third background, and by not allowing the characters to carry weapons, the player's expectations are not made excessive.

In FIG. 26 (G5), a display (message saying "Looks like we won't make it in time...") indicating that the jackpot has not been won (failure in the endurance performance) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Also, a fourth background hatched in a grid pattern is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a background image. The fourth background is a background image dedicated to when the message is displayed. Also, all pending displays are displayed on the performance display device 1600, but to make it easier for the player to recognize the message and the fourth background, the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change may be hidden, or both the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending change may be hidden. Also, BGM 6 is output from the speaker 354. BGM 6 is dedicated to when the message is displayed.

In FIG. 26 (G5), by displaying a message indicating that the jackpot has not been won, and further displaying the fourth background, which is a dedicated background image, and outputting the dedicated BGM, BGM6, the player is made to realize that he or she has not won the jackpot before the exploration quest presentation has completely ended, thereby preventing the player from becoming suddenly disappointed.

However, it is desirable that the effect of FIG. 26 (G5) can be executed only when the third background is displayed from the start of the exploration quest effect, and when the characters selected as the first and second characters are not the hunters 1601 with the highest expectation of a jackpot (i.e., one of the characters is a villager 1602). In an exploration quest effect starting from the first background with a low expectation of a jackpot as in FIG. 21, the player is prepared for no jackpot to occur in the first place, so he or she will not be suddenly disappointed even if the effect of FIG. 26 (G5) is not executed and a loss is notified. In addition, in an exploration quest effect starting from the third background with a high expectation of a jackpot, if two hunters 1601 with a high expectation of a jackpot are selected as the first and second characters, a jackpot is already confirmed, so the effect of FIG. 26 (G5) is not executed.

In FIG. 26 (H5), the durability performance has failed, and the decorative symbols have stopped in a losing combination. The performance display device 1600 displays the first background as a background image, and all pending displays are displayed. Note that in FIG. 26 (H5), instead of the first background, a fifth background may be displayed, which can be displayed only after the fourth background of FIG. 26 (G5) is displayed. Note that the fifth background can be displayed continuously even in the next and subsequent variations, and can be displayed, for example, from the time the fifth background is displayed until a predetermined number of variations have been completed. Both the two villagers 1602 and the one helper character, the hunter 1601, are carrying weapons. Also, no background music is output from the speaker 354. In addition, when the fifth background is displayed from when it is displayed until the predetermined number of changes is completed, it is preferable that BGM (dedicated BGM different from any of BGM1 to BGM6) can be output from speaker 354 at least when the predetermined number of changes are being performed (a switch to another BGM may be performed during the predetermined number of changes, and the switched BGM may be returned to the dedicated BGM during the predetermined number of changes).

Note that if an exploration quest presentation is performed in the variation following the variation that ended in FIG. 26 (H5), the exploration quest presentation will start from the presentation in FIG. 20. In other words, the exploration presentation for the next variation will start with the first background displayed, and the first and second characters selected will be holding weapons. For this reason, in FIG. 26 (H5), the first background is displayed in advance and the characters are shown holding weapons in preparation for the exploration quest presentation that may be performed in the next variation.

In addition, in the exploration quest performance, if the background image and BGM at the start of the exploration quest performance are the same, the probability of winning is higher if a hunter 1601 is selected as the first and second characters than if a villager 1602 is selected as the first and second characters.

However, it is desirable that the probability of winning is higher when a villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters in a search quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM3 being output (for example, the search quest presentation in Figures 25 and 26), than when a hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters in a search quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output (for example, the search quest presentation in Figures 20 and 21).

When the third background is displayed and BGM3 is output to start the exploration quest presentation, if a miss is announced, the presentation of FIG. 26 (G5) may be omitted. If the presentation of FIG. 26 (G5) is omitted, it is advisable to return to the presentation of FIG. 25 (A5) again, following FIG. 26 (H5). In this case, in FIG. 25 (F5) and FIG. 26 (H5), BGM may not be output, or BGM3 may be output. Also, in the exploration quest presentation that starts with the third background being displayed and BGM3 being output, when the character encounters a rare animal (FIG. 23 (D3) to FIG. 23 (F3), FIG. 25 (D5) to FIG. 25 (E5)), a background different from the third background (for example, the second background or a dedicated background) may be displayed.

21, 22, and 23, an example in which a jackpot is announced after two identical characters encounter a rare animal has been described, but a jackpot may also be announced when two identical characters are selected but do not encounter a rare animal. Specifically, for example, a jackpot may be announced by the presentation of FIG. 21(I) following FIG. 20(C). Also, a jackpot may be announced by the presentation of FIG. 21(I) (where the background image is the third background) following FIG. 23(C3). This can give the player a sense of surprise. However, it is desirable that the jackpot is more likely to be expected when two identical characters encounter a rare animal than when two identical characters are selected but do not encounter a rare animal.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, even if a hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters (for example, the exploration quest presentation in Figures 20 and 21), or even if a villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters, a loss may be announced (i.e., these presentations may be selected whether a jackpot or a loss is selected).

On the other hand, in the exploration quest presentation that starts with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output, if a hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters (for example, the exploration quest presentation in FIG. 23), a jackpot is confirmed (i.e., the presentation can only be selected if a jackpot is selected), but if a villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters, a miss may be announced (i.e., the presentation can be selected whether a jackpot is selected or a miss is selected).

In addition, for example, in an exploration quest presentation that starts with the display of the third background and the output of BGM3, it is desirable that the minimum time of the advantageous state (jackpot play) controlled when the villager 1602 is selected as both the first and second characters and a jackpot is announced is shorter than the minimum time of the advantageous state (jackpot play) controlled when the hunter 1601 is selected as both the first and second characters and a jackpot is announced.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation that starts with the third background being displayed and BGM3 being output, a jackpot may also be announced when a different combination of characters (a combination of a hunter 1601 and a villager 1602) is selected as the first and second characters. Specifically, for example, in the exploration quest presentation that starts with the third background being displayed and BGM3 being output, after the different character combination is selected, a jackpot is announced without encountering a rare animal (for example, the presentation of FIG. 21(I) is executed). This allows the player's emotions to fluctuate greatly, with expectations rising when the third background is displayed and BGM3 is output, expectations falling when a different character combination is selected, and a sense of elation rising sharply when a jackpot is announced without discovering a rare animal.

On the other hand, in the exploration quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, if a combination of different characters is selected as the first and second characters, it is preferable that a jackpot is not announced (for example, as in the exploration quest presentation of FIG. 24) (i.e., a combination of different characters is selected as the first and second characters only if a miss is selected, and when a jackpot is announced, the same characters are always selected as the first and second characters).

In addition, in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, after different characters are selected as the first and second characters (for example, as in FIG. 24 (C4)), the second character may be reselected to be the same character as the first character (for example, a transition to FIG. 20 (C) may occur).

In addition, for example, in a search quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, a presentation may be executed in which a total of four characters, two hunters 1601 and two villagers 1602, gather (for example, at the timing of FIG. 20(C)) to go in search of a rare animal and defeat it. For example, it is desirable that the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the following order: when two villagers 1602 gather < when a total of four characters, two hunters 1601 and two villagers 1602, gather < when two hunters 1601 gather.

In addition, in such an effect where multiple characters (three or more characters) gather, other characters other than the hunter 1601 and the villager 1602 may also be displayed. Even in this case, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when an effect in which only two hunters 1601 are displayed is executed than when an effect in which multiple characters including the hunter 1601 gather is executed. However, the expectation may be higher only when all characters are gathered in an effect in which multiple characters (three or more characters) gather (when all types of characters are gathered) than when an effect in which only two hunters 1601 are displayed.

It is desirable that the time during which a jackpot is announced in a search quest presentation that starts with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output is shorter than the time during which a jackpot is announced in a search quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM 1 being output. In a search quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM 1 being output, the player's expectations are not high at the start of the search quest presentation, and by performing the variation presentation over a long period of time, the player's expectations can be gradually increased. On the other hand, in a search quest presentation that starts with the third background being displayed and BGM 3 being output, the player's expectations are already high from the start of the search quest presentation, so the short variation time can maintain the player's expectations and reduce fatigue.

For the same reason, it is desirable that the time period over which a miss is notified in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the third background being displayed and BGM3 being output be shorter than the time period over which a miss is notified in an exploration quest presentation that begins with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output.

In addition, it is desirable that the shortest change time for a jackpot to be notified in a search quest presentation that starts with the third background being displayed and BGM3 being output is shorter than the shortest change time for a jackpot to be notified in a search quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output. In addition, it is desirable that the shortest change time for a search quest presentation that starts with the third background being displayed and BGM3 being output is shorter than the shortest change time for a search quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, regardless of whether a jackpot is notified. In this way, in a search quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, various presentation patterns can be realized over time, regardless of whether a jackpot is notified, and the player's expectations, which are not high at the start of the search quest presentation, can be gradually increased.

In addition, a maximum of three characters can be displayed simultaneously in the exploration quest presentation, and a jackpot may be determined when a predetermined combination of three characters is displayed simultaneously. For example, the predetermined combination may be three hunters 1601 or three villagers 1602.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, after the two characters who fought the rare animal and the helper character become the above-mentioned predetermined combination of characters and a jackpot is announced, a character change presentation may be executed in which these characters change to other characters. For example, in FIG. 21 (I), if the rare animal is defeated by three villagers 1602 holding weapons instead of three hunters 1601 holding weapons, a character change presentation may be executed in which all three villagers 1602 holding weapons change to hunters 1601 holding weapons at the same time. However, since the player feels more excited when the hunters 1601 are displayed rather than when the villagers 1602 are displayed, it is preferable not to perform a presentation in which all three hunters 1601 holding weapons change to three villagers 1602 holding weapons at the same time when the three hunters 1601 holding weapons are displayed and a jackpot is announced.

Similarly, in FIG. 22 (G2), if three unarmed villagers 1602, rather than three unarmed hunters 1601, defeat a rare animal, a character change effect may be performed in which all three unarmed villagers 1602 simultaneously change into unarmed hunters 1601. However, because the player feels more excited when the hunters 1601 are displayed than when the villagers 1602 are displayed, it is preferable that when the three unarmed hunters 1601 are displayed and a jackpot is announced, the effect of all these characters changing into three unarmed villagers 1602 simultaneously is not performed.

In order to give the player a sense of exhilaration through the character change presentation, it is desirable that the character change presentation be executed only when a predetermined advantageous state (such as a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state) is achieved. In addition, in the character change presentation, the presence or absence of weapons of the characters may change, for example, by changing the three unarmed villagers 1602 into hunters 1601 holding weapons, or the three weapon-holding villagers 1602 into hunters 1601 holding weapons.

When the three villagers 1602 change into the three hunters 1601 in the character change presentation, a special presentation movie or the like can be displayed to give the player a sense of elation. Also, in order to increase the sense of elation given to the player when the character change presentation appears, it is preferable that the rate at which the character change presentation appears when a jackpot is announced in the exploration quest presentation is lower than the rate at which the character change presentation does not appear.

In addition, in the character change presentation, when the three villagers 1602 holding weapons change to the three hunters 1601 holding weapons, the special presentation movie displayed and the benefits given to the player may be different from those when the three villagers 1602 unarmed change to the three hunters 1601 unarmed. For example, in the character change presentation, when the three villagers 1602 unarmed change to the three hunters 1601 unarmed, a more luxurious special presentation movie (for example, the presentation movie is displayed for a longer time, the number of characters displayed in the presentation movie is greater, or the volume of the sound output simultaneously with the presentation movie is greater, etc.) may be displayed, or a more advantageous benefit (for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game that starts immediately after the presentation movie may be greater, etc.) may be given to the player.

In FIG. 21(G) and FIG. 25(F5), at the start of the endurance performance, the two characters attacked by the rare animal and the cut-in character are displayed simultaneously, but at the start of the endurance performance, in order to ensure that the player knows who the cut-in character is, first only the cut-in character is displayed (without changing the background image from when the rare animal attacked), and then, as in FIG. 21(G) and FIG. 25(F5), the two characters attacked by the rare animal and the cut-in character may be displayed.

In the exploration quest performance that starts with the display of the third background and the output of BGM3, two villagers 1602 without weapons are attacked by a weak boss 1611, and the two villagers 1602 without weapons are invisible due to the fourth background in FIG. 26 (G5), and the two villagers 1602 redisplayed in FIG. 26 (H5) are holding weapons. However, in the exploration quest performance that starts with the display of the third background and the output of BGM3, if two hunters 1601 without weapons find a rare animal, it is desirable that the fourth background in FIG. 26 (G5) is not displayed, and the two hunters 1601 without weapons in FIG. 26 (H5) do not change to hunters 1601 holding weapons. This is because when the two hunters 1601 encounter a rare animal, the probability of a big win is high and the player's expectations are rising, so the fourth background including the display indicating that the big win has not been won is not to dampen the player's expectations.

In addition, in an exploration quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, as in the examples of Figures 20 and 21, it is possible to execute a presentation in which two unarmed hunters 1601 fight a rare animal and then pick up their weapons again, or a presentation in which two unarmed villagers 1602 fight a rare animal and then pick up their weapons again. However, in an exploration quest presentation that starts with the first background being displayed and BGM1 being output, the expectation of a jackpot is not high to begin with, so when there is a change in the presence or absence of weapons, it is desirable not to display the fourth background, which would further reduce the player's expectations, as shown in Figure 21.

Figure 27 is another example of a search quest presentation. In the search quest presentation of Figure 27, a predetermined operation is prompted on the pressing operation unit 303 during a battle between a character and a rare animal, and when the predetermined operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303, a presentation is executed in which the character attacks the rare animal, or the character is attacked by the rare animal. Figure 27 (E) is a presentation that transitions from Figure 20 (D), and a presentation similar to that of Figure 20 (E) is performed. From Figure 27 (E), it is possible to transition to Figure 27 (F6), Figure 27 (F7), or Figure 27 (F8).

27(F6), similar to FIG. 27(E), two unweaponed hunters 1601, a strong boss 1610, a first background as a background image, and a hold display corresponding to the ongoing change are displayed on the performance display device 1600, and BGM3 is output from the speaker 354. Furthermore, in FIG. 27(F6), a first button image (an image consisting of an image of a button labeled "PUSH" and an image of an arrow) instructing the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed (a so-called single press) is displayed in the center of the performance display device 1600, and an instruction sound ("Press!") instructing the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed (i.e. indicating the instruction content of the first button image) is output from the speaker 354.

To make it easier for the player to recognize that he or she is instructing an operation on the pressing operation unit 303, the display priority of the first button image is higher than the display priority of other images such as characters and rare animals. Note that the display of the first button image and the output of an instruction sound indicating the instruction of the first button image may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined operation (for example, a long press that is different from a simple press) is performed on the pressing operation unit 303).

In FIG. 27 (F6), when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed according to the instruction shown by the first button image, the first button image is erased and the display transitions to FIG. 27 (F). In FIG. 27 (F), the same effect as in FIG. 20 (F) is performed, and then the display transitions to the endurance effect in FIG. 21 (G) (i.e., an effect in which a character holding a weapon is displayed).

In FIG. 27 (F6), if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed in accordance with the instruction indicated by the first button image, the display transitions to FIG. 27 (F7). FIG. 27 (F7) shows a performance during a specific period in which performance images such as images of characters and rare animals are not displayed, and the first button image continues to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the instruction sound instructing the pressing operation unit 303 indicated by the first button image continues to be output from the speaker 354, but in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the pressing instruction of the pressing operation unit 303, the images of the characters and rare animals are erased from the performance display device 1600 and the output of the BGM is stopped. In this way, during a specific period in which performance images such as images of characters and rare animals are not displayed, the player can increase his or her sense of expectation that the character will be able to defeat the rare animal by operating the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, in FIG. 27 (F7), instead of stopping the output of the BGM, the volume of the BGM may be reduced (for example, below the volume at the start of the exploration quest presentation).

27(F7), the background image may be changed to a single color image in a predetermined color to make the first button image easier to recognize. In addition, in FIG. 27(F7), all hold displays may also be erased from the performance display device 1600. In addition, in FIG. 27(F7), it is preferable that no performance sound other than the instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the first button image is output from the speaker 354. Examples of the performance sound other than the instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the first button image include, for example, the voices of the two characters or rare animals, and the sound effects in the battle with the two characters or rare animals, and other performance sounds related to the two characters. The performance sounds related to the two characters include, for example, the performance sounds accompanying the actions of the two characters, the performance sounds output in FIG. 20(B) and FIG. 20(C), etc. when the characters are determined, and the performance sounds output when the same two characters are selected, which are output in FIG. 20(C), etc. Also, as described above, a transition from FIG. 27(E) to FIG. 27(F7) may be made without passing through FIG. 27(F6).

In FIG. 27 (F7), when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed according to the instructions indicated by the first button image, the specific period ends and transitions to FIG. 27 (F). In other words, in this case, the character without a weapon is hidden, and the next time the character is displayed again, it will not be holding a weapon.

In FIG. 27 (F7), if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed in accordance with the instructions indicated by the first button image, the specific period ends and a transition is made to FIG. 27 (F8). Note that in FIG. 27 (F7), if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in accordance with the instructions indicated by the first button image, the specific period may end after the first button image is erased, or the first button image may be erased after the specific period ends.

In FIG. 27(F7), if the instruction contents indicated by the first button image are not followed and the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed (even if a predetermined time has passed since the first button image was displayed), the specific period may end and transition to FIG. 27(F) may occur. Also, if the instruction contents indicated by the first button image are not followed and the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed (even if a predetermined time has passed since the first button image was displayed), the player is not interested in the presentation in which the character attacks the rare animal and the character is attacked by the rare animal, so the specific period may end after FIG. 27(F7), and FIG. 27(F) may be omitted and transition may be made to the endurance presentation of FIG. 21(G). In other words, in this case, the character without a weapon is hidden, and the next time the character is redisplayed, it will be in a state of holding a weapon.

In addition, for example, the first button image may be able to be displayed (either continuing from FIG. 27 (F7) or after the start of the endurance performance) even during the endurance performance (a situation in which three characters are displayed). In this case, for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., three seconds) has elapsed since the start of the endurance performance, the first button image is hidden, and when a predetermined time (e.g., five seconds) has elapsed since the first button image was erased, the images of the three characters are also hidden. After the three characters are also erased, a predetermined movie is displayed on the performance display device 1600, but for example, when operation of a predetermined operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303) is detected, the predetermined movie is ended.

When the specified movie is being displayed, it is desirable that no sound is output from speaker 354 in order to maintain the sense of tension given to the player by the endurance presentation. The three characters may be hidden and the specified movie may be displayed, provided that a specified time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the endurance presentation. The time from when the three characters are displayed to when they are hidden in the endurance presentation is longer than the time until the first button image is erased. In the above example, the specified movie is displayed after the three characters are hidden, but the three characters may be hidden by displaying the specified movie.

Figure 27 (F8) shows a performance during a specific period when performance images such as images of characters and rare animals are not displayed, and a second button image (an image consisting of an image of a button labeled "long press" and an image of an arrow) instructing a long press of the pressing operation unit 303 (an operation different from a single press) is displayed in the upper left corner of the performance display device 1600 (a position different from the position (center) where the first button image is displayed).

In FIG. 27 (F8), in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the long press instruction of the pressing operation unit 303 indicated by the second button image, the images of the character and rare animal are not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the BGM is not output. Also, unlike when the first button image is displayed, when the second button image is displayed, the instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image is not output. In this way, during a specific period when the effect images such as the images of the character and rare animal are not displayed, the output of the BGM is stopped, so that the player can increase the expectation that the character will be able to defeat the rare animal by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 for a long time. Also, by not outputting the instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image, the player is given a sense of tension, and the instruction effect by the second button image can be treated as a hidden effect. Note that in FIG. 27 (F8), instead of stopping the output of the BGM, the volume of the BGM may be suppressed (for example, lower than the volume at the start of the exploration quest effect).

The display size of the second button image is smaller than the display size of the first button image. In addition, in FIG. 27 (F8), it is desirable that not only the BGM and the instruction sounds indicating the instructions of the second button image, but also other sound effects (for example, the voices of characters and rare animals, and sound effects in battles with characters and rare animals) are not output from speaker 354.

In FIG. 27 (F8), when a predetermined time has passed since the second button image was displayed, or when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed and held (for example, pressed for 3 seconds or more), the specific period ends and the display transitions to FIG. 27 (F). In other words, in this case, the character without a weapon is hidden, and the next time the character is displayed again, he or she will not be holding a weapon.

In addition, in FIG. 27 (F8), when a predetermined time has passed since the second button image was displayed, or when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed and held (for example, pressed for 3 seconds or more), the specific period ends, and FIG. 27 (F) may be omitted and a transition to the endurance presentation of FIG. 21 (G) may occur. In other words, in this case, the character without a weapon is hidden, and the next time the character is displayed again, it will be holding a weapon.

As shown in FIG. 27 (F8), after the second button image is displayed during a specific period in which the two characters and the rare animal are not displayed, when the specific period ends and the two characters and the rare animal are redisplayed, the first button image may be displayed in place of the second button image (or the second button image may be redisplayed and then erased). In this way, when the display is changed from the second button image to the first button image, a specific presentation image may always be displayed.

The second button image is smaller in display size than the first button image, is displayed in a corner of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and does not output a sound indicating the instruction of the second button image. Therefore, the second button image is less noticeable than the first button image. Therefore, the second button image may remain displayed even before the transition to FIG. 27 (F8) (for example, from the start of the change in which the exploration quest performance is executed or from the time when the character encounters a rare animal, etc.).

For example, when the second button image is continuously displayed from the start of a change that executes a search quest performance, a sound indicating the instruction content of the second button image may be output at the start of the change or before the change starts (for example, a predetermined number of seconds before).

In FIG. 27 (F8), a command sound may be output to indicate the command content of the second button image, but it is preferable that the rate at which a command sound is not output to indicate the command content of the second button image is higher than the rate at which a command sound is output to indicate the command content of the second button image in FIG. 27 (F8).

In FIG. 27 (F8), if an operation other than a long press (e.g., repeated taps, etc.) is performed on the pressing operation unit 303, an instruction sound may be additionally output indicating the instruction content of the second button image so that the player can recognize the operation content.

In FIG. 27 (F6), a second button image may be displayed instead of the first button image. In this case, although BGM3 is output from speaker 354, a sound indicating the instruction of the second button image is not output. The second button image may be displayable only in an exploration quest presentation that starts when the third background is displayed and BGM3 is output. The display priority of the second button image is higher than the display priority of other images such as characters and rare animals, and may be higher or lower than the display priority of the first button image.

In addition, in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, during the specific periods in FIG. 27 (F7) and FIG. 27 (F8), a sound exclusive to the specific period may be output from speaker 354, and at this time, a special effect image that is different from the first button image and the second button image and is displayed only during the specific period may be displayed.

In addition, in Fig. 27 (F6), Fig. 27 (F7), and Fig. 27 (F8), when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated according to the instructions on the first button image or the second button image, the first button image or the second button image may not be hidden until a predetermined time has passed since the operation (i.e., they may not be hidden at the timing when the operation is detected) so that the player can confirm what instructions were displayed.

For example, the pachinko machine 1 may have a movable body at a predetermined position. For example, as in the transition from FIG. 27 (F6) to FIG. 27 (F7), when the two characters and the rare animal are hidden, the movable body may start moving from a standby position (initial position), and the movable body may move to a position where the two characters and the rare animal are not displayed, while the two characters and the rare animal are not displayed. Also, as in the transition from FIG. 27 (E) to FIG. 27 (F8), when the two characters and the rare animal are hidden, the movable body may start moving from a standby position, and the movable body may move to a position where the two characters and the rare animal are not displayed, while the two characters and the rare animal are not displayed. Also, the display size of the second button image is smaller than the display size of the first button image, and if the position of the movable body and the display position of the second button image overlap, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the instruction content of the second button image. Therefore, the operating position of the movable body may include a position where it overlaps with the display area of the first button image, but may not include a position where it overlaps with the display area of the second button image.

It is preferable that the standby position of the movable body does not overlap with the display area of the first button image or the display area of the second button image. For example, the movable body may overlap with the display area of the first button image or the display area of the second button image at the maximum operating position of the movable body, or the movable body may overlap with the display area of the first button image or the display area of the second button image only while moving to the maximum operating position of the movable body without overlapping with the display area of the first button image or the display area of the second button image at the maximum operating position of the movable body. There may be a timing when the movable body completely covers the first button image or the second button image, or at least a part of the first button image or the second button image may be visible no matter what position the movable body is in.

For example, when two characters and the first button image are displayed as in FIG. 27 (F6), the output state (e.g. the length of time that it is output) of a predetermined effect sound (e.g. an effect sound accompanying the actions of the two characters) may be changed by operating a predetermined operation unit (e.g. pressing operation unit 303). However, it is preferable that the output state of the instruction sound indicating the instruction content of the first button image or the second button image does not change (i.e. the output state does not change even if the predetermined operation unit is operated) in order to ensure that the player is aware of the instruction content.

For example, as shown in FIG. 27 (F6), when two characters and a first button image are displayed, the aforementioned character reselection can be performed, and the probability of winning is higher when character reselection is performed than when character reselection is not performed. When two different characters and a first button image are displayed, a character reselection effect may be performed, and this reselection effect can change two different characters into two identical characters. On the other hand, when two characters and a first button image are displayed, it is preferable that the aforementioned character reselection is not performed. Also, the rate at which the character reselection effect is performed is higher when two identical characters and a first button image are displayed as shown in FIG. 27 (F6) than when one hunter 1601, one villager 1602, and a first button image are displayed.

In addition, in the search quest presentation during a jackpot fluctuation, if the situation passes through a state in which two characters and a first button image are displayed together as in FIG. 27 (F6), it is desirable that the jackpot be announced after the same two characters are displayed in that situation. On the other hand, in the search quest presentation during a jackpot fluctuation, if the situation passes through a state in which two characters and a second button image are displayed together, both a presentation in which the same two characters are displayed in that situation and then a jackpot is announced, and a presentation in which a jackpot is announced without the same two characters being displayed in that situation may be executable.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the shortest time that the two characters are displayed together when an effect in which the first button image and two characters are displayed together as in FIG. 27 (F6) is executed is longer than the shortest time that the two characters are displayed together when the second button image and two characters are displayed together.

In addition, in the exploration quest presentation, there are cases where each character is displayed holding a weapon and cases where each character is displayed not holding a weapon, but if the character is the same, the display of that character will be common between the display mode of that character holding a weapon and the display mode of that character not holding a weapon (i.e., that character is a common part of these).

For example, when the same character is displayed in a display mode holding a weapon and in a display mode not holding a weapon, the characters that are common to the character may be displayed in exactly the same display mode, or may be displayed in different display modes as long as the player can recognize that they are the same character (for example, the pose of the Hunter 1601 part may be different, the clothes worn may be different, and the movement mode may be different between Hunter 1601 holding a weapon and Hunter 1601 not holding a weapon, etc.).

[4. Daruma-san ga koronda performance]
The Daruma-san ga koronda performance will be explained below. The Daruma-san ga koronda performance can be executed before the decorative symbols form a reach state, and can also be executed as a reach effect after the decorative symbols form a reach state. Hereinafter, the Daruma-san ga koronda performance executed before the decorative symbols form a reach state is also called "Daruma-san ga koronda chance," and the Daruma-san ga koronda performance as a reach effect is also called "Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach."

In the Daruma-san ga koronda performance, the image displayed on the performance display device 1600 is an image seen from the perspective of the Oni. In other words, the Daruma-san ga koronda performance is a performance in which the player simulates the experience of Daruma-san ga koronda by imagining that he or she is the Oni.

In the "Daruma-san ga koronda" performance, if all non-Oni characters move when the line "Daruma-san ga koronda!" is not being output from speaker 354, the Oni wins (i.e. the player wins), and if the Oni is touched by any non-Oni character when the line is being output, the Oni loses (i.e. the player loses).

In the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, if the Oni wins, the game progresses to the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, and if the Oni loses, a miss is announced. Also, in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, if the Oni wins, a jackpot is announced, and if the Oni loses, a miss is announced. Note that in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, it may be possible to announce a jackpot when the Oni wins, but it is desirable that the rate at which a jackpot is announced when the Oni wins in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance is extremely low compared to the rate at which the game progresses to the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach.

Figures 28 and 29 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach. Figure 28 (A) shows the state in which the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach has started. In Figure 28 (A), decorative patterns form a reach state, and a title image indicating that the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach has started is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Note that decorative patterns do not have to be displayed from the start of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach (from Figure 28 (A)) until the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, described below, is displayed and the non-Oni characters are hidden (until Figure 28 (F)).

In addition, in FIG. 28(A), a forest background (an image of five trees growing) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a background image. This forest background is a dedicated background image that can only be displayed in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, and when the forest background is displayed, it is desirable that the rate of winning is higher than when the ocean background described below is displayed. In the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, the hold display is hidden until the transition to FIG. 29(E) described below is made to allow the player to focus on the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach effect.

In FIG. 28(B), the phrase "Daruma-san..." is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and while the phrase is being displayed and output, two non-Demon characters 1604 (facing forward and in the same white display mode) displayed on the performance display device 1600 are moving (for example, moving forward). Also, in FIG. 28(B), a forest background is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a background image. When two non-Demon characters 1604 in the same display mode are selected, a predetermined effect may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 so as to overlap the two non-Demon characters 1604 in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation.

In the example of FIG. 28, the display of the two non-Demon characters 1604 (in the same display mode, in white, facing forward) starts from FIG. 28(B), but the two non-Demon characters 1604 (in the same display mode, in white, facing forward) may also be displayed from FIG. 28(A), i.e., at the start of the final battle reach of Daruma-san ga Koronda.

When two non-oni characters with different display modes are selected, the two non-oni characters with different display modes may remain displayed, and Daruma-san ga koronda may not be performed (i.e., the performance from FIG. 28(C) onwards may not be executed), and the Daruma-san ga koronda chance and the variation may end. In other words, the result of the lottery (a loss) is indicated by displaying the two non-oni characters with different display modes.

In FIG. 28(C), the line "I fell!" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and the movement of the two non-Demon characters 1604 has stopped by the time the output of the line has finished. Because the two non-Demon characters 1604 are moving forward, the display size of the two non-Demon characters is larger in FIG. 28(C) than in FIG. 28(B). Also, in FIG. 28(C), a forest background is displayed as a background image on the performance display device 1600.

In FIG. 28(D), the line "Daruma-san..." is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354. Also, in FIG. 28(D), the background and two non-Demon characters 1604 are hidden on the performance display device 1600 (a single-color image (for example, a solid black display) may be displayed as the background image). In this way, by hiding the non-Demon characters 1604, the player cannot tell how far the non-Demon characters 1604 have advanced, creating a sense of tension. Note that in FIG. 28(D), the line "Daruma-san..." may also be hidden.

In addition, in FIG. 28(D), in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, the two non-Demon characters 1604 may be hidden, for example, by displaying a special image (for example, by covering the two non-Demon characters 1604 with a special image). Note that this special image may be a dedicated image that can only be displayed in the Final Battle Reach of Daruma-san ga Koronda.

Note that in FIG. 28(D) (i.e., in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach where a forest background is displayed), the two non-Demon characters 1604 are hidden for a predetermined time, but this predetermined time may be longer or shorter than the predetermined time during which the two non-Demon characters are hidden in FIG. 30(C) described below (i.e., in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance when the ocean background is displayed), which will be described later.

In FIG. 28(E), the line "I fell!" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and by the time the output of the line is finished, the two non-Demon characters 1604 have made the action of touching the Oni. In other words, the Oni has been notified that he has lost, and the decorative patterns have stopped in a losing combination. Note that only one of the non-Demon characters 1604 may make the action of touching the Oni. Because the two non-Demon characters 1604 are moving forward, the display size of the two non-Demon characters 1604 is larger in FIG. 28(E) than in FIG. 28(C). Also, in FIG. 28(E), a forest background is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a background image.

In FIG. 28(E), an effect may be executed that prompts a predetermined operation (e.g., pressing) on a predetermined operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303). When the predetermined operation is performed on the predetermined operation unit during the operation valid period of the predetermined operation unit according to the effect, the two non-demon characters 1604 are hidden (e.g., transitioning to the effect of FIG. 28(F)).

In FIG. 28(F), the background and two non-Demon characters 1604 are hidden on the performance display device 1600 (a single color image (e.g., solid black) may be displayed as the background image). In this way, by hiding the background image and the two non-Demon characters 1604, the player's disappointment caused by the loss notification in FIG. 28(E) can be calmed.

Note that in FIG. 28(F) (i.e., when the background and two non-Demon characters are hidden after a loss is announced in the Daruma-san ga koronda Final Battle Reach where a forest background is displayed), a dedicated image may be displayed. This dedicated image is, for example, an image that is displayed before the background changes (from the forest background in FIG. 28(E) to the ocean background in FIG. 30(G) described below). Note that it is desirable that the time during which the dedicated image is displayed (i.e., the time during which the background and two non-Demon characters are hidden) is longer than the time during which the background and two non-Demon characters are hidden in FIG. 28(D) and the time during which the background and two non-Demon characters are hidden in FIG. 30(C) described below.

When the start condition is met (game ball B enters the first start hole 2002 when the reserved memory number of the first special random number has not reached the upper limit, and game ball B enters the second start hole 2004 when the reserved memory number of the second special random number has not reached the upper limit), a sound effect is output in principle to indicate that the start condition has been met. However, in FIG. 28(F) (that is, when the two non-demon characters 1604 are temporarily hidden after a loss is announced in the final battle reach of Daruma-san ga koronda), if the start condition is met, it is desirable not to output the sound effect that is output when the start condition is met in order to calm the player's disappointment. In this case, the player can recognize that the start condition has been met by visually checking the reserved display after the timing when the reserved display is redisplayed.

On the other hand, as in FIG. 28(D) and FIG. 30(C) described later, when the two non-Demon characters 1604 are temporarily hidden before it is announced whether the change is a jackpot or a miss, it is desirable that the sound effect be output when the start condition is met. Note that, even when the two non-Demon characters 1604 are temporarily hidden as in FIG. 28(D) and FIG. 30(C) described later, in order to allow the player to concentrate on the Daruma-san ga Koronda presentation, if the start condition is met, the sound effect that is output when the start condition is met may not be output.

In addition, in FIG. 28(E), when a jackpot is announced (i.e., when the two non-Demon characters 1604 act while the line "I fell!" is being output and an effect in which the Oni wins is executed), in order to maintain the player's sense of excitement, it is desirable that the effect in FIG. 28(F) (i.e., an effect in which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are not displayed) is not executed, and the effect proceeds with the two non-Demon characters 1604 displayed.

In FIG. 29(G), the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed on the effect display device 1600. The two non-Demon characters 1604 are stopped in a different state from that displayed in FIG. 28(E) (i.e., they are changed from a state in which they are reaching out to touch the Demon to a state in which they are lowering their hands). The two non-Demon characters 1604 in the same white color as in FIG. 28(E) are redisplayed in a different display state (i.e., a state different from when the result of the Daruma-san ga koronda reach was notified), so that the player can be sure to recognize the result of the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach while also being sure to recognize that the effect is progressing. Note that it is desirable that the display size of the two non-Demon characters 1604 displayed in FIG. 29(G) is larger than the display size of the two non-Demon characters 1604 displayed in FIG. 29(E) (the display size before they were temporarily hidden).

In addition, in FIG. 29(G), the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to an ocean background (wave image), and a hold display is displayed. A background image (ocean background) different from the background image (forest background) previously displayed in FIG. 28(E) is displayed, and a hold display is displayed, thereby allowing the player to be sure that the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach has ended. As will be described in detail later, this ocean background is the background image displayed in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance. In FIG. 29(G), when a predetermined time has passed since the two non-demon characters 1604, the ocean background, and the hold display are redisplayed, the change ends. In FIG. 29(G), the effect sound may be prevented from being output in order to calm the disappointment of the player who has been notified of a loss in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach.

In FIG. 29(G), the timing at which the pending display is redisplayed is the same as the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed, or within a predetermined time of the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before or 0.5 seconds after the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed).

In FIG. 28(E), the result of the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach is announced when the line "Daruma-san ga koronda!" is output for the second time, but in FIG. 28(C), the result of the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach may be announced when the line "Daruma-san ga koronda!" is output for the first time. That is, in FIG. 28(C), two non-Demon characters 1604 may touch the Oni (announcement of the Oni's loss) while the line is being output, or one of the non-Demon characters 1604 may act (announcement of the Oni's win) when the output of the line in FIG. 28(C) is finished. In this case, the effects in FIG. 28(D) and FIG. 28(E) are omitted (and the effect in FIG. 28(F) may also be omitted).

When the above-mentioned dedicated image is displayed in FIG. 28(F), a dedicated background may be displayed in FIG. 29(G) instead of the ocean background. When this dedicated background is displayed, it may continue to be displayed until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until a predetermined number of changes are completed after the dedicated background is displayed) in order to leave the player with an afterglow of the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach, and the ocean background may be displayed after the predetermined condition is met. When the dedicated background is displayed, the non-oni characters displayed may also be dedicated non-oni characters. By displaying dedicated non-oni characters corresponding to the dedicated background, it is possible to provide a unified presentation, making it easier for players who want to see limited presentations to continue playing.

In FIG. 29(G), an effect may be executed to prompt a player to perform a specified operation (e.g., a long press) on a specified operation unit (e.g., the pressing operation unit 303) at the same time as the display of the dedicated background starts or after a specified time has elapsed. In addition, it is desirable that the effect prompting the player to perform a specified operation on the specified operation unit is executed for a specified time, and is not interrupted even when the specified operation on the specified operation unit is executed, in order to ensure that the player performs the specified operation.

28 and 29 illustrate an example in which a loss is announced in the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach, but instead of FIG. 28(F), for example, a special announcement effect may be made indicating that the non-Oni character 1604 was actually moving while the line "I fell!" is being output and before touching the Oni (i.e., an announcement that the Oni has won and a jackpot has been won) instead. In this case, in FIG. 29(G), the two non-Oni characters 1604 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 along with a line indicating that they have lost to the Oni, and the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance. Figure 30(A) shows the state in which the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance has started. The Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance starts, for example, at the same time as the start of the fluctuation. In Figure 30(A), the decorative pattern does not form a reach state, and a title image indicating that the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance has started is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), an ocean background is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a background image. Because a jackpot is never announced during the chance when Daruma-san ga Koronda (or the rate at which a jackpot is announced is extremely low), it is desirable that the ocean background is not a dedicated background image (i.e., a background image that can be displayed during other effects) in order to avoid creating excessive expectations in the player. Also, during the chance when Daruma-san ga Koronda, a hold display is displayed in order to avoid creating excessive expectations in the player and to ensure that the player is aware of future fluctuations in the game.

In FIG. 30(A), a white non-oni character 1604 facing forward and a non-oni character 1605 facing left and hatched with diagonal lines are displayed on the performance display device 1600. In FIG. 30(A), the two non-oni characters participating in Daruma-san ni koronda have not been determined, and the combination of the two non-oni characters displayed in FIG. 30(A) may change over time. In FIG. 30(A) (that is, until the two non-oni characters participating in Daruma-san ni koronda are determined), the two non-oni characters may be displayed in a transparent state (for example, a transparency selected from a range of transparency greater than 0% and less than 100%) to allow the player to recognize that the two non-oni characters displayed are not the characters determined to participate in Daruma-san ni koronda. If the two non-oni characters are in a transparent state, the background of the sea displayed behind the two non-oni characters 1604 becomes visible.

In FIG. 30(B), two non-oni characters 1604 who will participate in Daruma-san ga koronda have been determined. The combination of two non-oni characters who will participate in Daruma-san ga koronda is determined from two non-oni characters 1604, two non-oni characters 1605, or one non-oni character 1604 and one non-oni character 1605. Also, in FIG. 30(B), an ocean background is displayed as a background image on the performance display device 1600, and a hold display is also displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In FIG. 30(C), the line "Daruma-san..." is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and the two non-demon characters 1604 are hidden. Also in FIG. 30(C), an ocean background is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a background image, and a hold display is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. Note that also in FIG. 30(C), the two non-demon characters 1604 may be displayed in a transparent state (for example, a transparency selected from a transparency rate greater than 0% and less than 100%). If the two non-demon characters 1604 are in a transparent state, the ocean background displayed behind the two non-demon characters 1604 becomes visible.

In FIG. 30(C), in order to heighten the player's sense of anticipation, the two non-Demon characters 1604 may be hidden (for example, by covering the two non-Demon characters 1604 with the specific image) by displaying, for example, a specific image (an image indicating that the two non-Demon characters 1604 in action will be displayed again). Note that this specific image may be an image that can be displayed at times other than the chance when Daruma-san ga koronda occurs.

After FIG. 30(C), the display transitions to FIG. 30(D) or FIG. 30(F). In FIG. 30(D), the phrase "I fell!" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and by the time the output of the phrase ends, the two non-Demon characters 1604 have made the motion of touching the Oni. In other words, the Oni has lost. Note that only one of the non-Demon characters 1604 may make the motion of touching the Oni. As the two non-Demon characters 1604 are moving forward, the display size of the two non-Demon characters 1604 is larger in FIG. 30(D) than in FIG. 30(B). Also, in FIG. 30(D), the background of the sea is displayed as a background image on the performance display device 1600, and a hold display is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In FIG. 30(D), the timing at which the pending display is redisplayed is the same as the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed, or within a predetermined time of the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed (for example, 0.5 seconds before or 0.5 seconds after the timing at which the two non-Demon characters 1604 are redisplayed).

In FIG. 30(E), the two non-Oni characters 1604 are stopped in the same manner as they were in FIG. 30(D) (i.e., with their hands outstretched to touch the Oni). By displaying the two non-Oni characters 1604 in the same display manner as FIG. 30(D) (i.e., the same manner as when the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance is announced), the player can be sure to recognize the result of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance. Note that in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, a jackpot is never announced (or the rate at which a jackpot is announced is extremely low), and the player is only disappointed when a loss is announced. Therefore, after the presentation in FIG. 30(D), the presentation in FIG. 30(E) is executed without inserting the presentation in FIG. 28(F) to reduce the player's disappointment.

Following FIG. 30(C), in FIG. 30(F), the line "I fell!" is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and output from the speaker 354, and while the line is being output, the two non-Demon characters do not touch the Oni, and after the line is output, the two non-Demon characters 1604 move. In other words, the Oni has won. It is also possible for only one of the non-Demon characters 1604 to have moved. Because the two non-Demon characters 1604 have moved forward, the display size of the two non-Demon characters 1604 is larger in FIG. 30(F) than in FIG. 30(B). Also, in FIG. 30(F), the background of the sea is displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a background image, and a hold display is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

When the Oni wins during the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance as shown in FIG. 30(F), the game progresses to the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 (i.e., transitions to FIG. 28(A)). Note that in FIG. 30(D) and FIG. 30(F), the non-oni character that is redisplayed may have changed to a non-oni character different from the non-oni character 1604 displayed in FIG. 30(B) (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot may differ depending on the non-oni character selected, and the non-oni character may change to a non-oni character with a higher probability of winning a jackpot than that in FIG. 30(B)).

In addition, in both the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach (a Daruma-san ga Koronda presentation in which a forest background is displayed) and the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance (a Daruma-san ga Koronda presentation in which only the ocean background is displayed), if different non-oni characters are selected as the two non-oni characters, a jackpot may not be announced (i.e., two different non-oni characters are selected only when a miss is announced).

In the above example, two non-demon characters are displayed in the chance of Daruma-san ga koronda and the final battle reach, but three or more non-demon characters may be displayed. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 28(F) of the final battle reach of Daruma-san ga koronda, a character with a different display mode from the two non-demon characters 1604 is additionally displayed as a third non-demon character, and the third non-demon character also performs an action of touching the demon. In FIG. 28(F), the third non-demon character is also hidden like the two non-demon characters 1604, and in FIG. 29(G), the third non-demon character is also redisplayed like the two non-demon characters 1604. In FIG. 29(G), after the three non-demon characters are redisplayed, a performance may be executed in which the third non-demon character changes to a non-demon character 1604 with the same display mode as the two non-demon characters 1604.

For example, in FIG. 30(D) of Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, a character with a different display mode from the two non-Oni characters 1604 is additionally displayed as a third non-Oni character, and the third non-Oni character also performs an action of touching the Oni. In FIG. 30(E), the third non-Oni character remains displayed in the same way as the two non-Oni characters 1604.

In the above example, in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, either a miss is announced or the game progresses to the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach is selected, but for example, if a special background (hereinafter referred to as a desert background) is displayed instead of the ocean background in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance, the game may always progress to the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach. In other words, the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance has a higher chance of hitting the jackpot when a desert background is displayed than when an ocean background is displayed, which can increase the player's expectations. In the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach that has progressed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance in which a desert background is displayed, after a miss is announced, the desert background is displayed again instead of the ocean background in FIG. 29(G).

In addition, in Fig. 30(C) of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance that starts with a desert background displayed, the two non-oni characters 1604 are hidden for a predetermined time, but it is desirable that this predetermined time be longer than the time during which the two non-oni characters 1604 are hidden in Fig. 30(C) of the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance that starts with an ocean background displayed. As described above, the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance that starts with a special background displayed will always develop into the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach, so by hiding the two non-oni characters 1604 for a long time, it is possible to further heighten the player's sense of expectation and tension.

As mentioned above, in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach where a forest background is displayed, when the background and the two non-Demon characters 1604 are hidden after a miss is announced (presentation in FIG. 28(F)), a dedicated image may be displayed, but in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance where the two non-Demon characters 1604 are hidden, the dedicated image may not be displayed even if the ocean background or the desert background is displayed.

As described above, it is preferable that no sound effects are output in FIG. 29(G) in the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach developed from the Daruma-san ga koronda chance where the ocean background is displayed (a state where the ocean background is redisplayed after the forest background is hidden when a loss is reported). On the other hand, it is preferable that sound effects are output in FIG. 29(G) in the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach developed from the Daruma-san ga koronda chance where the desert background is displayed (a state where the desert background is redisplayed after the forest background is hidden when a loss is reported). In the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach developed from the Daruma-san ga koronda chance where the desert background is displayed, the desert background is redisplayed even after a loss is reported, so that the player recognizes that, unlike the case of the ocean background, he is still staying in the desert background, that is, that the probability of a jackpot is still high, and this creates a sense of expectation for the next game, and the configuration that allows sound effects to be output makes it possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation and tension for a jackpot through both sight and hearing.

In the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach that develops from the Daruma-san ga koronda chance where a desert background is displayed, as shown in FIG. 29(G) (a state in which a miss is announced and the forest background is hidden and then the desert background is redisplayed), it is also possible to prevent the sound effects from being output. This can calm the player's disappointment when a miss is announced even though the game has developed from a desert background, which has a high probability of winning.

As mentioned above, a dedicated image may be displayed in FIG. 28(F) in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach that has developed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance where an ocean background is displayed (when a loss is announced and the forest background and two non-Oni characters are hidden). On the other hand, in FIG. 28(F) in the Daruma-san ga Koronda Final Battle Reach that has developed from the Daruma-san ga Koronda Chance where a desert background is displayed (when a loss is announced and the forest background and two non-Oni characters are hidden), the dedicated image may or may not be displayed.

In addition, in the Daruma-san ga koronda chance and the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach, the decorative symbols are displayed on the performance display device 1600, but during the special symbol variation in which the Daruma-san ga koronda chance and the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach are executed, all decorative symbols are constantly varying (i.e., all decorative symbols are not visible), and all decorative symbols may be stopped (i.e., all decorative symbols are visible) when the special symbol variation stops. This allows the player to not realize that a reach is in progress even if he or she sees the decorative symbols, but to realize that a reach is in progress because the Daruma-san ga koronda final battle reach is being executed, so that the player's attention can be focused on the Daruma-san ga koronda performance rather than the decorative symbols. Also, in the Daruma-san ga koronda performance, for example, even if a performance with a high failure rate is executed, all decorative symbols are varying until the special symbol variation ends, so that the player's sense of expectation can be suppressed from decreasing until all decorative symbols stop.

In FIG. 30(C) of the chance game of Daruma-san ga koronda, the two non-demon characters 1604 are hidden, but when the ocean background is displayed, the player can recognize that the probability of winning is low, and there is no need to make the player feel tense by not making the player aware of how far the non-demon characters 1604 have progressed, so the two non-demon characters 1604 may not be hidden. On the other hand, in the chance game of Daruma-san ga koronda, where the desert background is displayed, the player can recognize from the desert background that it is certain that the game will develop into the final battle reach of Daruma-san ga koronda, so it is desirable to make the two non-demon characters 1604 hidden in FIG. 30(C) in order to make the player feel tense by not making the player aware of how far the non-demon characters 1604 have progressed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly when the two non-demon characters 1604 are not hidden, and makes it possible to make the player feel tense when they are hidden.

[5. Ekiden Performance]
In this chapter, the relay performance will be explained. The pachinko machine 1 in this chapter has a counter function (hereinafter, this counter function is also called the relay counter) that counts the total number of game balls B paid out. Specifically, for example, the relay counter counts the total number of game balls B paid out since the last time the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the count value of the relay counter is reset (i.e., becomes zero) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, or when the power is turned off and then turned on again.

In addition, the relay counter may count the difference in the number of game balls B since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on (total number of game balls B paid out - total number of game balls B fired) instead of the total number of game balls B paid out since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on (for example, the total number of game balls B fired can also be determined by the total number of game balls B that entered the various winning holes (excluding the out hole) - the total number of game balls B detected by the out hole sensor 3053), or it may count MY since the pachinko machine 1 was last powered on (the value with the smallest difference in the number of game balls since the last powered on is set as the base point (count value is zero), and the difference between that and the value with the largest difference in the number of game balls).

The count value of the relay counter is stored, for example, in the RAM of the main control board 1310. Also, for example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may calculate and update the count value of the relay counter based on the number of game balls B detected by sensors installed at the various winning and outlets, or may calculate and update the count value of the relay counter based on the number of game balls B paid out indicated by a command received from the payout control board 63 and the number of game balls B detected by a sensor installed at the outlet. The main control MPU sends a command indicating the counter value of the relay counter to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 executes the relay performance based on the count value of the relay counter indicated by the received command.

In a relay race performance, the performance display device 1600 displays a display of a runner moving toward a destination according to the count value of a relay race counter. For example, in a relay race performance, a meter is displayed, and the runner is displayed along the meter. For example, a relay race consists of sections 1 to 10, and each time the count value of the relay race counter increases by 1000, the relay race section progresses.

Specifically, for example, when the count value of the relay counter is between 0 and 1000, a relay performance in which the runner in the first section is running is performed, and when the count value of the relay counter is between 1001 and 2000, a relay performance in which the runner in the second section is running is performed. When the relay counter value reaches 10001, the color of the meter changes and the same relay performance is repeated. In other words, when the relay counter count value is between 10001 and 11000, a relay performance in which the runner in the first section is running is performed (however, the color of the meter is different). In this way, the color of the meter changes every time the relay counter value increases by 10000. The relay performance can be executed simultaneously with other performances (such as performances during fluctuation, non-fluctuation, and performances during jackpot play).

Figure 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a relay performance. Figure 31 (A) shows the state when the relay performance has started. In Figure 31 (A), a display is displayed of a first section runner 1621 wearing a sash 1632 running on a meter 1631. As the count value of the relay counter increases, the first section runner 1621 moves to the left of the meter 1631, and when the count value reaches 2001, the sash 1632 is passed to the second section runner, and the display of the meter 1631 changes to a display corresponding to the second section.

When the count value of the relay counter becomes negative, the runner 1621 of the first section may be positioned to the rightmost side of the meter 1631, or the relay performance may not be displayed (i.e., the runner, meter 1631, and sash 1632 may not be displayed). When the relay counter counts the above-mentioned MY, the value with the smallest difference in balls is used as the base point (zero), so the relay counter value never becomes negative.

Figure 31 (B) shows the state where the relay station performance included in the relay performance has started. The relay station performance starts when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value that is a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, a value that is 100 shots less). In Figure 31 (B), the count value of the relay counter reaches 3900, and the relay station performance has started, which indicates whether or not the sash 1632 will be passed from the runner 1624 of the fourth section to the runner 1625 of the fifth section.

In FIG. 31(B), a runner 1624 in the fourth section is about to remove his sash 1632 and pass it to a runner 1625 in the fifth section. In FIG. 31(B), the valid operation period (e.g., 10 seconds) of the pressing operation unit 303 has begun, and a button image 1633 prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 303 and a gauge 1634 indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed.

In addition, in the relay station performance, a display showing the remaining count value of the relay counter until the count value corresponding to the next section is reached (for example, the remaining count value itself or an approximate remaining count value, etc.) may be displayed as a premonition. This allows the player to recognize the remaining count value.

When a premonition display is displayed while another performance is being executed simultaneously with the Ekiden performance, the light emission performance of the lamps in the other performance being executed simultaneously with the Ekiden performance is stopped and the lamps are illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the premonition display, but the display on the performance display device 1600 in the other performance is not stopped. However, the light emission performance associated with the premonition display may be performed using only lamps provided in a specified area (e.g., the door frame or main body frame), in which case the light emission performance using lamps provided in an area other than the specified area (e.g., the game board 5) executed in the other performance may be continued or stopped.

Also, a sound may be output to accompany the premonition display (a sound indicating the remaining count value of the ekiden counter until the count value corresponding to the next section is reached). When a premonition display is displayed while another performance is being performed simultaneously with the ekiden performance, it is desirable that the sound associated with the premonition display be output at a louder volume than the sound associated with the other performance being performed simultaneously with the ekiden performance (the volume of the other performance may be suppressed or set to zero (cancelled), or the volume of the other performance may remain the same and the sound associated with the premonition display may be output at a louder volume).

In addition, when another effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the premonition display, if the display areas of the premonition display and the other effect overlap, the display priority of the premonition display is higher than the display priority of the other effect. This allows the player's attention to be drawn to the premonition display without impeding the progress of the other effect, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

The warning display may be erased when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display, or when the value of the relay counter falls below the count value corresponding to the next section by a predetermined number or more (e.g., 200), or when the value of the relay counter reaches the count value corresponding to the next section, as described below.

Figure 31 (C) shows a state in Figure 31 (B) where the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, or where the effective operation period has ended without the pressing operation unit 303 being operated. Also, in Figure 31 (C), the count value of the relay counter has not yet reached the value (4001) corresponding to the runner 1625 of the fifth section. In Figure 31 (C), a cut-in 1635 is displayed as a post-operation performance, indicating the likelihood that the count value of the relay counter will reach the value corresponding to the runner 1625 of the fifth section.

For example, when the relay station performance starts, the display mode of the cut-in 1635 is selected from multiple display modes based on whether there is a jackpot fluctuation in either the ongoing fluctuation or the pending fluctuation.

For example, when the relay station performance starts, if there is a jackpot fluctuation in either the running fluctuation or the pending fluctuation, or if a jackpot game is in progress, the cut-in 1635 of the display mode suggesting a breakthrough (for example, a cut-in 1635 of a predetermined color (for example, green) displaying the message "Maybe we'll break through!" as shown in FIG. 31(C)) is selected at a high rate, and the cut-in 1635 of the display mode suggesting no breakthrough (a cut-in 1635 of a predetermined color (for example, white) displaying the message "Maybe we won't be able to break through...") is selected at a low rate. On the other hand, when the relay station performance starts, if there is no jackpot fluctuation in either the running fluctuation or the pending fluctuation, or if a jackpot game is not in progress, the cut-in 1635 of the display mode suggesting a breakthrough is selected at a low rate, and the cut-in 1635 of the display mode suggesting no breakthrough is selected at a high rate. The relay station performance can suggest to the player whether or not the player will receive the bonus of the payout of game balls B, which can increase the player's interest.

In FIG. 31(D), the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (4001) corresponding to the 5th section, and the section breakthrough effect is being performed. In FIG. 31(D), the runner 1624 of the 4th section is erased, and the runner 1625 of the 5th section is wearing a sash 1632. Also in FIG. 31(D), a display is displayed ("Breakthrough!! Start of Section 5!!") suggesting that the count value of the relay counter has reached a value (4001) corresponding to the 5th section. After this, the relay station effect ends, the meter 1631 changes to one corresponding to the runner 1625 of the 5th section (meter 1631 going from section 5 to section 6), and the runner 1625 of the 5th section moves to a position on the changed meter 1631 corresponding to the count value of the relay counter.

If a section breakthrough effect starts while another effect is being executed, the light emission effect of the lamps due to the other effect may be stopped and the lamps may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the section breakthrough effect. The light emission effect associated with the section breakthrough effect may be performed using only lamps provided in a specified area (e.g., the door frame or main body frame), in which case the light emission effect using lamps provided in an area (e.g., the game board 5) different from the specified area executed in the other effect may be continued or stopped.

Also, a sound associated with the section breakthrough effect (a sound indicating that the count value of the relay counter has reached the count value corresponding to the next section) may be output. If a section breakthrough effect is executed while another effect is being executed, it is desirable that the sound associated with the section breakthrough effect be output at a louder volume than the sound associated with the other effect being executed simultaneously with the relay effect (the volume of the other effect may be suppressed or set to zero (cancelled), or the volume of the other effect may remain the same and the sound associated with the section breakthrough effect may be output at a louder volume).

The cut-in 1635 in FIG. 31(C) may be erased, for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed. The cut-in 1635 in FIG. 31(C) may remain displayed, for example, until a transition to FIG. 31(D) occurs (that is, until the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section). However, even in this case, for example, if the count value of the relay counter falls below a predetermined number (e.g., 100) below the value at which the relay station performance is executed (3900 in the example of FIG. 31(B)), it is desirable to erase the cut-in 1635 in order to avoid giving the player too much hope.

The relay performance may be performed at all times, such as during fluctuation (when a reach performance is being performed and when a reach performance is not being performed), during non-fluctuation, during a jackpot game, and during a non-jackpot game. By having the relay performance performed at all times, the player can always recognize the approximate value of the relay counter, and can estimate the number of balls to be paid from the display by the performance display device 1600.

On the other hand, for example, the effect of FIG. 31(A) may be omitted, and only the effects of FIG. 31(B) to FIG. 31(D) may be executed. In other words, the relay effect may start (from the relay station effect) when the relay counter value reaches a value that is a predetermined number less than the value at which the next section is reached (3900 in the example of FIG. 31(B)), and the relay effect may end once the section breakthrough effect ends. In this case, when the cut-in 1635 is erased, the relay effect may also end at the same time. In this way, by executing the relay effect from the relay station effect, the relay station effect and the cut-in 1635 also function as a notice effect that the section breakthrough effect will start, and the player can be given a sense of expectation that the relay counter value will reach a predetermined value. In addition, the player can know the value of the relay counter only when it is about to reach a round number of balls, and can concentrate on effects other than the relay effect at other times.

For example, if the relay station performance starts during a jackpot game, or if a large number of game balls B enter the various winning holes after the relay station performance starts, the value of the relay counter may reach a value corresponding to the next section (4001 in the example of FIG. 31(B)) during the effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 in FIG. 31(B) (i.e., before the cut-in 1635 is displayed).

The first or second valid operation period is selected as the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in FIG. 31 (B). When the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the first valid operation period, the first valid operation period is forcibly ended (even if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated). Even if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the second valid operation period, the second valid operation period does not end and continues. In addition, in the post-operation performance based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 being performed during the second valid period, it is preferable to make a special cut-in (for example, a rainbow pattern) that cannot appear during the first valid period appear.

Whether the first or second valid operation period occurs is determined, for example, according to a predetermined ratio, but since the section breakthrough effect is a more important effect than the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, it is desirable that the first valid operation period occurs more frequently than the second valid operation period.

For example, the second valid operation period may be set to occur only during a jackpot game. If the second valid operation period occurs only during a jackpot game, the player can notice that the currently occurring valid operation period is the second valid operation period by the opening of the large prize winning opening 2005, etc., and since the second valid operation period is not interrupted even when the value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section, the cut-in display makes it easier for such a player to recognize how much payout remains.

In addition, if the second operation valid period is configured to occur only during a jackpot game, not only will the frequency with which the second operation valid period occurs be reduced, but the player will be able to feel a sense of rarity in the special cut-in that can only be displayed when the second operation valid period occurs. Furthermore, since the second operation valid period is not interrupted even when the value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section, the player will be able to easily see the special cut-in, which will increase the player's interest.

Note that when the effective operation period in FIG. 31(B) occurs (for example, at the start of the relay station performance), it has already been determined whether or not the effective operation period will end when the relay counter value reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the effective operation period (i.e., whether the first effective operation period or the second effective operation period is occurring).

By generating a first valid operation period and a second valid operation period as the valid operation period, when the relay counter value is reached during the valid operation period, the valid operation period may suddenly end and a section breakthrough effect may appear, giving the player a sense of surprise, or the valid operation period may continue, allowing the player to enjoy operating the pressing operation unit 303, thereby catering to the preferences of various players.

When the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the first valid operation period, the first valid operation period ends, and the presentation of FIG. 31(B) transitions to the presentation of FIG. 31(D) (without passing through the presentation of FIG. 31(C), i.e., without displaying cut-in 1635 as a post-operation presentation). In other words, in this case, the operation presentation of the pressing operation unit 303 ends. However, if the value of the relay counter does not reach a value corresponding to the next section during the first valid operation period and the first valid operation period ends, cut-in 1635 is displayed as a post-operation presentation, as described above.

On the other hand, even if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the second valid operation period, the second valid operation period continues (i.e., in this case, the operation effect of the pressing operation unit 303 continues), and if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the second valid operation period, or if the second valid operation period ends without the pressing operation unit 303 being operated during the second valid operation period, a cut-in 1635 is displayed as the post-operation effect in FIG. 31(C), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, for example, a transition is made to FIG. 31(D). In other words, when the second valid operation period occurs, cut-in 1635 is displayed as the post-operation effect regardless of whether the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or not and the value of the relay counter.

Note that even if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section during the second operation valid period, the second operation valid period continues, but the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 31 (D) is executed first at the point when the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, and if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the second operation valid period, or if the second operation valid period ends without the pressing operation unit 303 being operated during the second operation valid period, a cut-in 1635 is displayed as a post-operation effect, and, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed, the cut-in 1635 may be erased. At this time, if the display of cut-in 1635 starts while the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 31(D) is being displayed, it is possible for the section breakthrough effect and cut-in 1635 to be displayed simultaneously, but since the section breakthrough effect is an effect that presents important information to the player, it is desirable that in a display area where the section breakthrough effect and cut-in 1635 are displayed overlapping, the display priority of the section breakthrough effect is higher than the display priority of cut-in 1635 (in other words, it is desirable that the section breakthrough effect is displayed so that at least a portion of the operation effect and cut-in during the second operation effective period are difficult to see).

Note that, for example, if during the first operation valid period, the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, a display indicating that the count value of the relay counter in FIG. 31 (D) has reached a value corresponding to the 5th section (4001) ("Breakthrough!! Start of 5th section!!" in FIG. 31 (D)) is displayed in a first manner, and if during the second operation valid period, the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the display in FIG. 31 (D) may be displayed in a second manner, and so on, and the display manner of the display may be different. Also, for example, if the value of the relay counter in the second operation valid period reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the display manner of the display may be changed such that the display in FIG. 31 (D) is displayed in the second manner and then in the first manner. Since the display of the first mode is displayed after the display of the second mode, the display of the second mode is a warning display announcing the start of the fifth section, such as "Breakthrough!! Section 5 is about to start! Wait a moment!", and the display of the first mode may be a display indicating that Section 5 has already started, such as "Breakthrough!! Section 5 starts!!" in FIG. 31 (D).

When the display is displayed in the first mode, it is advisable to stop the display of other effects that were being executed simultaneously with the relay performance in order to draw the player's attention to the display, but when the display is displayed in the second mode, it is not necessary to stop the display of the other effects, even though the display priority is higher than the display of the other effects.

In addition, when the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 detects a press during the first operation valid period, the first operation valid period may always end and the cut-in 1635 may be displayed, or the first operation valid period may not necessarily end (i.e., the cut-in 1635 may not be displayed). During the first operation valid period that does not necessarily end when the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 detects a press, for example, the first operation valid period ends and the cut-in 1635 is displayed at a predetermined rate when the pressing detection sensor 381 detects a press. As a result, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the first operation valid period, the cut-in 1635 is not necessarily displayed, so the player can operate the pressing operation unit 303 with a sense of tension. However, when the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a pressure during the first valid operation period, even if the first valid operation period has not ended, it is desirable to execute an in-operation presentation indicating that the pressure has been detected, so as to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the pressure operation unit 303 is broken.

As for the second operation valid period, when the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 detects a press, the second operation valid period may always end and the cut-in 1635 may be displayed, or the second operation valid period may not necessarily end (i.e., the cut-in 1635 may not be displayed), or the second operation valid period may always end and the cut-in 1635 may be displayed. For example, in a case where the second operation valid period is configured to occur only during a jackpot game, when the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 detects a press during the second operation valid period, the second operation valid period may always end and the cut-in 1635 may be displayed. This increases the frequency with which a cut-in is displayed as a post-operation effect (especially when the second operation valid period occurs, a special cut-in may also be displayed), and the synergistic effect with the effect during the jackpot game can give the player a stronger sense of elation.

When the pressure detection sensor 381 of the pressure operation unit 303 detects a pressure, the presentation in the case where the second valid operation period ends and the cut-in 1635 is displayed, and the presentation in the case where the second valid operation period does not necessarily end (i.e., the cut-in 1635 is not displayed), are the same as those in the first valid operation period.

In the example of FIG. 31(B), the pressing operation unit 303 is prompted to be pressed (so-called single press), but when the first operation valid period occurs, one operation mode is selected from a plurality of operation modes (e.g., single press, continuous press, and long press), and the player may be prompted to perform the operation in the selected operation mode. However, when the second operation valid period occurs, it is desirable that some of the operation modes (e.g., continuous press and long press) are not selected (or the rate at which the partial operation mode is selected is lower than when the first operation valid period occurs). For example, since it takes time to perform an operation mode such as continuous press or long press, the counter value of the relay counter is likely to reach a value corresponding to the next section while the player is performing the continuous press or long press during the first operation valid period (i.e., the first effective period ends more frequently before the operation ends), and the player is more likely to feel a sense of surprise.

The lengths of the first and second operation valid periods may be the same, or the second operation valid period may be longer or shorter than the first operation valid period. The lengths of the first and/or second operation valid periods may be selectable from a plurality of lengths according to a predetermined distribution, in which case the expected value (or average) of the length of the first operation valid period and the expected value (or average) of the length of the second operation valid period may be the same, or the expected value (or average) of the length of the second operation valid period may be greater or smaller than the expected value (or average) of the length of the first operation valid period. In addition, when the lengths of the first and/or second operation valid periods are selectable from a plurality of lengths, the number of options for the length of the first operation valid period may be greater than the number of options for the length of the second operation valid period.

In addition, during the first and second valid operation periods, it is desirable that the length of the period when a predetermined operation mode (e.g., repeated taps and long presses) among the above-mentioned multiple operation modes is prompted is longer than the length of the period when an operation mode (e.g., single press) different from the predetermined total mode is prompted. Therefore, as described above, for example, when one operation mode is selected from single presses, repeated taps, and long presses when the first valid operation period occurs, and when repeated taps and long presses are not selected when the second valid operation period occurs, the expected value (or average) of the length of the first valid operation period is greater than the expected value (or average) of the length of the second valid operation period.

In this way, by making the first and second valid operation periods different in length or expected value, or by making the number of period options different, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity regarding the length of the valid period, and the player can enjoy guessing whether the first or second valid operation period has occurred by observing the length of the valid period. For example, if the first valid operation period is selected from 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 10 seconds, and the second valid operation period is only 5 seconds, then if the length of the valid operation period measured by the player is 3 seconds, it is determined that the first valid operation period has occurred.

The valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 may start simultaneously with the start of the relay station performance, or the valid operation period may start a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the relay station performance starts. If the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303 starts a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the relay station performance starts, the count value of the relay counter may reach a count value corresponding to the next section between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the valid operation period of the press operation unit 303.

If the count value of the relay counter reaches a count value corresponding to the next section between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the first effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 31(D) is executed without generating the first effective operation period (i.e., without displaying the button image 1633 and the gauge 1634, and without performing the performance of FIG. 31(C)). On the other hand, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a count value corresponding to the next section between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the second effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, the second effective operation period is generated, and the display of the button image 1633 and the gauge 1634, the performance of FIG. 31(C), and the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 31(D) are executed.

In addition, when the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 starts after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the relay station performance, a button precursor display such as a predetermined effect may be displayed at a predetermined rate between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303. For example, when the predetermined effect is displayed between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303, the button image 1633 is displayed at the center of the effect after the display of the effect starts (and before the start of the operation effective period). Note that, when the second operation effective period is selected, it is preferable that the rate at which the button precursor display is displayed between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the second operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 is higher than the rate at which the button precursor display is displayed between the start of the relay station performance and the start of the first operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 when the first operation effective period is selected.

When the first valid operation period occurs, a presentation pattern in which the button image 1633 and the gauge 1634 are displayed and a presentation pattern in which they are not displayed in FIG. 31(B) may be executed, but when the second valid operation period occurs, it is desirable to execute only the presentation pattern in which the button image 1633 and the gauge 1634 are displayed in FIG. 31(B). If the first valid operation period ends frequently due to the count value of the relay counter when the player thinks that the valid operation period has not ended and tries to operate the pressing operation unit 303, this increases the opportunities for the player to feel uncomfortable, so when the first valid operation period occurs, it is advisable to provide a presentation pattern in which the button image 1633 and the gauge 1634 are not displayed in this way.

In addition, for example, when the second operation effective period occurs, a bonus may be awarded at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, a win resulting in about 200 balls may be awarded as the bonus. In other words, when the bonus is awarded, the count value of the relay counter will almost certainly increase to the count value (4001) corresponding to the 5th section. In this case, a display indicating that a bonus will be awarded may be displayed at a predetermined rate as a post-operation performance in FIG. 31(C). However, if the count value of the relay counter reaches the count value (4001) corresponding to the 5th section (or reaches a value close to the count value (e.g., 3990) corresponding to the 5th section) during the second operation effective period, it is highly likely that the section can be broken through without the bonus being awarded, so the display indicating that the bonus will be awarded may not be displayed and the bonus may be stopped from being awarded, or the display indicating that the bonus will be awarded may be displayed but the bonus may be stopped from being awarded.

For example, the condition for starting the relay station performance in which the second operation valid period is selected may further include game ball B passing through a specified area (e.g., gate unit 2003). For example, in FIG. 31, if the count value of the relay counter reaches 3900 but game ball B has not passed through the specified area, the relay station performance in which the second operation valid period occurs does not start, but when game ball B subsequently passes through the specified area and a specified time has passed, the relay station performance starts and the second operation valid period occurs.

At this time, if the count value of the relay counter reaches 4001 but the game ball B has not passed through the specified area, the display ("Breakthrough!! Start of the 5th section!!") suggesting that the count value of the relay counter in FIG. 31(D) above has reached the value (4001) corresponding to the 5th section is displayed in the second mode, and then when the game ball B passes through the specified area and a specified time has elapsed, the relay station performance starts, and the display changes to the first display mode through the performances of FIG. 31(B) and FIG. 31(C). In other words, when the relay station performance in which the second operation effective period is selected is selected, the display is not displayed in the first mode until the game ball B passes through the specified area. On the other hand, the condition for starting the relay station performance in which the first operation effective period is selected does not include the game ball B passing through the specified area. In other words, when the relay station performance in which the second operation effective period is selected is selected, the display can be displayed in the first mode without the game ball B passing through the specified area.

For example, if, after the relay station performance starts, the relay counter value falls below the count value corresponding to the next section by more than a predetermined number without reaching the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, if the relay station counter count value falls below 3,800 after the relay station performance from section 4 to section 5 starts), the relay station performance ends, section 5 runner 1625 is erased, and section 4 runner 1624 wearing sash 1632 is returned to the position on meter 1631 corresponding to the relay counter count value.

Also, for example, if the count value of the relay counter has decreased to a value corresponding to the upper limit of the previous section, or if it has fallen below the value corresponding to the upper limit of the previous section by a predetermined number (for example, if the count value of the relay counter exceeds 4001 and the sash 1632 is passed to the runner 1625 of the 5th section, but the count value subsequently falls below 4000 or 3800), the relay performance may be returned to the performance corresponding to the previous section, or the runner of the current section may be positioned at the right end of the meter (until the count value of the relay counter exceeds the value corresponding to the lower limit of the original section) without returning to the performance corresponding to the previous section. For example, when the relay performance returns from the performance corresponding to the 5th section to the performance corresponding to the 4th section, if the count value of the relay counter reaches 3900 again, the relay station performance from the 4th section to the 5th section is executed again, and if the count value returns to 4001 again, the section breakthrough performance is executed again. In other words, the relay station performance corresponding to the same count value can be executed multiple times, and the section breakthrough performance corresponding to the same count value can be executed multiple times.

Figure 32 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a relay performance. In the example of Figure 32, the relay performance is always performed during fluctuation (when a reach performance is being performed and when a reach performance is not being performed), during non-fluctuation, during jackpot play, and during non-jackpot play. Also, in the relay performance of Figure 32, unless otherwise specified below, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is always in an effective period, and an image prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is always displayed (there are also some periods when the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not in an effective period, and some periods when an image prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not displayed, but details will be described later).

Figure 32 (A1) shows the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303, and is similar to Figure 31 (A) except that a white single press image 1636 is displayed to encourage a single press of the pressing operation unit 303. In Figure 32 (A1), when the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 detects a press, an effect is displayed around the runner 1621, and the effect is erased after a predetermined time has passed.

Fig. 32 (A2) shows the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303, and is similar to Fig. 31 (A) except that a red long press image 1637 is displayed to encourage a long press of the pressing operation unit 303. In Fig. 32 (A2), when the pressing detection sensor 381 of the pressing operation unit 303 detects a long press (e.g., a continuous press for one second or more), an effect is displayed around the runner 1621, and the effect is erased when a predetermined time has passed since the long press was stopped.

The state where a single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32(A1) and the state where a long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32(A2) are switched according to a predetermined trigger (for example, every time a predetermined time has elapsed, or according to a change in the game state). Also, the relay performance may start from FIG. 32(A1) or from FIG. 32(A2).

When the state changes from one in which a single press image 1636 such as in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed to one in which a long press image 1637 such as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, it is preferable to output from the speaker 354 a sound that prompts the user to perform the operation indicated by the long press image 1637. However, when the state changes from one in which a long press image 1637 such as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed to one in which a single press image 1636 such as in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, it is preferable not to output from the speaker 354 a sound that prompts the user to perform the operation indicated by the single press image 1636.

When a single press image 1636 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, a sound (e.g., "If you press the button once, the runner's motivation will increase!") that encourages a single press of the pressing operation unit 303 (prompting the operation indicated by the single press image 1636) is output from the speaker 354, and when a long press image 1637 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, a sound (e.g., "If you press the button long, the runner's motivation will increase!") that encourages a long press of the pressing operation unit 303 is output from the speaker 354. However, when a long press image 1637 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, the sound that encourages a long press of the pressing operation unit 303 may not be output, or the sound may be output in some cases and not in other cases (for example, a performance in which the sound is output and a performance in which the sound is not output are selected according to a predetermined allocation).

When a single press image 1636 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, a predetermined SE (Sound Effect) corresponding to the sound may be output from the speaker 354 together with a sound that prompts the player to press the press operation unit 303 (prompting the operation indicated by the single press image 1636), and the sound and the SE can ensure that the player presses the press operation unit 303 once. Similarly, when a long press image 1637 such as that shown in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, a predetermined SE (Sound Effect) corresponding to the sound may be output from the speaker 354 together with a sound that prompts the player to press the press operation unit 303 for a long time (prompting the operation indicated by the long press image 1637), and the sound and the SE can ensure that the player presses the press operation unit 303 for a long time.

However, it is desirable that the SE output together with the sound that prompts the player to press the pressing operation unit 303 once (prompting the operation indicated by the single press image 1636) is different from the SE output together with the sound that prompts the player to press and hold the pressing operation unit 303 (prompting the operation indicated by the long press image 1637). In this way, by outputting different SEs, the player can more reliably recognize whether to press the pressing operation unit 303 once or to press and hold it once. In addition, since a long press requires a longer operation time than a single press, in order to ensure that the player performs the long press operation of the pressing operation unit 303, for example, it is desirable that the output time of the SE output together with the sound that prompts the player to press the pressing operation unit 303 once (prompting the operation indicated by the single press image 1636) is longer than the output time of the SE output together with the sound that prompts the player to press and hold the pressing operation unit 303 (prompting the operation indicated by the long press image 1637).

In addition, the BGM output from the speaker 354 may be different between the state in which the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1) and the state in which the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2), or some of the BGM may be the same. For example, the BGM output when the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1) is selected from a plurality of BGMs including the first BGM and the second BGM according to a predetermined allocation, and the BGM output when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2) is selected from a plurality of BGMs not including the first BGM (which may or may not include the second BGM) according to the allocation.

In addition, it is desirable not to display a display indicating the BGM being output (e.g., the title of the BGM) when a single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1), and to display a display indicating the BGM being output when a long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2).

The above-mentioned audio and background music allow the player to recognize the operation mode that he or she is being prompted to perform not only through the display on the performance display device 1600, but also through sound.

Note that when a predetermined time has elapsed since the state has been switched to displaying the single press image 1636 as shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the single press image 1636 may be erased. Similarly, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the state has been switched to displaying the long press image 1637 as shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the long press image 1637 may be erased.

In addition, when the lamp is emitting light in a predetermined manner (predetermined light emission pattern or predetermined color) in a state where a single press image 1636 such as FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, the state may change to a state where a long press image 1637 such as FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed. At this time, in order to attract the player's attention to the long press image 1637, it is preferable that the lamp stops emitting light in the predetermined manner before the change and then the change is made. On the other hand, when the state changes from a state where a long press image 1637 such as FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed to a state where a single press image 1636 such as FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, the lamp does not emit light in the predetermined manner, and even after the state changes to a state where a long press image 1637 such as FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, the lamp does not emit light in the predetermined manner until the long press image 1637 is erased.

In addition, when switching between a state in which a single press image 1636 as in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed and a state in which a long press image 1637 as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, the background display on the performance display device 1600 may change in accordance with the switching, so that the player can more easily recognize that the operation mode being promoted has changed. In this case, when switching from a state in which a long press image 1637 as in FIG. 32 (A2) and the second background are displayed to a state in which a single press image 1636 as in FIG. 32 (A1) and the first background are displayed, it is preferable to hide the long press image 1637 and the second background, display a predetermined background for a predetermined period of time, and then display the single press image 1636 and the first background.

When switching from a state in which a long press image 1637 such as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed to a state in which a single press image 1636 such as in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed, one or more display effects may be displayed to indicate the jackpot expectancy of the ongoing change and/or the pending change. Although a single press operation is easier than a long press operation, the display effects make it less likely for the player to become bored with the game.

On the other hand, when switching from a state in which a single press image 1636 as in FIG. 32 (A1) is displayed to a state in which a long press image 1637 as in FIG. 32 (A2) is displayed, one or more display effects indicating the probability of a jackpot for the ongoing variation and/or the pending variation may not be displayed until a predetermined time has passed since the switching. A long press operation takes time, and if the display effect is displayed immediately after the switching, there is a risk that the player will be distracted by the display effect and stop the long press operation. Therefore, the display effect is not displayed until a predetermined time has passed since the switching.

The effect display may be displayed at a predetermined rate when the press detection sensor 381 of the press operation unit 303 detects a single press while the single press image 1636 is displayed, or when the press detection sensor 381 of the press operation unit 303 detects a long press while the long press image 1637 is displayed.

The single press image 1636 and the long press image 1637 may be displayed in a display mode selected from a plurality of display modes. For example, there may be a timing when the single press image 1636 in a plurality of display modes is displayed simultaneously, or there may be a timing when the long press image 1637 in the plurality of display modes is displayed simultaneously. For example, when the single press image 1636 in the first mode is displayed, if a detection based on an erroneous operation is performed (for example, a long press of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected), the single press image 1636 in the second mode may be additionally displayed, or when the long press image 1637 in the first mode is displayed, if a detection based on an erroneous operation is performed (for example, a single press of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected), the long press image 1637 in the second mode may be additionally displayed.

Fig. 32(B1) shows a state in which the relay station performance has started when the single-push image 1636 is displayed. In other words, Fig. 32(B1) shows a state in which the count value of the relay counter has reached a value that is a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, a value that is 100 shots less) when the single-push image 1636 is displayed. In Fig. 32(B1), as in Fig. 31(B), the count value of the relay counter has reached 1900, and the relay station performance indicating whether or not the sash 1632 will be passed from the runner 1621 of the first section to the runner 1622 of the second section has started. Also, Fig. 32(B1) differs from Fig. 31(B) in that the single-push image 1636 is displayed instead of the button image 1633 and the gauge 1634. Furthermore, when a single press of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected in the state shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the above-mentioned effect is displayed around the runner 1621 (there is no transition to the display of the cut-in 1635 in FIG. 31 (C) or the section breakthrough effect in FIG. 32 (D)).

Fig. 32 (B2) shows a state in which the relay station performance has started when the long press image 1637 is displayed. In other words, Fig. 32 (B2) shows a state in which the count value of the relay counter has reached a value that is a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, a value that is 100 shots less) when the long press image 1637 is displayed. In Fig. 32 (B2), as in Fig. 31 (B), the count value of the relay counter has reached 1900, and the relay station performance indicating whether or not the sash 1632 will be passed from the runner 1621 of the first section to the runner 1622 of the second section has started. Also, Fig. 32 (B1) differs from Fig. 31 (B) in that the long press image 1637 is displayed instead of the button image 1633 and the gauge 1634. Furthermore, when a long press on the pressing operation unit 303 is detected in the state shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the above-mentioned effect is displayed around the runner 1621 (there is no transition to the display of the cut-in 1635 in FIG. 31 (C) or the section breakthrough effect in FIG. 32 (D)).

When the state is as shown in FIG. 32(B1), if the above-mentioned predetermined trigger is satisfied, the state transitions to FIG. 32(B2), and when the state is as shown in FIG. 32(B2), if the above-mentioned predetermined trigger is satisfied, the state transitions to FIG. 32(B1). In this way, the operation mode prompted to the player is changed even when the relay station performance is being performed, so that the player does not get bored of operating the pressing operation unit 303.

In the state of FIG. 32(B1) (i.e., when the relay station performance in which the single press image 1636 is displayed is being executed), when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (2001) corresponding to the next section, the performance transitions to the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 32(C1). In the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 32(C1), neither the single press image 1636 nor the long press image 1637 is displayed (i.e., the image prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is erased), and a message 1638 is displayed indicating that the count value has reached the next section.

32(B2) (i.e., when the relay station performance in which the long press image 1637 is displayed is being executed), when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (2001) corresponding to the next section, the performance transitions to the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 32(C2). In the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 32(C2), the long press image 1637 continues to be displayed, and a message 1639 (different from message 1638) is displayed, indicating that the count value has reached the next section. Also, in FIG. 32(C2), the sound of the part of message 1639 that is different from message 1638 ("Breakthrough next one too!?") is output from speaker 354. Note that in FIG. 32(C2), it is preferable that the part of message 1639 that is common to message 1638 ("Breakthrough!!") is not displayed in a display area other than that of message 1639. Note that after the transition to FIG. 32(C2), it is preferable not to transition to a performance in which the single press image 1636 is displayed.

When the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 32 (C1) and FIG. 32 (C2) is executed, a dedicated sound for the section breakthrough performance may be output from speaker 354, but it is desirable that the output time of this dedicated sound be within a predetermined range (for example, 10 seconds or more and 30 seconds or less). Also, when the section breakthrough performance of FIG. 32 (C1) and FIG. 32 (C2) is executed, a designated lamp may be illuminated in a dedicated light-emitting mode for the section breakthrough performance. It is desirable that the output time of the dedicated sound is set so that the output of the dedicated sound for the section breakthrough performance ends before the display of the section breakthrough performance in FIG. 32 (C1) and FIG. 32 (C2) and the illumination of the lamp in the dedicated light-emitting mode for the section breakthrough performance ends (i.e., the output of the dedicated sound ends when the display of the section breakthrough performance and the illumination of the lamp in the dedicated light-emitting mode continue). Unlike display effects and light emission effects, sound effects can be recognized by other players playing on gaming machines installed around the gaming machine in question, and since the output time of the dedicated sound is long, it will reduce the attention of the other players, so it is good to set the output time of the dedicated sound in this way to a short time.

Note that when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (2001) corresponding to the next section in the state of FIG. 32 (B2) (i.e., a state in which the relay station performance in which the long press image 1637 is displayed is being executed), for example, either FIG. 32 (C1) or FIG. 32 (C2) may be selected according to a predetermined allocation and a transition may occur.

The relay performance of FIG. 32 may start from the relay station performance of FIG. 32 (B1) or FIG. 32 (B2). In other words, the relay performance of FIG. 32 may start when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value that is a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the next section (for example, a value that is 100 shots less), and the performances of FIG. 32 (A1) and FIG. 32 (A2) may be omitted. By executing the relay performance from the relay station performance, the relay station performance also functions as a notice performance that the section breakthrough performance will start, and the player can be given a sense of expectation that the relay counter value will reach a predetermined value. In addition, the player can know the relay counter value only when it is likely to reach a round number of balls, and can concentrate on performances other than the relay performance at other times. In addition, if the performances of FIG. 32 (A1) and FIG. 32 (A2) are omitted, the relay performance may start from FIG. 32 (B1) or from FIG. 32 (B2).

As with the relay performance in FIG. 31, in relay station performance, a display showing the remaining count value of the relay counter until the count value corresponding to the next section is reached (for example, the remaining count value itself or an approximate remaining count value, etc.) may be displayed as a precursor display. Unless otherwise specified below, the timing of displaying and erasing the precursor display, the display priority of the precursor display, the sound accompanying the precursor display, and the lamp accompanying the precursor display are the same as those described in FIG. 31.

For example, if a warning display is erased a predetermined time after it is displayed, the count value of the relay counter may be a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the next section when the warning display is erased, but may not have reached the count value corresponding to the next section. In this case, the warning display may be displayed again a predetermined time after the warning display is erased. In other words, the warning display can be displayed multiple times.

In FIG. 32 (B1), when a precursor display is displayed while the single press image 1636 is displayed, a part or all of the precursor display is displayed in an area overlapping with the single press image 1636, but the display priority of the precursor display in the overlapping area may be higher or lower than the display priority of the single press image 1636. On the other hand, in FIG. 32 (B2), when a precursor display is displayed while the long press image 1637 is displayed, it is desirable that the display area of the precursor display and the display area of the long press image 1637 do not overlap.

In addition, even if the precursor display is displayed when the single press image 1636 is displayed in FIG. 32 (B1), or even if the precursor display is displayed when the long press image 1637 is displayed in FIG. 32 (B2), light is emitted (in a dedicated pattern) in association with the precursor display.

Note that the frequency with which the count value of the relay counter reaches the corresponding value of the next section in the state of FIG. 32 (B2) may be higher or lower than the frequency with which the count value of the relay counter reaches the corresponding value of the next section in the state of FIG. 32 (B1).

For example, when a pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 and a game ball B enters a first general winning port among the plurality of general winning ports 2001, a payout based on the ball is reflected in the count value of the relay counter but a sound corresponding to the ball is not output, and when a game ball B enters a second general winning port among the plurality of general winning ports 2001, a payout based on the ball is reflected in the count value of the relay counter and a sound corresponding to the ball can be output.

When the game ball B enters the second general winning opening while the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1), etc., the winning sound of the first mode is output. On the other hand, when the game ball B enters the second general winning opening while the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (B1), etc., the winning sound of the mode selected (for example, according to a predetermined allocation) from the first mode and the second mode (for example, the winning sound of the second mode is lower in volume and is output for a shorter time than the winning sound of the first mode) is output.

In addition, when the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1), and the game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the first mode is output, the output of the background music output from the speaker 354 is interrupted. On the other hand, when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (B1), and the game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the first mode is output, the background music output from the speaker 354 is interrupted, but when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (B1), and the game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the second mode is output, the background music output from the speaker 354 continues to be output. In this way, the player's attention can be drawn to the winning sound of the first mode.

Also, when the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1) and the sound encouraging the single press of the pressing operation unit 303 is output from the speaker 354, the output of the sound is interrupted when the game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the first mode is output. On the other hand, when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2) and the sound encouraging the long press of the pressing operation unit 303 is output from the speaker 354, the output of the sound is interrupted when the game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the first mode is output, but when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2) and the sound encouraging the long press of the pressing operation unit 303 is output from the speaker 354, the output of the sound is continued when the game ball B enters the second general winning opening and the winning sound of the second mode is output. By doing this, the player's attention can be drawn to the winning sound of the first mode.

For example, when the long press image 1637 is displayed in FIG. 32(B2), only if the game ball B passes through a specified area (e.g., gate portion 2003) may the game transition to the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 32(C1). In other words, when the long press image 1637 is displayed in FIG. 32(B2), if the game ball B does not pass through the specified area and the relay counter value reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the section breakthrough effect of FIG. 32(C2) (i.e., the section breakthrough effect in which the long press image 1637 continues to be displayed) should always be performed.

When the single press image 1636 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A1), if the press detection sensor 381 of the press operation unit 303 detects a long press (an operation different from the operation prompted by the single press image 1636), a sound prompting an operation of the operation mode indicated by the single press image 1636 (a single press on the press operation unit 303) is output from the speaker 354, and the single press image 1636 may be additionally displayed, or the display time of the single press image 1636 may be extended. Similarly, when the long press image 1637 is displayed as in FIG. 32 (A2), if the press detection sensor 381 of the press operation unit 303 detects a long press (an operation different from the operation prompted by the long press image 1637), a sound prompting an operation of the operation mode indicated by the long press image 1637 (a long press on the press operation unit 303) is output from the speaker 354, and the long press image 1637 may be additionally displayed, or the display time of the long press image 1637 may be extended.

Figures 33, 34, and 35 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of a relay performance. In the relay performances of Figures 33, 34, and 35, a rival performance is executed in which a rival 1640 participates in a relay race. For example, the pachinko machine 1 further includes a counter function that counts the payout of game balls B and is different from the relay counter (hereinafter, this counter function is also called a rival counter). Specifically, for example, the rival counter counts the total number of game balls B paid out as a result of game balls B entering a specified winning hole.

In other words, payouts of game ball B obtained when game ball B enters a winning port other than the specified winning port are not reflected in the count value of the rival counter. On the other hand, the relay counter also counts payouts of game ball B obtained when game ball B enters a winning port other than the specified winning port. In this way, there are payouts (wins) that are reflected in the relay counter but not reflected in the rival counter.

In addition, when the Ekiden Counter counts the difference in the number of balls or MY, the count value of the Ekiden Counter may be decremented (the Ekiden Counter also counts the decrease in the number of game balls B dispensed), but the Rival Counter counts the total number of game balls B paid out due to game balls B entering a designated winning port (in other words, the number of game balls B that entered the out port or the number of game balls B that entered the designated winning port is not decremented), so the Rival Counter count value is not decremented (except when it is reset to zero).

In this way, because the counting standards are different between the relay counter and the rival counter, any of the following situations may occur: the relay counter's count value is greater than the rival counter's count value (an example of the first situation); the relay counter's count value is equal to the rival counter's count value; the relay counter's count value is smaller than the rival counter's count value (an example of the second situation); the relay counter's count value overtakes the rival counter's count value; and the relay counter's count value is overtaken by the rival counter's count value. As a result, as will be described in detail later, in the rival performance, it is possible to execute a performance of overtaking and being overtaken, such as the rival 1640 being ahead of or overtaken by the runner of one's own team, and the rival 1640 being overtaken by or overtakes the runner of one's own team, thereby increasing the tension and interest of the player. In addition, the player can indirectly know the number of paid-out game balls B (whether it is above or below the count value of the rival counter) through the rival 1640 in the rival performance.

The rival counter may, for example, count the total number of game balls B paid out by balls entering a specific winning hole since the last time the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and the count value of the rival counter is reset (to zero) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. The rival counter may also, for example, count the total number of game balls B paid out by balls entering a specific winning hole since the start of a specific presentation (for example, a rival presentation), and in this case, when the next presentation to which the specific presentation has been transferred is being executed after the end of the specific presentation, the count value of the rival counter is reset (to zero). The rival counter may, for example, count the total number of game balls B paid out by balls entering a specific winning hole since the start of a specific game state, and in this case, when the game remains in a specific game state to which the game state has been transferred from the specific game state, the count value of the rival counter is reset (to zero).

The rival presentation will be explained below using an example in which the rival counter counts the total number of game balls B paid out by balls entering a specific winning hole since the power was last turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

The rival counter count value is stored, for example, in the RAM of the main control board 1310. Also, for example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may calculate and update the rival counter count value based on the number of game balls B detected by a sensor installed in a specified winning port, or may calculate and update the rival counter count value based on the number of payouts based on the entry of game balls B into a specified winning port indicated by a command received from the payout control board 63. The main control MPU sends a command indicating the counter value of the rival counter to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 executes the rival presentation described below based on the rival counter count value indicated by the received command.

In the rival performance executed during the relay performance, a display of the rival 1640 heading towards the destination according to the count value of the rival counter is displayed on the performance display device 1600. For example, in the rival performance, the rival 1640 is displayed along the meter 1631.

Specifically, for example, if the rival counter count value is 0-1000 when the rival performance is being executed, a performance is performed in which the rival 1640 is running the first section, and if the rival counter count value is 1001-2000 when the rival performance is being executed, a performance is performed in which the rival 1640 is running the second section. When either the relay counter count value or the rival counter count value reaches 10001, a performance is performed in which the runner on the team or the rival reaches the finish line.

In FIG. 33(A), the relay counter value corresponds to the second section, and the same presentation as in FIG. 31(A) is being performed, except that the team's runner 1622 in the second section is displayed, and the meter 1631 corresponds to the second section.

33(B1), 33(C1), 34(D1), and 34(E1) show a rival performance (i.e., a rival performance in which the rival 1640 may overtake the runner of the own team) that starts in a state where the runner of the own team (runner 1622, etc., shown in white in the figures) based on the count value of the relay counter is ahead of the rival 1640 (shown in black in the figures) that is displayed based on the count value of the rival counter, and FIG. 33(B2), 33(C2), 34(D2), and 34(E2) show a rival performance (i.e., a rival performance in which the runner of the own team may overtake the rival 1640) that starts in a state where the rival 1640 is ahead of the runner of the own team. Note that when the display of the rival 1640 starts as in FIG. 33(B1), not only the display of the rival 1640 itself but also a cut-in of the rival 1640 may be further displayed to make it easier for the player to recognize that the performance has progressed to a rival performance.

First, the rival presentation that starts when the runner on one's team is ahead of the rival 1640 will be described. Figure 33 (B1) shows the state when the rival presentation has started with the rival counter at a value (0 to 1000) corresponding to Section 1. In Figure 33 (B1), a display indicating that the rival presentation has started ("Rival Enters the Battle!!") is displayed, and the rival 1640 is displayed on the meter 1631 corresponding to Section 1. The rival presentation is executed, for example, in a specified game state.

When the rival performance starts, the relay performance progresses with the rival 1640 at the center (for example, the rival 1640 is always displayed, or a message about the rival 1640 is displayed, etc.). When the rival performance is being executed (or at any time in a relay performance in which the rival performance can be executed), a display showing the count value of the relay counter and/or the rival counter (which may be the count value itself or an approximate count value) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. For example, a display showing the count value of the relay counter is displayed under the runner of one's own team, and a display showing the count value of the rival counter is displayed under the rival 1640.

However, it is desirable that the display showing the count value of the ekiden counter be erased, for example, when the value of the ekiden counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10001 (the value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section)). On the other hand, it is desirable that the value showing the count value of the rival counter continue to be displayed even if the display showing the count value of the ekiden counter is erased.

Also, instead of or in addition to the display showing the count value of the relay counter, a display showing the remaining count value of the relay counter up to the predetermined value (which may be the remaining count value itself or an approximate value of the remaining count value) (i.e., if there is a winning of the target of the relay counter's count, the value in the display is subtracted, but if it is displayed as an approximate value, the value is not necessarily subtracted every time there is a winning (for example, if the remaining count value is displayed in units of 1000, the remaining count value is subtracted every time 1000 balls are reduced)) may be displayed. By configuring the display to show the remaining count value instead of the display showing the count value of the relay counter, the player cannot directly recognize the balls he has won, and the effect of increasing interest by suggesting the balls to be released by the rival performance (performance that allows the player to grasp the balls to be released) can be further enhanced. On the other hand, it is preferable that the remaining count value of the rival counter up to the predetermined value is not displayed (i.e., if there is a winning of the target of the rival counter's count, the value in the display showing the value of the rival counter is added). Note that, when displaying the remaining count value of the relay counter up to the predetermined value, the runner of the player's team may not be displayed.

Figure 33 (C1) shows the state where the value of the rival counter has reached a value (1001) corresponding to Section 2. In Figure 33 (C1), a display of rival 1640 breaking through the section is being executed, indicating that rival 1640 has reached the next section (Section 2). In Figure 33 (C1), a display indicating that the section has been successfully broken through ("Breakthrough!!") and a highlight display 1641 emphasizing that the next section has been reached are displayed.

Note that the highlight 1641 has multiple display modes (e.g., a display mode in which the text or color in the highlight 1641 differs for each display mode, a display mode showing a count value corresponding to the section reached by the rival 1640, etc.), and, for example, one display mode may be selected from the multiple display modes depending on the section reached by the rival 1640, or one display mode may be selected from the multiple display modes depending on the difference between the section reached by the rival 1640 and the section in which the team's runner is located.

In this way, when the rival presentation is being performed, each time the count value of the rival counter reaches one of a number of predetermined values (1001, 2001, ..., 9001), a presentation of the rival 1640 breaking through the section is performed, and a highlight display 1641 of a pattern based on the section that the rival 1640 has reached is displayed.

When displaying the remaining count value of the relay counter up to the predetermined value, it is desirable that the priority of the display showing the remaining count value and the highlighting 1641 in the overlapping display area is higher for the display showing the remaining count value (because the count value of the rival counter is indicated not only by the highlighting 1641 but also by the display position of the rival 1640). When a predetermined effect (for example, an SP reach effect that has a high expectation of a big win among reach effects and is executed in a predetermined variation pattern, or an immediate win effect in which a big win is announced (three identical decorative patterns are displayed) without a reach state being displayed or immediately after a reach state is displayed (for example, within a predetermined time such as within 1.0 seconds, or without other effects being executed after a reach state is displayed)) is being executed, the rival 1640 and the highlighting 1641 may be hidden in order to focus the player's attention on the predetermined effect and create a sense of expectation.

In addition, a predetermined production movie (for example, a movie suggesting a past rivalry that caused a rivalry between the player's team and the rival 1640) may be displayed during the rival production. When displaying a remaining count value up to the predetermined value of the relay counter, the display of the rival 1640 may be made invisible (or hidden) while the production movie is being executed, but the display of the remaining count value may be continuously displayed. This makes the player temporarily unable to recognize the difference between the runner of the player's team and the rival 1640, which can give the player a sense of tension. On the other hand, since some players dislike not being able to recognize the difference between the runner of the player's team and the rival 1640, when the production movie is displayed, the display of the production movie may be stopped by a predetermined trigger based on the player's operation (for example, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 or making the game ball B enter a predetermined winning hole, etc.) so that the rival 1640 can be viewed again, or the display of the production movie may end when a predetermined time has passed since the production movie was displayed.

In FIG. 34 (D1), the count value of the relay counter and the count value of the rival counter are both within the range (1001 to 2000) corresponding to the second section, and the team's runner 1622 and rival 1640 are both located on meter 1631 corresponding to the second section. Also, in FIG. 34 (D1), since the count value of the rival counter is smaller than the count value of the relay counter, rival 1640 is displayed to the right of the team's runner 1622 in the second section.

...

Note that the count value of the relay counter may decrease, and the display position of the team's runner may change in response to this decrease. In other words, the display position of the team's runner may move to the right, or the team's runner may return to the previous section (or be erased).

Figure 34 (E1) shows a state where the count value of the relay counter has reached 10001, and the value of the rival counter is within the range (9001 to 10000) corresponding to the 10th section. When the relay performance is being executed, if the count value of the relay counter or rival counter reaches 10001, a goal performance is executed. That is, in Figure 34 (E1), a goal performance is executed in which the team's runner 1630 in the 10th section finishes the race.

In FIG. 34 (E1), the team's runner 1630 in the 10th section has reached the finish line, and rival 1640 is located at meter 1631 corresponding to the 10th section. A message 1642 ("Finish!! Let's shake hands!!") is displayed, which is an example of a special image suggesting that the finish line has been reached. Note that there are multiple modes of message 1642 (for example, a first mode of "Finish!! Let's shake hands!!" and a second mode of "Finish! We'll win next time!"), but it is preferable to ensure that message 1642 in the first mode, which is included in the multiple modes, is always displayed when the count value of the relay counter is greater than the count value of the rival counter, as in FIG. 34 (E1), and the relay counter value reaches a value corresponding to the finish line.

Even if the situation in FIG. 34 (E1) is reached, the rival 1640 may continue to move on the meter 1631 according to the count value of the rival counter. However, whether the count value of the relay counter increases or decreases during that time, the display of the runner 1630 in the 10th section and the message 1642 may continue as is. After the situation in FIG. 34 (E1) is reached, when the count value of the rival counter reaches a value (10001) corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, the count value of the relay counter is unknown to the player, but since the relay counter value has already reached a value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, the player can recognize that he has at least once obtained a game ball B with a value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section.

In addition, after the situation in FIG. 34 (E1) is reached, the rival 1640 may continue to move on the meter 1631 according to the count value of the rival counter, and when the count value of the rival counter reaches a value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, the rival 1640 may be displayed in a specific manner described below.

For example, when a winning event occurs when the rival counter's count value reaches a value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section, the winning sound corresponding to that winning event is always output, but when a winning event occurs when the relay counter's count value reaches a value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section, the winning sound corresponding to that winning event may or may not be output (whether or not the sound is output may be determined, for example, according to a predetermined allocation). This creates a sense of tension for the player, for example, when the player's team's runner 1630 in the 10th section and rival 1640 reach the finish line of the 10th section at almost the same time, as the player cannot immediately tell which one has reached the finish line first.

When the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the finish of the 10th section, the team's runner 1630 in the 10th section may be hidden immediately or after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the display of the team's runner 1630 in the 10th section continues even after the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the finish of the 10th section, it is preferable that the display of the team's runner 1630 in the 10th section does not change even if the relay counter count value increases (i.e., no performance based on the relay counter count is performed), or the relay counter count itself may be terminated.

Next, the rival presentation that starts when the runner on one's team is ahead of the rival 1640 will be described. Figure 33 (B2) shows the state when the rival presentation has started with the rival counter's count value at a value (2001 to 3000) corresponding to Section 3. In Figure 33 (B2), a display indicating that the rival presentation has started ("Rival enters the race!!") is displayed, and the rival 1640 is displayed on the meter 1631 corresponding to Section 3.

In FIG. 33 (C2), the rival counter's count value has increased, but is still included in the value range (2001 to 3000) that corresponds to Section 3. In FIG. 33 (C2), the rival 1640 is displayed on the meter 1631 that corresponds to Section 3, but is located to the left of the rival in FIG. 33 (B2).

Figure 34 (D2) shows a state where the rival counter count value is included in the value (3001-4000) corresponding to Section 3, and the relay counter count value has reached the value (3001) corresponding to Section 3. In Figure 34 (D2), a section breakthrough effect of runner 1623 is executed, indicating that the team's runner 1623 has reached the next section (Section 4). In Figure 34 (D2), although a display ("Breakthrough!!") is displayed indicating that the section breakthrough has been successful, highlighting 1641 is not displayed because the rival effect is centered on the rival. However, when the team's runner reaches a value corresponding to Section 10, a display (different from highlighting 1641) may be displayed that emphasizes that the team's runner has reached Section 10 in order to create a sense of climax.

In FIG. 34 (E2), the count value of the rival counter reaches 10001, and the value of the relay counter is in the range (9001 to 10000) corresponding to the 10th section. In FIG. 34 (E2), a goal performance is being performed in which the rival 1640 reaches the finish line. If the rival 1640 reaches the finish line before the runner of the team, the display mode of the rival 1640 changes to a specific display mode that praises the rival 1640 (for example, a display in which the rival 1640 is wearing a crown 1643). After the specific display mode of the rival 1640 is displayed, the position of the rival 1640 does not change even if the count value of the rival counter is incremented (the increment of the count value of the rival counter may stop at a value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section in the first place), and even if a display showing the value of the rival counter is displayed, the value indicated by the display mode is not incremented any further when the display mode is displayed. The display of the specific aspect of the rival 1640 may continue as is (for example, until the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (10001) corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section) (if it continues as is, for example, it is erased a predetermined time after the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section or immediately after it is reached), or it may be hidden after being displayed for a predetermined time or immediately after it is reached.

When the display of the rival 1640 displayed in a specific mode is erased, it is preferable to stop incrementing the count value of the rival counter during the erased period (because if the position of the rival 1640 has changed the next time the rival 1640 is displayed, this will give the player a sense of incongruity). Furthermore, the display mode and display position of the rival 1640 when the rival 1640 in a specific mode is hidden may be different from that of the rival 1640 when the display of the rival 1640 in a specific mode is continued. For example, the display size of the rival 1640 when the display of the rival 1640 in a specific mode is continued may be larger than the display size of the rival 1640 when the rival 1640 in a specific mode is hidden.

Even in the situation of FIG. 34 (E2), the movement of the runner 1630 of the 10th section of the team on the meter 1631 may continue according to the count value of the relay counter. If the rival 1640 continues to be displayed in a specific manner until the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, the player can be made aware that the count value of the relay counter is close to the value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, thereby enhancing the sense of expectation. In addition, by having the display of the specific manner of the rival 1640 either continue or end immediately, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is still a possibility that the game ball B will be paid out if the display continues, and to suggest that there is still no possibility that the game ball B will be paid out if the display ends immediately, so that the player can pay attention to whether an effect of shaking hands with the rival will be performed even if the rival reaches the goal first.

In addition, even if the runner 1630 of the team's 10th section continues to move on the meter 1631 according to the count value of the relay counter after the situation in FIG. 34 (E2) is reached and the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the goal of the 10th section, the message 1642 may be displayed. As described above, the message 1642 can be in multiple forms (for example, the first form of "Goal!! Shake hands!!" in FIG. 34 (E1) and the second form of "Goal! Next time we'll win!"), and in this case (i.e., when the rival counter's count value is greater than the relay counter's count value and the rival counter's value reaches a value corresponding to the goal), the message 1642 in the form selected from the first form and the second form (for example, according to a predetermined allocation) may be displayed.

In the above example of the rival presentation, the rival 1640 and the player's team's runner are displayed at the same time if the count values of the rival counter and the relay counter correspond to the same section. However, the player's team's runner may start to be displayed only after the relay counter count value reaches a specified value or more (for example, a value obtained by subtracting 500 from the value corresponding to the finish line of the 10th section). This creates a sense of tension because the player cannot tell whether the rival 1640 or the player's team's runner is ahead until just before the finish line.

Furthermore, for the rival 1640, the position on the meter 1631 of the rival 1640 may be moved to a value corresponding to the rival counter's count value each time there is a winning result that is counted by the rival counter (each time the rival counter is incremented), and for the player's team's runner, the position on the meter 1631 of the player's team's runner may be moved to a value corresponding to the relay counter's count value each time the relay counter's count value increases by a predetermined number (for example, each time it increases by 100) (i.e., the position on the meter 1631 may not change even if the relay counter is incremented). This creates a sense of tension when the relay counter and rival counter count values are close, since the player cannot tell which of the relay counter and rival counter count values is higher just by looking at the display.

Figure 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reversal suggestion effect executed in the rival effect. The reversal suggestion effect suggests that the rival 1640 is about to be caught by the runner of the player's team, or that the rival 1640 is about to catch up with the runner of the player's team. The reversal suggestion effect is executed, for example, when the count value of the rival counter is greater than the count value of the relay counter and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the count value of the relay counter is within a predetermined value (for example, within 900), and when the count value of the rival counter is less than the count value of the relay counter and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the count value of the relay counter is within a predetermined value.

In order to give the player a sense of tension at the climax of the race between the player's team's runner and the rival 1640, the reversal suggestion effect may be executed only when the player's team's runner reaches the starting point of the 10th section. Specifically, for example, the reversal suggestion effect may be executed when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (9001) corresponding to the starting point of the 10th section, the count value of the rival counter is greater than the count value of the relay counter and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the count value of the relay counter is within a predetermined value, and when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (9001) corresponding to the starting point of the 10th section, the count value of the rival counter is smaller than the count value of the relay counter and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the count value of the relay counter is within a predetermined value.

In addition, because the count value of the relay counter may decrease, it is possible for the reversal suggestion effect to be executed multiple times. This allows the player to experience the tension of the reversal suggestion effect multiple times.

Figure 35 (A) shows a state where a reversal suggestion effect is being performed when a rival 1640 is ahead of a runner on the team's own team. In Figure 35 (A), the count value of the rival counter has reached a value (3001) corresponding to the 4th section, the value of the relay counter is within the range (2001-3000) corresponding to the 3rd section, and the difference between the count value of the rival counter and the relay counter is within a predetermined value (within 900).

In FIG. 35(A), the rival 1640 and the team's runner 1623 are positioned on the meter 1631 at positions that correspond to the count values of the rival counter and the relay counter, respectively.

In addition, in FIG. 35(A), a reversal suggestion effect and a rival 1640 section breakthrough effect are performed simultaneously. Because the rival 1640 is ahead of the player's team's runner 1623, the display mode of the highlighting 1641 of the rival 1640 section breakthrough effect is different from that in FIG. 33(C1). In addition, in the reversal suggestion effect, a message 1644 is displayed indicating that the positions of the rival 1640 and the player's team's runner are likely to be reversed.

To more strongly appeal to the player that a reversal may occur and create a sense of tension, if there is an overlapping display area between message 1644 and highlight 1641, it is desirable that the display priority of message 1644 be higher than the priority of highlight 1641. Also, it is desirable that the display time of message 1644 be longer than the display time of highlight 1641.

It is also desirable that the sound outputted in association with message 1644 takes priority over the sound outputted in association with highlighting 1641 (the prioritized sound is outputted louder, or the non-prioritized sound is not outputted). It is also desirable that the lamps lit in association with message 1644 take priority over the lamps lit in association with highlighting 1641 (the overlapping lamps are lit according to the prioritized lighting pattern, or the overlapping lamps are lit according to the prioritized lighting pattern, and the non-overlapping lamps among the non-prioritized lamps are not lit).

Figure 35 (B) shows a state where a reversal suggestion effect is being performed when rival 1640 is ahead of the runner of the team. Figure 35 (B) shows a state where the count value of the rival counter has reached a value (3001) corresponding to the fourth section, the count value of the relay counter is greater than the count value of the rival counter, and the difference between the count values of the rival counter and the relay counter is within a predetermined value (within 900).

In FIG. 35(B), the rival 1640 is located on the meter 1631 at a position that corresponds to the count value of the rival counter. Also, the team's runner has already reached the next section, so he is not displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in FIG. 35(B), a reversal suggestion effect and a section breakthrough effect of rival 1640 are being performed simultaneously. Because rival 1640 is ahead of his team's runner 1623, the display mode of the highlighting 1641 of the section breakthrough effect for rival 1640 is the same as in FIG. 33(C1). Also in FIG. 35(B), a message 1644 is displayed.

In addition, if the reversal suggestion effect is executed only when the team's runner reaches the starting point of the 10th section, the message 1644 may suggest that the team's runner has reached the final section (the remaining count value until the finish line on the relay counter), for example, by saying, "It's the last section, but a reversal is possible!"

Note that, unlike the Ekiden counter and the rival counter, a subtraction counter that can only subtract may be further provided. For example, the count value of the subtraction counter is set to a predetermined value when a predetermined game state is transitioned to, and the count value is subtracted based on the entry of a game ball B into a predetermined winning hole (which may be a winning hole that is the object of the addition of the payout of the Ekiden counter and/or a winning hole that is the object of the addition of the payout of the rival counter, or may be a winning hole other than these winning holes). Note that, it is preferable that the count value of the subtraction counter is not necessarily subtracted when a ball enters the predetermined winning hole, such as by subtracting a predetermined ratio when the ball enters the predetermined winning hole. Note that the count by the subtraction counter is terminated when the count value becomes zero (or when a predetermined time has passed since becoming zero) or when a transition is made to a specific game state different from the predetermined game state.

In the relay performance, a display showing the count value of the subtraction counter is further displayed, so that the count values of up to three counters are displayed, and the player can recognize whether the game ball B is entering the various winning holes smoothly. The trigger for displaying the display showing the count value of the subtraction counter may be independent of the trigger for displaying the count value of the relay counter and the count value of the rival counter. This may result in a situation where only the display of the subtraction counter is displayed, a situation where a display showing the count value of the subtraction counter and a display showing the count value of the relay counter are displayed, a situation where a display showing the count value of the subtraction counter and a display showing the count value of the rival counter are displayed, or a situation where a display showing the count value of the subtraction counter, a display showing the count value of the relay counter and a display showing the count value of the rival counter are displayed. The display showing the count value of the subtraction counter is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the count value indicated by the display becomes zero. In addition, if a predetermined performance is executed while the display showing the count value of the subtraction counter is displayed, the display may be temporarily stopped, and the display may be resumed when the predetermined performance is completed.

Note that, unlike the ekiden counter and the rival counter, an addition counter that can only add other than being reset to zero at a specified trigger may be further provided. The addition counter, for example, may be a certain winning hole (some or all of the winning holes included in the winning holes to which the ekiden counter payout is added and/or the winning holes to which the rival counter payout is added, or it may be a different winning hole from these winning holes. Also, it may be the same winning hole as the winning hole corresponding to the ball that triggers the subtraction counter described above, or it may be a different winning hole) that indicates the number of times the game ball B has entered. It is preferable that the addition counter and the subtraction counter described above are not displayed at the same time. Therefore, in the ekiden performance, the count values of up to three counters (the addition counter or one of the subtraction counters described above, the ekiden counter, and the rival counter) are displayed.

The rival 1640 running on the meter 1631 may be displayed together with a dedicated background image (a background image that can be displayed only when the rival 1640 running on the meter 1631 is displayed) (for example, even when the rival performance is not being performed). This allows the player to recognize the count value of the rival counter (even when the rival performance is not being performed). When the rival 1640 running on the meter 1631 is displayed together with the dedicated background image, for example, the dedicated background image and the rival 1640 running on the meter 1631 may be made non-displayable after a predetermined time has passed.

For example, when a rival performance is being performed, a performance of the team's runner breaking through a section or a performance of the team's runner reaching a goal may be executed only when game ball B passes through a specified area (e.g., gate portion 2003).

Figure 36 is a diagram showing another example of the relay station effect and the section breakthrough effect included in the relay effect. In the example of Figure 36, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a movable body 311 that resembles a sash (the movable body 311 may be attached inside the game board 5 or may be attached outside the game board 5, such as a door frame). When the movable body 311 moves from the initial position, a part or all of it may overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 (when overlapping, the movable body 311 is located in front of the effect display device 1600). Below, the differences from the section breakthrough effect in Figure 31 will be mainly explained, and similar points will not be explained as appropriate.

In FIG. 36(A), the same effect as in FIG. 31(A) is being performed. Note that in FIG. 36(A), the movable body 311 is located in the initial position. In the example of FIG. 36(A), when the movable body 311 is located in the initial position, the movable body 311 does not overlap with the display area of the performance display device 1600, but when the movable body 311 is located in the initial position, part or all of the movable body 311 may overlap with the display area of the performance display device 1600.

Figure 36 (B) shows the state when the relay station performance, which is part of the relay performance, has started. Figure 36 (B) is the same as Figure 31 (B) except that the movable body 311 moves downward from the initial position and then overlaps with the upper part of the performance display device 1600, performing a taunting motion (a taunting motion suggesting that a section breakthrough performance, described below, may occur), and that the button image 1633 and the gauge 1634 are not displayed.

In FIG. 36(B), a provocation effect display (for example, an aura may be displayed in a display area corresponding to the periphery of the movable body 311 performing the provocation) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 along with the provocation action of the movable body 311. Also, in FIG. 36(B), the runner 1624 of the fourth section and the runner 1625 of the fifth section may be displayed in close-up (enlarged than the runner 1624 displayed in FIG. 36(A). The provocation action of the movable body 311 ends after continuing for a predetermined period of time. By performing the provocation action of the movable body 311 in this manner, the player can look forward to the execution of the completion action of the movable body 311, which will be described later.

In FIG. 36(C1), a performance in which the handover of the sash 1632 fails is performed. For example, if the count value of the relay counter does not reach the value (4001) corresponding to the 5th section within a predetermined time (while the tilting motion of the movable body 311 continues) after the relay station performance starts, or if the relay station performance starts but the relay counter value falls below the value corresponding to the next section by a predetermined value or more (for example, 200 or more), a performance in which the handover of the sash 1632 fails as shown in FIG. 36(C1) is performed. In FIG. 36(C1), a display is displayed in which the handover of the sash 1632 fails from the runner 1624 of the 4th section to the runner 1625 of the 5th section, and the tilting motion of the movable body 311 ends and the runner is returning to the initial position (finally returning to the initial position). When the performance in which the handover of the sash 1632 fails in FIG. 36(C1) is performed, the relay station performance ends, and the runner 1624 of the 4th section is displayed at a position on the meter 1631 corresponding to the count value of the relay counter.

For example, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a value (4001) corresponding to the fifth section within a predetermined time (while the tilting motion of the movable body 311 continues) after the relay station performance starts, the performance will transition to either the section breakthrough performance shown in FIG. 36 (C2) or FIG. 36 (C3) according to a predetermined allocation.

In FIG. 36 (C2), a section breakthrough effect is being performed. In FIG. 36 (C2), in addition to the same effect as in FIG. 36 (D), the tilting motion of the movable body 311 is interrupted and a completion motion (moving the movable body 311 to the maximum movement position) is performed. By performing the completion motion of the movable body 311 in conjunction with the section breakthrough effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of exhilaration at breaking through the section. Note that part or all of the movable body 311 that has moved to the maximum movement position in the completion motion may overlap with a message that suggests section breakthrough (the count value of the relay counter has reached the value corresponding to the next section), such as "Breakthrough! Start of Section 5!!".

In addition, as the movable body 311 performs the completion movement, a completion effect display (for example, an aura different from the teasing effect may be displayed in the display area corresponding to the periphery of the movable body 311 performing the completion movement), the teasing effect may be displayed, or the effect itself may not be displayed at all. If the display area of the completion effect overlaps with the display area of the message "Break through! Start of Section 5!!", the display priority of the teasing effect may be higher or lower than the display priority of the message.

The movable body 311 that has performed the completion operation returns to the initial position, for example, after stopping at the maximum operation position for a predetermined period of time. For example, when the movable body 311 that has performed the completion operation starts to return to the initial position (or has completely returned to the initial position), the section breakthrough performance and relay station performance end.

In FIG. 36(C3), a section breakthrough effect is being performed, and the tilting motion of the movable body 311 continues. In FIG. 36(C3), the center position of motion of the movable body 311 continuing the tilting motion and the amount of up and down motion may be the same as in FIG. 36(B) or may be different (in the example of FIG. 36(C3), the center position of motion of the movable body 311 performing the tilting motion has moved downward compared to FIG. 36(B)).

In addition, in FIG. 36(C3), the runners 1624 in the fourth section, 1625 in the fifth section, and the sash 1632 continue to be displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 36(B), and a message is displayed suggesting that the section has been broken through (the count value of the relay counter has reached the value corresponding to the next section), saying "We may break through!!". Note that although messages are displayed in both FIG. 36(C2) and FIG. 36(C3), the content (display mode) of the message is different. Also, in FIG. 36(C3), part or all of the movable body 311 continuing the spurting motion may overlap the message "We may break through!!" temporarily or permanently.

In addition, in FIG. 36 (C3), a teasing effect display (for example, an aura may be displayed in a display area corresponding to the periphery of the movable body 311 performing the teasing action) may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 together with the teasing action of the movable body 311. This effect display may be displayed continuously from FIG. 36 (B), or may start from FIG. 36 (C3). In addition, when an effect display is displayed in FIG. 36 (B), the effect display may end in FIG. 36 (C3). Note that, if the display area of the teasing effect and the display area of the message "We might break through!!" overlap, the display priority of the teasing effect may be higher or lower than the display priority of the message.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the performance in FIG. 36 (C3) (i.e., since the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to breaking through the section), the performance in FIG. 36 (C2) will begin. Even if the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the player can be made to feel tense by continuing the tilting motion of the movable body 311 as in FIG. 36 (C3). In addition, by continuing the tilting motion of the movable body 311 together with the message "Maybe we'll break through!!" in FIG. 36 (C3), the player can be made to feel a sense of expectation that a stock of breaking through the section has been gained. In addition, instead of the message "Maybe we'll break through!!" in FIG. 36 (C3), a message such as "Definitely breaking through?!" may be displayed. This allows the player, who is feeling increasingly tense due to the tilting motion of the movable body 311, to feel relieved quickly, and also creates a sense of surprise.

When transitioning from the presentation of FIG. 36(B) to the presentation of FIG. 36(C2) or FIG. 36(C3) (when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section), the presentation of FIG. 36(B) is interrupted by the presentation of the presentation display device 1600, and the presentation of FIG. 36(C2) or FIG. 36(C3) is executed. In other words, the display pattern being executed in the presentation of FIG. 36(B) is interrupted (terminated) even if it is midway, and transition is made to the display presentation of the display pattern of FIG. 36(C2) or FIG. 36(C3).

In addition, when transitioning from the presentation of FIG. 36(B) to the presentation of FIG. 36(C2) or FIG. 36(C3) (when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section), if a light-emitting presentation by lamps is being performed in association with the movement of the movable body 311, the light emission by at least some of the lamps that emit light in the light-emitting presentation may be interrupted, and the light-emitting presentation by at least some of the lamps that accompanies the display of the message of FIG. 36(C2) and FIG. 36(C3) may be performed.

In addition, when transitioning from the presentation of FIG. 36(B) to the presentation of FIG. 36(C2) or FIG. 36(C3) (when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section), if a sound (e.g., a sound effect) accompanying the movement of the movable body 311 is being output from the speaker 354, it is preferable that the sound accompanying the movement of the movable body 311 is interrupted and a dedicated notification sound indicating that the count value of the relay counter has reached the next section is output.

In FIG. 36(B), when an effect indicating that a bonus will be given to the player is being executed, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section and transitions to FIG. 36(C3), the effect continues to be executed without interruption, but since the player has already experienced the elation of breaking through the section, it is possible not to grant the bonus corresponding to the effect.

In addition, since the movable body 311 is performing a tilting motion in FIG. 36(B) or FIG. 36(C3), the movable body 311 can transition from any position in the motion pattern of the tilting motion to the completion motion of FIG. 36(C2). Note that when transitioning from FIG. 36(B) or FIG. 36(C3) to FIG. 36(C2), the movable body 311 performing the tilting motion may first move to a predetermined position (e.g., the motion center position of the tilting motion) before transitioning to the completion motion.

In addition, instead of completing the movement of the movable body 311 in FIG. 36(C2), the movement of the movable body 311 may be stopped (by interrupting the tilting movement) at the position when transitioning from FIG. 36(B) or FIG. 36(C3) to FIG. 36(C2).

The movable body 311 has a number of motion patterns including the tilting motion, completion motion, and motion returning to the initial position described above. However, it is desirable that there are more motion patterns among the multiple motion patterns that can be interrupted so that the tilting motion is interrupted when transitioning from FIG. 36(B) or FIG. 36(C3) to FIG. 36(C2) (the completion motion is a motion pattern that cannot be interrupted).

Note that a lamp may be provided on the movable body 311. The lamp of the movable body 311 emits light in a light emission pattern according to the operation pattern of the movable body 311, for example. That is, when the movable body 311 is performing a tilting operation, the lamp emits light in a pattern corresponding to the tilting operation, and when the movable body 311 is performing a completion operation, the lamp may emit light in a pattern corresponding to the completion operation, or the lamp may not emit light (may be turned off). Also, for example, when the movable body 311 returns to the initial position, the lamp may emit light in a pattern corresponding to the operation of returning to the initial position, or the lamp may not emit light (may be turned off).

In addition, one or more illumination patterns of the lamp may be defined corresponding to each operation pattern of the movable body 311. For example, during the tilting operation of FIG. 36(B), the lamp may be illuminated in blue because it is unclear whether the count value of the relay counter can reach the value corresponding to the next section, and during the tilting operation of FIG. 36(C3), the lamp may be illuminated in red because the count value of the relay counter has reached the value corresponding to the next section.

In addition, when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section while the movable body 311 is performing the tilting motion in FIG. 36(B), there are cases where the display on the performance display device 1600 does not continue to be displayed (the runner, sash 1632, and message all change) as in the case of transition to FIG. 36(C2), and cases where at least a part of the display on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed as in the case of transition to FIG. 36(C3) (the display of the runner 1624, runner 1625, and sash 1632 continues, but all displays may continue). In FIG. 36(B), the movable body 311 may perform a motion pattern different from the tilting motion, but it is desirable that when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section while performing the different motion pattern, the display always transitions to FIG. 36(C2) (the display on the performance display device 1600 does not continue to be displayed). In this way, by changing the display pattern of the performance display device 1600 depending on the movement pattern, the player can enjoy predicting the upcoming performance from the movement of the movable body 311.

Note that, although an example in which one movable body 311 operates has been described in FIG. 36, multiple movable bodies (e.g., including movable body 311 and a second movable body (not shown)) may be operable. For example, in a relay station performance, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section when the movable body 311 operates and the above-mentioned hype effect is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the effect display associated with the movement of the movable body 311 may be hidden. Also, for example, if the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section when the second movable body operates and the effect display associated with the operation is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the effect display may be hidden or may continue to be displayed with the message in FIG. 36 (C2) and FIG. 36 (C3) overlapping with a portion of the display area, for example, according to a predetermined allocation.

For example, among the winnings that are counted by the relay counter and result in a payout, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is not always output for the winning in the first winning slot, but when the winning is in the second winning slot while the movable body 311 is performing the tilting motion, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, and when the winning is in the third winning slot while the movable body 311 is performing the completion motion, the winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, and so on. In this way, the timing at which the winning sound is output for each winning slot differs, allowing the player to enjoy playing by targeting various winning slots in order to listen to the winning sounds.

When the state transitions from FIG. 36(B) to FIG. 36(C2) and from FIG. 36(B) to FIG. 36(C3), that is, when the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section and the movable body 311 continues to move, it is preferable to output a special notification sound indicating that the value corresponding to the next section has been reached. On the other hand, when the state transitions from FIG. 36(B) to FIG. 36(C1), that is, when the value of the relay counter does not reach a value corresponding to the next section and the movement of the movable body 311 is interrupted and returns to the initial position, it is preferable to output a specific notification sound (different from the special notification).

For example, when the movable body 311 is performing the tilting motion in FIG. 36(B), the motion may be continued as in FIG. 36(C3) only if the game ball B passes through a specified area (e.g., gate portion 2003). In other words, when the movable body 311 is performing the tilting motion in FIG. 36(B), if the game ball B does not pass through the specified area and the relay counter value reaches a value corresponding to the next section, the section breakthrough effect in FIG. 36(C2) (i.e., a section breakthrough effect in which the movable body 311 performs a completion motion) may be performed without fail.

Figures 37 and 38 are explanatory diagrams showing another example of a relay performance. In the example of Figures 37 and 38, the game state (during non-jackpot play) includes a normal state and a high probability state that is advantageous to the player. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special lottery is higher than in the normal state. For example, special lottery results that grant jackpot play include a jackpot with high probability and a jackpot without high probability, and after the jackpot play obtained by the high probability jackpot ends, the state transitions to the high probability state.

In the examples of Figures 37 and 38, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a lever (not shown) which is an operation unit different from the pressing operation unit 303. This lever is provided with, for example, a sensor capable of detecting the operation of the lever (a predetermined operation by the player). The lever is also provided with a vibration motor, which vibrates when an earthquake performance, which will be described later, is being performed, causing the lever to vibrate. As will be described in detail later, when the lever is operated in a high probability state (i.e., when detection is performed by a sensor attached to the lever), the game state falls from the high probability state to the normal state.

Figures 37 and 38 explain an example of a performance in which a high probability state falls to a normal state when a relay performance is being performed. Figure 37 (A) shows a high probability state, and the same performance as Figure 31 (A) is being performed, except that a mountain background 1645, which is an example of a background image displayed during a high probability state, is displayed.

Figures 37 (B1), 37 (C1), and 37 (D1) show examples of presentations in which the game state falls from a high probability state to a normal state after an earthquake presentation. Figures 37 (B2), 37 (C2), and 37 (D2) show examples of presentations in which the game state falls from a high probability state to a normal state without an earthquake presentation.

First, an example of a presentation in which the game state falls from a high probability state to a normal state after an earthquake presentation will be described. Fig. 37 (B1) shows a state in which the relay station presentation has started while the game state remains high probability. In Fig. 37 (B1), the count value of the relay counter has reached a value that is a predetermined number less than the count value corresponding to the 9th section (for example, a value that is 100 shots less). In Fig. 37 (B1), a relay station presentation has started, which shows whether or not the sash 1632 will be passed from the runner 1628 in the 8th section to the runner 1629 in the 9th section. Also, in Fig. 37 (B1), a mountain background 1645 continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 37 (C1), an earthquake effect has started during a relay station effect. The earthquake effect is executed at a predetermined rate, for example, when a relay station effect is executed. When the earthquake effect starts, the lever vibrates. Also, when the earthquake effect starts, a hole appears in the meter 1631 at the feet of the runner 1628 who is about to pass the sash, and an effect is performed in which the runner 1628 is about to fall. Also, when the earthquake effect starts, a message is displayed encouraging the player not to move the vibrating lever (because if the lever is detected by a sensor attached to the lever, it will fall to the normal state). If the lever is detected by a sensor attached to the lever, the game state will fall to the normal state, so the player can enjoy the operation of trying to hold the vibrating lever so that it does not move.

For example, if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the earthquake effect in FIG. 37 (C1) without any detection by the sensor attached to the lever, the earthquake effect will end (i.e., the vibration of the lever will stop, the hole on the meter 1631 will be blocked, and the runner 1628 will return to the meter 1631).

In FIG. 38 (D1), the lever is operated in FIG. 37 (C1), and the game state falls from the high probability state to the normal state. In FIG. 38 (D1), the runner falls and returns to the fourth section. At this time, the count value of the relay counter may be updated to a value included in the range corresponding to the fourth section. Also, in FIG. 38 (D1), the background image changes from a mountain background 1645 to a road background 1646, which is an example of a background image corresponding to the normal state. Also, in FIG. 38 (D1), in order to avoid discouraging the player by falling to the normal state, the background image may not be displayed (or a monochromatic background image may be displayed).

Also, when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D1), the mountain background 1645 may be faded out in the upward direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and then the road background 1646 may be displayed so that it fades in from the top to the bottom of the effect display device. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the runner 1628 has fallen.

In addition, when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D1), a sound associated with the operation of the lever (i.e., a sound notifying that the gaming state has fallen from a high probability state to a normal state) may be output, or a lamp may light up in a lighting pattern associated with the operation of the lever (i.e., a lighting pattern notifying that the gaming state has fallen from a high probability state to a normal state).

In addition, in FIG. 38 (D1), in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game state has fallen back to the normal state (to make it easier to recognize the road background 1646, etc.), the decorative patterns and the hold display may be hidden.

Next, we will explain an example of a performance in which the game state falls from a high probability state to a normal state without going through an earthquake performance. For example, even if the lever is not operated in a high probability state, the game state falls from a high probability state to a normal state when the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section (for example, at a predetermined rate when the value corresponding to the next section is reached).

In FIG. 37(B2), the count value of the relay counter has reached the value (8001) corresponding to the 9th section, and the section breakthrough effect is being performed in the relay station effect. In FIG. 37(B2), the runner 1629 in the 9th section is wearing a sash 1632. Also, in FIG. 37(B2), the game state is in a high probability state, so a mountain background 1645 is displayed.

In FIG. 37 (C2), a runner 1629 in the ninth section is shown running on a meter 1631, while a cumulonimbus cloud 1647 is displayed, which is an example of a precursor display suggesting a fall to the normal state (a change in the game state). It is advisable to output a sound (e.g., a sound different (and lower in volume) from the sound output with the fall to the normal state in FIG. 38 (D1)) that accompanies the display of the cumulonimbus cloud 1647, or to light up a lamp in a lighting pattern (e.g., a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern emitted with the fall to the normal state in FIG. 38 (D1)) that accompanies the display of the cumulonimbus cloud 1647.

Note that in FIG. 37 (B2), the trigger for the game state to fall from the high probability state to the normal state (the count value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the 9th section) is met, but in FIG. 37 (C2), the game state is still in the high probability state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the game state will fall from the high probability state to the normal state.

In other words, when the lever is operated as shown in FIG. 38 (D1), the game state will fall from the high probability state to the normal state when the sensor attached to the lever detects it (the ongoing performance is interrupted and transitions to FIG. 38 (D1)), but if it is determined that the game state will fall from the high probability state to the normal state based on the count value of the relay counter reaching a value corresponding to the next section, the game state will not fall from the high probability state to the normal state when the trigger is met (i.e. the ongoing performance continues uninterrupted), but will fall after a predetermined time has passed. In this way, by having the game state fall either immediately or not immediately, a sense of tension can be created for the player.

Even if it is determined that the game state falls from the high probability state to the normal state based on the count value of the relay counter reaching a value corresponding to the next section, for example, according to a predetermined allocation, the game state may fall from the high probability state to the normal state when the trigger is met, or the game state may fall after a predetermined time has passed. In this way, even if it is determined that the game state falls from the high probability state to the normal state based on the count value of the relay counter reaching a value corresponding to the next section, the game state may fall immediately or not immediately, which further enhances the effect of giving the player a sense of tension. Even if it is determined that the game state falls from the high probability state to the normal state based on the count value of the relay counter reaching a value corresponding to the next section, it is desirable that the performance of FIG. 37 (C2) is executed (i.e., the game state may fall immediately to the normal state even when the cumulonimbus cloud 1647 is displayed).

It is desirable that the cumulonimbus cloud 1647 has a higher display priority than other presentation images (e.g. presentation images that have been continuously displayed since before the cumulonimbus cloud 1647 is displayed). For example, in the example of FIG. 37(C2), since the cumulonimbus cloud 1647 is an important display that suggests a fall to the normal state (a change in the game state), the display areas of the cumulonimbus cloud 1647 and the runner 1629 partially overlap, but the cumulonimbus cloud 1647 has a higher display priority.

In FIG. 38 (D2), a predetermined time has passed since the count value of the relay counter reached the value (8001) corresponding to the 9th section, and the game state has fallen from the high probability state to the normal state (without operating the lever). In FIG. 38 (D2), a display is displayed in which lightning 1648, which indicates the fall to the normal state (a display that is not displayed in FIG. 38 (D1), where the state has fallen to the normal state by operating the lever), hits the runner 1629 directly.

In addition, in FIG. 38 (D2), the mountain background 1645 is not displayed (no background image is displayed) because the state has fallen to the normal state. Note that in FIG. 38 (D2), when the state falls to the normal state due to the count value of the relay counter reaching a value corresponding to the next section, a background image different from the mountain background 1645 and the road background 1646 may be displayed to make it easier for the player to recognize that the state has fallen to the normal state due to that trigger.

In addition, when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D2), a sound may be output to notify that the gaming state has fallen to the normal state, or a lamp may be illuminated in a lighting pattern to notify that the gaming state has fallen to the normal state.

It is desirable that the sound notifying that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D1) is always output for at least a predetermined time, but it is desirable that the sound notifying that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D2) is only output for the predetermined time. This makes it easier for a player who has operated the lever to recognize that the game state has fallen to the normal state.

In addition, it is desirable that the illumination of the lamp in the illumination pattern notifying that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D1), and the illumination of the lamp in the illumination pattern notifying that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D2), continue until a predetermined condition is met (for example, a transition to the high probability state has occurred again, an operation of a predetermined operation unit has been detected, or the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 has been turned off, etc.). In addition, the predetermined condition may be different when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D1) and when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D2).

The pachinko machine 1 may also be equipped with multiple lamps, including movable lamps, but it is desirable that the movable lamps be turned off when the lamps are illuminated in a light-emitting pattern to notify that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D1), and when the lamps are illuminated in a light-emitting pattern to notify that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D2). This is because if the movable lamps were to operate in an illuminated state, the player may mistakenly believe that the game state has become advantageous even though it has fallen to the normal state.

Note that some of the lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 can perform a light-emitting effect in which they are lit in one of a number of modes, including a specific mode (e.g., emitting red light) and a special mode (e.g., emitting white light) that has a lower rate of providing a player with a more advantageous bonus than the specific mode, during fluctuation. However, when the lamps are lit in a light-emitting pattern that notifies the player that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D1), and when the lamps are lit in a light-emitting pattern that notifies the player that the game state has fallen to the normal state when transitioning to FIG. 38 (D2), it is possible to light a lamp different from the certain lamps in the special mode, but it is preferable not to light the lamp in the specific mode. This is because if the different lamps were lit in the specific mode, the player may mistakenly believe that the game state has fallen to the normal state, even though it has fallen to the normal state.

As described above, at least some of the presentation aspects differ between FIG. 38 (D1) and FIG. 38 (D2). In other words, at least some of the presentation aspects that notify the player of the fall to the normal state differ depending on the trigger for the fall to the normal state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the trigger for the fall to the normal state.

In the above example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the count value of the relay counter reached the value corresponding to the next section, the game state falls back to the normal state and the presentation of FIG. 38 (D2) is performed. However, when the count value of the relay counter reaches the value corresponding to the next section and the series of presentations being performed ends, the game state may fall back to the normal state and the presentation of FIG. 38 (D2) is performed. This increases the player's interest without unnaturally interrupting the series of presentations being performed.

Even if the earthquake effect is not performed, when the lever is operated during the high probability state, the game state will fall from the high probability state to the normal state. In other words, when the lever is operated at any of the timings of Figure 37 (A), Figure 37 (B1), Figure 37 (B2), Figure 37 (C1), and Figure 37 (C2), the game state will fall from the high probability state to the normal state and transition to the effect of Figure 38 (D1). Also, when the lever is operated at the timing of Figure 38 (D2), it is desirable to transition to the effect of Figure 38 (D1) although the game state remains in the normal state. In particular, when the lever is operated at the timing of Figure 37 (C2), after displaying the cumulonimbus cloud 1647, a performance can be executed that notifies of a fall to the normal state according to the performance mode of Figure 38 (D1), rather than a performance that notifies of a fall to the normal state according to the performance mode of Figure 38 (D2).

In addition, in Figures 37 (C1) and 37 (C2), when game ball B passes through a predetermined area (e.g., gate portion 2003), the game state may fall from a high probability state to a normal state, for example, at a predetermined rate (when falling from Figure 37 (C1), it transitions to Figure 38 (D1), and when falling from Figure 37 (C2), it transitions to Figure 38 (D2)).

For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (D1), when the game state falls to the normal state due to the lever operation (or detection based on the like), a still image is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 38 (D2), when the game state falls to the normal state due to the count value of the relay counter reaching a predetermined value, a moving image or a still image may be displayed. In particular, by displaying a still image when the game state falls to the normal state due to the lever operation, the player can be made to strongly recognize that the game state has fallen due to the player's operation, and the player will be more careful not to operate the lever in a high probability state from the next time onwards.

For example, if a specified operation part other than a lever is operated in a high probability state (i.e., if detection is performed by a sensor attached to the specified operation part), the game state does not fall from the high probability state to the normal state, but a prompting display may be displayed to encourage the player to stop operating the specified operation part (i.e., an operation that stops detection by the sensor attached to the specified operation part). This allows the player to recognize that he or she must not carelessly operate any operation part in a high probability state. Note that, if the display area of the prompting display overlaps with the display area of another effect image, it is desirable that the display priority of the prompting display be higher than the display priority of the other effect images.

In addition, when the specified operation unit different from the lever includes a first operation unit and a second operation unit, the display size of the prompt displayed when the first operation unit is operated and the output sound associated with the prompt, and the light emission pattern of the lamp that lights up in association with the prompt may be different when the second operation unit is operated in the high probability state.

For example, the game state may fall back to the normal state and transition to the presentation of FIG. 38 (D1) only if, during the high probability state, the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section and game ball B passes through a specified area (e.g., gate portion 2003). In other words, during the high probability state, if the value of the relay counter reaches a value corresponding to the next section without game ball B passing through the specified area, the presentation of FIG. 37 (C2) is performed, but it is desirable that the game state does not fall back to the normal state and transition to the presentation of FIG. 38 (D2).

[6. Basic specifications for production]
This chapter explains the various effects that are executed during both fluctuation and non-fluctuation.

[6-1. Basic specifications for the production of this chapter]
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the fluctuation pattern table. The fluctuation pattern table 390 is stored in, for example, the main control built-in ROM. In the above example, an example was described in which different fluctuation pattern tables are referenced depending on whether the jackpot flag is set and whether the reach flag is set, but all of the fluctuation patterns when the jackpot flag and the reach flag are set, the fluctuation patterns when the jackpot flag is not set and the reach flag is set, and the fluctuation patterns when the jackpot flag and the reach flag are not set are defined in the fluctuation pattern table 390 in FIG.

The fluctuation pattern table 390 indicates, for example, a fluctuation pattern number 3901, a fluctuation pattern name 3902, presence or absence of pseudo consecutive wins 3903, a degree of expectation 3904, a reach effect as a win/loss effect 3905, a final stopping pattern of the middle pattern 3906, allocation at the time of win 3907, allocation of losses (other than hold 4) 3908, and allocation of losses (hold 4) 3909.

The fluctuation pattern number 3901 is a number that identifies the fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern name 3902 indicates the name of the fluctuation pattern. Note that the fluctuation patterns "reduced fluctuation" and "normal fluctuation" are not selected at the time of a jackpot, and the reach effect is not executed in the fluctuation of these fluctuation patterns. In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "reduced fluctuation" (e.g., about 1 to 5 seconds) is shorter than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "normal fluctuation" (e.g., about 10 to 15 seconds).

When the fluctuation pattern "normal reach" fluctuates, a "normal reach" is executed as a reach effect, and when the fluctuation pattern "normal long reach" fluctuates, a "normal long reach" is executed as a reach effect. The "normal reach" as a reach effect is a reach effect that does not involve switching of the background display in the effect display device 1600, and the "normal long reach" as a reach effect is a reach effect that involves switching of the background display in the effect display device 1600. Also, the execution time of the effect is longer for the "normal long reach" as a reach effect than the "normal reach" as a reach effect, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher.

When the variation patterns "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", and "SP Reach 3" vary, an SP reach is executed as a reach effect. An SP reach is a reach that involves switching the background display on the effect display device 1600, and is a reach with a higher probability of winning than the "normal reach" and "normal long reach" reach effects. The shooting reach, shark fishing reach, ring toss reach, goldfish scooping reach, dart reach, bell toss reach, and final battle reach are all examples of SP reaches.

Pseudo consecutive hits 3903 indicates whether or not a pseudo consecutive hit effect is executed in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern, and the number of pseudo consecutive hits executed in the fluctuation if a pseudo consecutive hit effect is executed. "No pseudo" in pseudo consecutive hits 3903 indicates that a pseudo consecutive hit effect is not executed, and "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3" indicate that a pseudo consecutive hit effect of two and a pseudo consecutive hit effect of three are executed, respectively.

The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns are changed and the action of ending the change in the decorative patterns is executed multiple times during one change of the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device. "Ending the change in the decorative patterns" refers to, for example, a mode in which some or all of the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped, a mode in which the player is made to recognize that the change in the decorative patterns has ended, and a mode in which a pseudo consecutive pattern (a pattern that, when stopped, confirms that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) stops on part of the decorative pattern.

A pseudo consecutive performance in which the action is performed N times (N is a natural number equal to or greater than 1) is called an N-consecutive pseudo consecutive performance, and the Mth decorative pattern change (M is a natural number equal to or greater than 1 and equal to or less than N) in an N-consecutive pseudo consecutive performance is called an Mth pseudo consecutive performance. Also, a performance that suggests to the player that the action may be performed again during one change of the first special pattern display or the second special pattern display, but does not actually perform the action again, is also called a "pseudo false performance".

When the pseudo consecutive performance occurs or continues, that is, when it is determined that the operation of changing the decorative pattern and ending the change of the decorative pattern during one change of the first special pattern display device or the second special pattern display device is to be executed again, the peripheral control MPU displays a pseudo consecutive pattern (for example, a pattern indicated by a character such as "Continue!") on at least one of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern.
may be stopped.

For example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are all odd numbers or all even numbers, and no reach occurs) may be a pseudo consecutive symbol. A pseudo false effect may be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal fluctuation." Also, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern is one in which "pseudo 2" is executed, a pseudo false effect that suggests the occurrence of a third pseudo consecutive effect in "pseudo 3" may be executed.

When a variation pattern that can execute a pseudo consecutive performance is selected, the content of the pseudo consecutive performance is selected so that the occurrence rate is No pseudo > Pseudo 2 > Pseudo 3, and the expected probability of a jackpot is No pseudo < Pseudo 2 < Pseudo 3. Hereinafter, the pseudo consecutive performance is also simply called pseudo consecutive.

Expectation level 3904 indicates the expectation of a jackpot in the variation pattern in which the reach performance is executed, and the greater the number of stars, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Reach performance 3905 as a win/lose performance indicates a reach performance that ultimately notifies a win or loss in the variation pattern in which the reach performance is executed.

The SP reaches that can be executed in the variation pattern "SP reach 1", namely the shooting reach, shark fishing reach, and quoits reach, all have the same jackpot expectation of 3 stars. In addition, for the SP reaches that can be executed in the variation pattern "SP reach 2", they are selected in the following order of occurrence rate: Goldfish scooping reach (2 stars) > Dart reach (4 stars) > Bell toss reach (5 stars), and the jackpot expectation rate is Goldfish scooping reach (2 stars) < Dart reach (4 stars) < Bell toss reach (5 stars). In other words, in the variation patterns "SP reach 1" and "SP reach 2", the SP reaches with fewer stars have a higher occurrence rate, and the reaches with more stars have a higher expectation rate.

For example, even with Dart Reach (4 stars), the probability of winning may change depending on whether or not there is a pseudo-link or the number of times. For example, it is better to set the probability of winning higher when Dart Reach (4 stars) is selected with pseudo 2 than when Dart Reach (4 stars) is selected without a pseudo. However, although the probability of winning differs depending on whether or not there is a pseudo-link or the number of times, it is preferable for the probability of winning to be displayed as 4 stars when the title of Dart Reach (4 stars) is displayed (i.e., it is not influenced by the preview performance displayed before the Dart Reach (4 stars) is executed), but there are multiple ways in which the title of Dart Reach (4 stars) is displayed that have different expectations of winning, and the number of stars may be changed to correspond to the mode selected from the multiple modes.

In addition, the bell throw reach (5 stars) in the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 2" may be made selectable only during a jackpot fluctuation, meaning that when the bell throw reach (5 stars) is executed, it is confirmed that a jackpot has been won. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of "SP Reach 3", whose expectation level 3904 is 4.5 stars, may also be made selectable only during a jackpot fluctuation, meaning that when the final battle reach (4.5 stars) is executed, it is confirmed that a jackpot has been won.

The final stopping pattern 3906 of the middle pattern indicates the middle decorative pattern that stops at the end of the fluctuation of the corresponding fluctuation pattern. The "non-reach pattern combination" which is the final stopping pattern of the middle pattern in the fluctuation patterns "shortened fluctuation" and "normal fluctuation" indicates that the decorative pattern stops without forming a reach state. The "±1 pattern" included in the final stopping pattern of the middle pattern in a fluctuation pattern in which a reach performance is executed indicates that after the decorative pattern stops in a reach state, the middle decorative pattern that has been fluctuating to the end stops after passing one decorative pattern in the reach state or one before the decorative pattern in the reach state (stopping pattern at the time of a miss).

The "same pattern" included in the final stopping pattern of the middle pattern in the variation pattern in which the reach performance is executed indicates that after the decorative pattern stops in the reach state, the middle decorative pattern that has changed to the end stops with the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the reach state (the stopping pattern at the time of a jackpot). Note that in a variation in which the "same pattern" is selected, the decorative pattern that has changed to the end may stop with the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the reach state after appearing to have passed one decorative pattern in the reach state or stopped one before that, and then the decorative pattern may stop with the same pattern as the decorative pattern in the reach state.

Allocation at hit 3907 indicates the allocation of the variation pattern selected in a variation in which the jackpot flag is set. Allocation at miss (other than hold 4) 3908 indicates the allocation of the variation pattern selected in a variation in which the reserved memory number of special random numbers has not reached the upper limit (4) at the start of the variation and the jackpot flag is not set. Allocation at miss (hold 4) 3909 indicates the allocation of the variation pattern selected in a variation in which the reserved memory number of special random numbers has reached the upper limit (4) at the end of the previous variation and the jackpot flag is not set.

[6-2. Overview of reach performance]
Below, we will explain each of the reach effects 3905 as winning/losing effects.

[6-2-1. Normal reach]
In a normal reach, two seconds after the reach state is formed by the left and right decorative symbols, a symbol that is -3 with respect to the reach symbol is temporarily stopped as a middle decorative symbol (for example, if the left and right decorative symbols form a reach state with "7", the middle decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at "4" (=7-3)). After that, the middle decorative symbol is slowly changed and stopped at a symbol ±1 with respect to the reach symbol (in the case of a miss change) or the same symbol (in the case of a big win change).

In addition, in a fluctuation in which any of the SP reaches are executed, a normal reach is executed first, and the normal reach develops into the SP reach. Specifically, for example, in a slow fluctuation of the middle decorative pattern in the normal reach, the display on the performance display device 1600 is whited out without stopping the middle decorative pattern at a +1 pattern relative to the reach pattern.

During the whiteout, each decorative pattern changes into a reach decorative pattern and moves to the top left or top right of the display area of the performance display device 1600, after which the whiteout is released, the reach title of the selected SP reach is displayed, and the SP reach performance is executed. Note that non-reach decorative patterns are, for example, composed of a decorative display including a character and a number displayed superimposed on the decorative display, and reach decorative patterns are, for example, composed of a decorative display not including a character and a number displayed superimposed on the decorative display.

Note that the outline of each SP reach, such as the shooting reach, will be explained later, but in the explanation of the outline of the SP reach below, the explanation of the performance leading up to the display of the reach title of the SP reach mentioned above will be omitted.

[6-2-2. Normal long reach]
In the normal long reach, first, as in the normal reach, two seconds after the reach state is formed by the left and right decorative symbols, the symbol that is -3 with respect to the reach symbol is temporarily stopped as a middle decorative symbol, and then the middle decorative symbol is slowly changed to a symbol that is +1 with respect to the reach symbol. Then, the middle decorative symbol is rapidly changed, and the background in the performance display device 1600 is changed to a background for the long reach. Two seconds after the background in the performance display device 1600 is changed to a background for the long reach, the symbol that is -3 with respect to the reach symbol is temporarily stopped as a middle decorative symbol. Then, the middle decorative symbol is slowly changed to a symbol that is ±1 with respect to the reach symbol (in the case of a miss change) or the same symbol (in the case of a jackpot change).

[6-2-3. Shooting Reach]
In a shooting reach, which is an example of an SP reach, a performance in which a character loads a cork into a shooting gun and shoots at it is performed on the performance display device 1600. In a shooting reach in a big win variation, a performance in which a target hit by a fired cork falls is performed, and in a shooting reach in a miss variation, a performance in which a target hit by a fired cork does not fall is performed.

A specific example of the shooting reach effect will be described. First, a platform on which two (or more) corks are placed is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an effect is performed in which a character loads one of the two corks into a shooting gun. The two corks placed on the platform can be a combination of a white cork and a red cork, a combination of a red cork and a red cork, or a combination of a red cork and a gold cork. The appearance rates of the two corks placed on the platform are white cork and red cork > red cork and red cork > red cork and gold cork. The selection rates of the corks loaded into the shooting gun by the character are white > red > gold, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the corks loaded into the shooting gun is white < red < gold.

After the character has finished loading one of the corks into the shooting gun, a target scope is displayed, for example, to select one of the two (or more) targets displayed on the performance display device 1600. The two targets that appear are either a combination of a white target (heavy target) and a red target (light target), a combination of a red target and a red target, or a combination of a red target and a gold target (even lighter than the red target). The appearance rates of the two targets are as follows: white target and red target combination > red target and red target combination > red target and gold target combination. The selection rate of the final target that is selected is white > red > gold, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the selected targets is white < red < gold.

When one target is determined, the performance display device 1600 displays a close-up of the trigger of a shooting gun and a performance in which the character pulls the trigger. A cork is then fired to hit the determined target, and a teasing performance is performed to tease whether the target will fall or not. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the teasing performance began, a performance in which the target falls or does not fall is performed. Note that a valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the teasing performance, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without any operation being detected, a performance in which the target falls or does not fall may be executed.

[6-2-4. Shark Fishing Reach]
In a shark fishing reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect is produced in which a character fishes up one of two shark dolls on the effect display device 1600. Also, in a shark fishing reach in a big win variation, an effect is produced in which when the piece of paper in the mouth of the fished shark doll is opened, it becomes recognizable that "First Prize" is written on it, and in a shark fishing reach in a loss variation, an effect is produced in which when the piece of paper in the mouth of the fished shark doll is opened, it becomes recognizable that "Loss" is written on it.

A specific example of the shark fishing reach effect will be described. First, the effect display device 1600 displays a display of two (multiple) shark dolls placed on the ground, and an effect is performed in which the character decides to fish up one of the two shark dolls. The two shark dolls that appear are either a combination of a white shark doll and a red shark doll, a combination of a red shark doll and a red shark doll, or a combination of a red shark doll and a gold shark doll. The appearance rates of the two shark dolls are in the order of a combination of a white shark doll and a red shark doll > a combination of a red shark doll and a red shark doll > a combination of a red shark doll and a gold shark doll. The selection rate of the shark dolls that the character fishes up is in the order of white > red > gold, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the shark dolls fished up by the character is in the order of white < red < gold.

Once the shark doll that the character will fish out has been decided, the character fishes out the shark doll and takes out the folded piece of paper that was in the shark doll's mouth. The piece of paper is displayed in either white, red, or gold (multiple colors). The selection rate of the pieces of paper is white > red > gold, and the expected probability of winning the jackpot indicated by the pieces of paper is white < red < gold.

Next, a fanning performance is performed in which the character slowly opens the folded piece of paper. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the fanning performance began, a performance is performed in which it is possible to recognize that "First Prize" is written on the open piece of paper, or that "Loser" is written on the open piece of paper. Note that a valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the fanning performance, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without any operation being detected, a performance in which it is possible to recognize that "First Prize" is written on the open piece of paper, or that "Loser" is written on the open piece of paper.

[6-2-5. Quoits Reach]
In a quoits reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect in which a character throws a quoit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In a quoits reach in a big win variation, an effect in which a ring is passed through a target stick is displayed, and in a quoits reach in a loss variation, an effect in which a ring falls to the ground without being passed through the target stick is displayed.

A specific example of the presentation of a quoits reach will be described. First, a table on which two (or more) rings are placed is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and a presentation is performed in which a character selects one of the two rings. The two rings placed on the table are either a combination of a small ring and a large ring, a combination of a large ring and a large ring, or a combination of a large ring and an extra-large ring. The appearance rates of the two rings placed on the table are in the order of a combination of a small ring and a large ring > a combination of a large ring and a large ring > a combination of a large ring and an extra-large ring. The selection rate of the rings by the character is in the order of a small ring > a large ring > an extra-large ring, and the expectation of a jackpot indicated by the ring selected by the character is in the order of a small ring < a large ring < an extra-large ring.

After the character selects one of the rings, a target scope is displayed, for example, to determine one of two (or more) targets (sticks erected on a stand) displayed on the display device 1600. The two targets that appear are either a combination of a thick stick and a thin stick, a combination of a thin stick and a thin stick, or a combination of a thin stick and a very thin stick. The appearance rates of the two targets are in the order of a combination of a thick stick and a thin stick > a combination of a thin stick and a thin stick > a combination of a thin stick and a very thin stick. The selection rate of the one target that is finally determined is in the order of a thick stick > a thin stick > a very thin stick, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined target is in the order of a thick stick < a thin stick < a very thin stick.

Once one ring and one target are determined, the performance display device 1600 performs a performance in which the character throws the determined ring at the determined target. After that, a provocation performance is performed in which the ring spins around at the end of the target pole. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the provocation performance, a performance is performed in which the ring is threaded through the target pole, or the ring falls to the ground without being threaded through the target pole. Note that an effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the provocation performance, and when an operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without an operation being detected, a performance in which the ring is threaded through the target pole, or the ring falls to the ground without being threaded through the target pole may be executed.

[6-2-6. Goldfish scooping reach]
In a goldfish scooping reach, which is an example of an SP reach, a performance in which a character scoops up goldfish is performed on the performance display device 1600. In a goldfish scooping reach in a big win variation, a performance in which the goldfish scooped by the character goes into a cup is performed, and in a goldfish scooping reach in a loss variation, a performance in which the goldfish scooped by the character goes back into the tank without going into the cup is performed.

A specific example of the Goldfish Scooping Reach performance will be described. First, a table on which two (or more) poi are placed is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a performance is performed in which a character selects one of the two poi. The two poi placed on the table are either a combination of paper poi and monaka poi, a combination of monaka poi and monaka poi, or a combination of monaka poi and thick monaka poi. The appearance rates of the two poi placed on the table are in the order of paper poi and monaka poi > combination of monaka poi and monaka poi > combination of monaka poi and thick monaka poi. The selection rate of poi by the character is in the order of paper poi > monaka poi > thick monaka poi, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the poi selected by the character is in the order of paper poi < monaka poi < thick monaka poi.

After the character selects one of the poi, a target scope is displayed, for example, to determine one of two (or more) goldfish in the tank displayed on the display device 1600. The two goldfish that appear are either a black goldfish (large demekin) and a red goldfish (small goldfish), a red goldfish and a red goldfish, or a red goldfish and a gold-colored goldfish (smaller than the red goldfish). The appearance rates of the two goldfish are black goldfish and red goldfish > red goldfish and red goldfish > red goldfish and gold-colored goldfish. The selection rate of the one goldfish that is finally determined is black goldfish > red goldfish > gold-colored goldfish, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined one goldfish is black goldfish < red goldfish < gold-colored goldfish.

Once one scoop and one goldfish have been selected, the performance display device 1600 will display an effect in which a character uses the selected scoop to dramatically scoop up the selected goldfish from the tank, causing the goldfish to fly high into the air. After that, a fanning effect is performed to see if the falling goldfish will fall into the cup. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the fanning effect began, a performance in which the goldfish enters the cup, or the goldfish returns to the tank without entering the cup, will be performed. Note that a valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the fanning effect, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without any operation being detected, a performance in which the goldfish enters the cup, or the goldfish returns to the tank without entering the cup, may be performed.

[6-2-7. Dart reach]
In a dart reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect in which a character throws darts is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In a dart reach during a big win variation, an effect is displayed in which the dart thrown by the character hits the center area of the dart board, and in a dart reach during a miss variation, an effect is displayed in which the dart thrown by the character hits an area away from the center area of the dart board.

A specific example of the dart reach effect will be described. First, a stage on which two (multiple) darts are placed is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an effect is performed in which a character selects one of the two darts. The two darts placed on the stage are either a combination of a thick-tipped dart and a thin-tipped dart, a combination of a thin-tipped dart and a thin-tipped dart, or a combination of a thin-tipped dart and a very thin-tipped dart. The appearance rates of the two darts are in the order of a combination of a thick-tipped dart and a thin-tipped dart > a combination of a thin-tipped dart and a thin-tipped dart > a combination of a thin-tipped dart and a very thin-tipped dart. The selection rates of the darts that are finally determined are in the order of a thick-tipped dart > a thin-tipped dart > a very thin-tipped dart, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined darts is in the order of a thick-tipped dart < a thin-tipped dart < a very thin-tipped dart.

After the character selects one of the darts, a target scope is displayed, for example, to select one of the two (or more) dartboards displayed on the performance display device 1600. The two dartboards that appear are either a combination of a dartboard with a small central area and a dartboard with a large central area, a combination of a dartboard with a large central area and a dartboard with a large central area, or a combination of a dartboard with a large central area and a dartboard with an extra-large central area. The appearance rates of the two dartboards are in the following order: a combination of a dartboard with a small central area and a dartboard with a large central area > a combination of a dartboard with a large central area and a dartboard with a large central area > a combination of a dartboard with a large central area and a dartboard with an extra-large central area. In addition, the selection rate of the dartboards that are finally determined is in the order of dartboards with a small central area > dartboards with a large central area > dartboards with an extra-large central area, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined dartboards is in the order of dartboards with a small central area < dartboards with a large central area < dartboards with an extra-large central area.

Once one dart and one dartboard have been selected, the display device 1600 performs an effect in which a character throws the selected dart at the selected dartboard. After that, a strong wind causes the thrown dart to gradually shift from the center, and then a provocation effect in which the dart is temporarily stopped is performed. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the provocation effect started, an effect in which the dart lands in the center of the dartboard or in an area off the center of the dartboard is performed. Note that an effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the provocation effect, and when the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without any operation being detected, an effect in which the dart lands in the center of the dartboard or in an area off the center of the dartboard may be performed.

[6-2-8. Bell Throw Reach]
In a bell throw reach, which is an example of an SP reach, a bell throwing effect is performed in which a character throws a bell into a ring on the effect display device 1600. In a bell throw reach during a big win variation, a performance is performed in which the bell thrown by the character enters the ring, and in a bell throw reach during a loss variation, a performance is performed in which the bell thrown by the character flies out of the ring and falls to the ground.

A specific example of the presentation of the bell tossing reach will be described. First, a table with two (or more) bells placed on it is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and a presentation is given in which the character selects one of the two bells. The two bells placed on the table are either a white bell and a red bell, a red bell and a red bell, or a red bell and a gold bell. The appearance rates of the two bells are white bell and red bell > red bell and red bell > red bell and gold bell. The selection rates of the bells that are ultimately determined are white bell > red bell > gold bell, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined bells is white bell < red bell < gold bell.

After the character selects one of the bells, a target scope is displayed, for example, to determine which of the two (or more) rings will be displayed on the display device 1600. The two rings that will appear are either a combination of small and large rings, a combination of large and large rings, or a combination of large and extra-large rings. The appearance rates of the two rings are in the order of small and large rings > combination of large and large rings > combination of large and extra-large rings. The selection rate of the final rings is small rings > large rings > extra-large rings, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined rings is small rings < large rings < extra-large rings.

Once one bell and one ring have been selected, the performance display device 1600 performs a performance in which a character throws the selected bell into the selected ring. After that, a provocative performance is performed in which the thrown bell spins inside the ring and looks as if it is about to fly out. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the provocative performance, a performance in which the bell enters the ring, or the bell flies out of the ring and falls to the ground, is performed. Note that a valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the provocative performance, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without any operation being detected, a performance in which the bell enters the ring, or the bell flies out of the ring and falls to the ground may be performed.

［6-2-9. Final Battle Reach］
In a final battle reach, which is an example of an SP reach, an effect is produced in which an ally character battles an enemy character on the effect display device 1600. In a final battle reach in a big win variation, an effect is produced in which an enemy character is blown away by an attack by an ally character, and in a final battle reach in a loss variation, an effect is produced in which an enemy character withstands an attack by an ally character without being blown away.

A specific example of the final battle reach presentation will be described. First, the presentation display device 1600 performs a presentation to determine the enemy character that will be the opponent of the ally character. In this presentation, a weak enemy character is displayed for one second, a medium enemy character is displayed for one second, and a strong enemy character is displayed for one second, after which the display quickly switches between the weak enemy character, the medium enemy character, and the strong enemy character, and finally the display stops on one of the enemy characters, determining the enemy character that will be the opponent of the ally character. The selection rate of the determined enemy characters is strong enemy character > medium enemy character > weak enemy character, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined enemy characters is strong enemy character < medium enemy character < weak enemy character.

Once the enemy character is determined, the effect display device 1600 transitions to an attack scene of the ally character, in which the ally character attacks the enemy character with one of the determined attacks from weak attack, medium attack, and strong attack. The selected attack rates are weak attack > medium attack > strong attack, and the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the determined attacks is weak attack < medium attack < strong attack.

When an ally character attacks, an effect is shown in which the enemy character endures the attack. After that, a provocative effect is performed in which the display is temporarily paused. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the provocative effect, an effect is shown in which the enemy character is blown away, or an effect is shown in which the enemy character endures without being blown away. Note that an effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the provocative effect, and when operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without operation being detected, an effect is shown in which the enemy character is blown away, or an effect is shown in which the enemy character endures without being blown away.

In the attack scene of the final battle reach, an ally character attacks an enemy character using a weapon. If the reach execution preview performance described below is executed before the final battle reach, the weapon that the ally character will use in the final battle reach will be notified in advance in the reach execution preview performance, but if the reach execution preview performance is not executed before the final battle reach, the player will not be able to recognize the weapon that the ally character will use until the attack scene is switched to.

[6-3. Presentation pattern when SP Reach variation pattern is selected]
The following describes the performance patterns when the variation patterns "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", or "SP Reach 3" are selected. When the variation patterns "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", or "SP Reach 3" are selected, the basic pattern, rare pattern, or replay pattern is assigned to be executed according to a predetermined assignment.

As a general rule, the preview effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 1" is the reach selection preview effect described below, the preview effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 2" is the reach promotion preview effect described below, and the preview effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 3" is the reach execution preview effect described below.

When a basic pattern is selected, a preview performance corresponding to the determined variation pattern is performed, and then a reach performance is executed as a winning or losing performance in that variation pattern, or a reach performance is executed as a winning or losing performance in that variation pattern without a preview performance corresponding to the determined variation pattern.

When a rare pattern is selected, a preview performance corresponding to the determined variation pattern and a preview performance different from the preview performance corresponding to that variation pattern are displayed in each of the two divided display areas (e.g., a display area divided into two, top and bottom) of the performance display device 1600 (at least a part of the display periods of the two preview performances overlap), and then a reach performance is executed as a winning or losing performance for that variation pattern.

Details will be described later, but for example, when it has been decided that the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 1" will be executed and a rare pattern is selected, the reach selection preview performance, which is a preview performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 1", and either the reach promotion preview performance or the reach execution preview performance, which are preview performances corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 2" or the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 3", are displayed and the preview performance is executed (two preview performances are displayed), but after the execution of the two displayed preview performances has finished, the preview performance that is not the preview performance corresponding to the determined reach performance (in this case, the reach selection preview performance) is hidden, and the reach performance selected by the reach selection preview performance, which is a preview performance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 1", is executed.

When a retry pattern is selected, an SP reach performance of one of the variation patterns "SP reach 1," "SP reach 2," or "SP reach 3" is executed, and a retry performance is executed in the middle of the reach performance, and then an SP reach performance (a reach performance as a win/lose performance) in the determined variation pattern is executed.

For example, when the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" is determined as the reach effect for the winning or losing performance, if a retry pattern is selected, the SP reaches in the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" such as the Goldfish Scooping Reach (2 stars), Dart Reach (4 stars), and Bell Throwing Reach (5 stars), or the SP reaches in the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" such as the Final Battle Reach (4.5 stars), may be executed halfway, and after the retry effect is executed, one of the reach effects (all 3 stars) may be executed as the winning or losing performance in the variation pattern "SP Reach 1". In other words, the reach effect as the winning or losing performance may have fewer stars indicating the probability of a jackpot than the SP reach effect executed halfway (in other words, the player may perceive that the probability of a jackpot has decreased halfway through the performance).

Below, we will explain examples of the effects of the basic pattern, rare pattern, and redo pattern.

[6-3-1. Basic pattern]
The basic pattern performance when the variable pattern "SP Reach 1" is selected will be described. In this case, first, whether or not to execute the reach selection notice performance is determined by a lottery based on a predetermined allocation. If it is determined that the reach selection notice performance is not executed, a determined number of pseudo consecutive hits are executed, and then one of the reach performances as the winning or losing performance corresponding to "SP Reach 1" is executed via the same performance as the normal reach. Note that which of the shooting reach, shark fishing reach, or quoits reach, which is the reach performance as the winning or losing performance when the reach selection notice performance is not executed, is executed, for example, by a lottery based on an equal allocation.

If it is decided to execute a reach selection notice performance, the determined number of pseudo consecutive wins are executed, and then the reach selection notice performance is executed. Details will be described later, but the reach performance to be executed as a winning or losing performance is selected in the reach selection notice performance (selectable by the player) from among the shooting reach, shark fishing reach, and quoits reach. Once the reach selection notice performance has ended, the reach performance to be executed as the winning or losing performance selected in the reach selection notice performance is executed.

The basic pattern presentation when the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" is selected will be explained. In this case, first, as the reach presentation for the winning/losing presentation, a lottery is held to determine whether a goldfish scooping reach, dart reach, or bell throwing reach will be executed based on a predetermined allocation (this allocation is determined so that the expected probability of a jackpot is goldfish scooping reach < dart reach < bell throwing reach, and the occurrence rate is goldfish scooping reach > dart reach > bell throwing reach).

Next, a lottery based on a predetermined allocation is used to determine whether or not to execute a reach promotion notice performance. If it is decided not to execute a reach promotion notice performance, a determined number of pseudo consecutive wins are executed, and then the reach determined as the reach performance for the winning or losing performance is executed via the same performance as a normal reach.

When it is decided to execute a reach promotion notice performance, the determined number of pseudo consecutive hits are executed, and then the reach promotion notice performance is executed. Note that, as will be described in detail later, the performance pattern of the reach promotion notice performance differs depending on the reach determined as the reach performance for the winning or losing performance (if it is decided that a goldfish scooping reach will be executed, the reach promotion notice performance is executed in a 4-second performance pattern, if it is decided that a dart reach will be executed, the reach promotion notice performance is executed in a 5-second performance pattern, and if it is decided that a bell throwing reach will be executed, the reach promotion notice performance is executed in a 6-second performance pattern). Once the reach promotion notice performance has ended, the reach determined as the reach performance for the winning or losing performance is executed.

The following describes the basic pattern when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected. First, a lottery based on a predetermined allocation determines whether or not to execute a reach execution notice performance. If it is decided not to execute a reach execution notice performance, a determined number of pseudo consecutive wins are executed, and then a performance similar to that of a normal reach is performed, followed by a final battle reach, which is a reach performance that corresponds to "SP Reach 3" and determines whether or not the winning combination is achieved.

In the final battle reach, which will be described in detail later, an ally character selected from a number of characters battles an enemy character equipped with head gear selected from a number of head gears, body gear selected from a number of body gears, foot gear selected from a number of foot gears, and a weapon selected from a number of weapons (silver sword, gold sword, and rainbow sword). In the final battle reach when the reach execution notice performance is not executed, an ally character determined by a lottery based on equal allocation is equipped with head gear, body gear, and foot gear determined by a lottery based on equal allocation. In the final battle reach when the reach execution notice performance is not executed, the weapon equipped by the ally character is determined by a lottery based on a predetermined allocation (the allocation is set so that the expected probability of a jackpot is silver sword < gold sword < rainbow sword, and the appearance rate is silver sword > gold sword > rainbow sword).

When it is decided to execute a reach execution notice performance, the reach execution notice performance is executed after executing the determined number of pseudo consecutive hits. Details will be described later, but in the reach execution notice performance, the player can select the ally character that will appear in the final battle reach, as well as the head gear, body gear, and foot gear that the ally character will be equipped with. Also, in the reach execution notice performance, the weapon that the ally character will be equipped with in the final battle reach is determined by lottery based on a predetermined allocation (for example, the same as the weapon allocation in the final battle reach when the reach execution notice performance is not executed). After the reach execution notice performance ends, the final battle reach is executed, using the ally character, head gear, body gear, foot gear, and weapon determined in the reach execution notice performance.

Note that the reach execution notice performance may be displayed even in a variation pattern in which the final battle reach is not executed. Specifically, for example, the reach execution notice performance is displayed with a predetermined probability when the variation pattern "normal long reach" is selected at the time of failure and when pseudo 2 or pseudo 3 is selected. In this case, the reach execution notice performance starts, for example, when the pseudo consecutive times selected from pseudo 2 or pseudo 3 are completed. In addition, in the reach execution notice performance in this case, the player can select the ally character and the head armor, body armor, and foot armor equipped by the ally character, but after "x" is forcibly selected as the weapon, the final battle reach is not developed, and the normal long reach is executed as a reach as a winning/losing performance. Note that the normal long reach ends when 19 seconds have elapsed from the time when the pseudo consecutive times selected from pseudo 2 or pseudo 3 are completed. In addition, when the reach selection preview or reach promotion preview is displayed, it will always develop into an SP reach performance; in other words, so-called false performances that do not develop into an SP reach performance will not be executed in the reach selection preview and reach promotion preview.

In addition, in the reach execution notice performance when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected, it may be possible to determine "X" as the weapon, but it is desirable that the weapon allocation is determined so that if "X" is determined as the weapon, a jackpot is guaranteed or it is extremely hot (at least the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the silver sword is determined as the weapon). In the reach execution notice performance when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected, if "X" is determined as the weapon, for example, a display is performed on the performance display device 1600 showing the selected ally character saying the line "My bare hands are enough!", and then a final battle reach is executed in which the ally character attacks the enemy character with his bare hands.

[6-3-2. Rare patterns]
The rare pattern performance when the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" is selected will be explained. First, it is determined according to a predetermined allocation whether to execute the reach selection notice performance and the reach promotion notice performance, or the reach selection notice performance and the reach execution notice performance as the two notice performances (that is, the reach selection notice performance, which is the notice performance corresponding to the variation pattern "SP Reach 1", is always executed). Note that in the rare pattern when the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" is selected, the two notice performances of the reach promotion notice performance and the reach execution notice performance, which are notice performances not corresponding to "SP Reach 1", are not determined.

Next, after executing the determined number of pseudo consecutive hits, the timing to start displaying the two determined preview effects is determined. Specifically, for example, it is determined according to a predetermined allocation whether to start displaying the two determined preview effects simultaneously, to start displaying one of the two preview effects first (for example, to start displaying the other preview effect one second after starting displaying the first preview effect), or to start displaying the other of the two preview effects first (for example, to start displaying one of the preview effects one second after starting displaying the other preview effect).

The two preview performances are then displayed on the performance display device 1600 according to the determined start timing. Each of the two preview performances is displayed, for example, in a display area that divides the display area of the performance display device 1600 in two (for example, a display area divided into two, top and bottom), and at least a portion of the display periods of the two preview performances overlap. For the preview performance that ends first of the two preview performances, the display at the time of its end may be continued until the preview performance that ends later ends, or a predetermined loop display may be continued until the preview performance that ends later ends.

When the two preview performances end, the display area in which the two preview performances are displayed, in which the reach selection preview performance is displayed, is expanded to cover the entire area of the performance display device 1600, and the display of the preview performance that is not the reach selection preview performance of the two preview performances is made non-displayable. After that, the reach performance is executed as the winning/losing performance selected in the reach selection preview performance.

The following describes the rare pattern presentation when the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" is selected. First, a predetermined allocation is used to determine whether the two preview presentations will be a reach selection preview presentation and a reach promotion preview presentation, or a reach promotion preview presentation and a reach execution preview presentation (i.e., the reach promotion preview presentation, which is the preview presentation that corresponds to the variation pattern "SP Reach 2", is always executed). Note that in the rare pattern when the variation pattern "SP Reach 2" is selected, the two preview presentations, the reach selection preview presentation and the reach execution preview presentation, which are preview presentations that do not correspond to "SP Reach 2", are never determined.

Next, after executing the determined number of pseudo consecutive hits, the timing to start displaying the two determined preview effects is determined. Specifically, for example, it is determined according to a predetermined allocation whether to start displaying the two determined preview effects simultaneously, to start displaying one of the two preview effects first (for example, to start displaying the other preview effect one second after starting displaying the first preview effect), or to start displaying the other of the two preview effects first (for example, to start displaying one of the preview effects one second after starting displaying the other preview effect).

The two preview performances are then displayed on the performance display device 1600 according to the determined start timing. Each of the two preview performances is displayed, for example, in a display area that divides the display area of the performance display device 1600 in two (for example, a display area divided into two, top and bottom), and at least a portion of the display periods of the two preview performances overlap. For the preview performance that ends first of the two preview performances, the display at the time of its end may be continued until the preview performance that ends later ends, or a predetermined loop display may be continued until the preview performance that ends later ends.

When the two preview performances end, the display area in which the reach promotion preview performance is displayed is expanded to cover the entire area of the performance display device 1600, and the display of the preview performance that is not a reach promotion preview performance is made non-displayable. After that, the reach performance is executed as the winning/losing performance notified in the reach promotion preview performance.

The following describes the rare pattern presentation when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected. First, a predetermined allocation is used to determine whether the two preview presentations will be a reach selection preview presentation and a reach execution preview presentation, or a reach promotion preview presentation and a reach execution preview presentation (i.e., the reach execution preview presentation, which is the preview presentation that corresponds to the variation pattern "SP Reach 3", is always executed). Note that in the rare pattern when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" is selected, the two preview presentations, the reach selection preview presentation and the reach promotion preview presentation, which are preview presentations that do not correspond to "SP Reach 3", are never determined.

Next, after executing the determined number of pseudo consecutive hits, the timing to start displaying the two determined preview effects is determined. Specifically, for example, it is determined according to a predetermined allocation whether to start displaying the two determined preview effects simultaneously, to start displaying one of the two preview effects first (for example, to start displaying the other preview effect one second after starting displaying the first preview effect), or to start displaying the other of the two preview effects first (for example, to start displaying one of the preview effects one second after starting displaying the other preview effect).

The two preview performances are then displayed on the performance display device 1600 according to the determined start timing. Each of the two preview performances is displayed, for example, in a display area that divides the display area of the performance display device 1600 in two (for example, a display area divided into two, top and bottom), and at least a portion of the display periods of the two preview performances overlap. For the preview performance that ends first of the two preview performances, the display at the time of its end may be continued until the preview performance that ends later ends, or a predetermined loop display may be continued until the preview performance that ends later ends.

When the two preview performances end, the display area in which the two preview performances are displayed, in which the reach execution preview performance is displayed, is expanded to cover the entire area of the performance display device 1600, and the display of the preview performances that are not reach promotion preview performances is made non-existent. After that, a final battle reach using the character, head armor, body armor, foot armor, and weapon determined in the reach execution preview performance is executed as a reach performance as a winning or losing performance.

[6-3-3. Retry pattern]
Regardless of which of the variation patterns "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", and "SP Reach 3" is selected, the following performance is executed. First, it is determined by a lottery based on a predetermined allocation which variation pattern of "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", or "SP Reach 3" the SP Reach performance to be executed first (SP Reach performance executed halfway) will be executed, and which pattern of the basic pattern or rare pattern will be executed for the variation pattern of the SP Reach performance to be executed first.

Then, the above-mentioned preview performance is executed according to the basic pattern or rare pattern determined for the variation pattern of the SP reach performance to be executed first (or without executing the preview performance), and the determined (to be executed first) SP reach performance is started. When a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the SP reach performance is made invisible (ended), and a replay performance is displayed for a predetermined time on the performance display device 1600.

Next, a lottery based on a predetermined allocation is used to determine whether a basic pattern or a rare pattern will be executed for the selected variation pattern (a reach effect as a winning or losing effect). The above-mentioned preview effect is executed according to the basic pattern or rare pattern determined for the selected variation pattern (or the preview effect is not executed), and the SP reach effect for the selected variation pattern is executed. Note that since the number of pseudo consecutive wins determined for the selected variation pattern is executed before the basic pattern or rare pattern effect determined for the previously executed SP reach variation pattern, no pseudo consecutive wins are executed until the redo effect ends and the basic pattern or rare pattern effect determined for the selected variation pattern is executed.

Therefore, in a replay pattern, a reach promotion announcement performance may be executed after a reach selection announcement performance, a reach selection announcement performance may be executed after a reach promotion announcement performance, a reach execution announcement performance may be executed after a reach promotion announcement performance, a reach execution announcement performance may be executed after a reach execution announcement performance, a reach promotion announcement performance may be executed after a reach selection announcement performance, or a reach execution announcement performance may be executed after a reach execution announcement performance. In this way, the player can see multiple announcement performances with one change, which increases the interest.

In addition, in a replay pattern, a reach selection notice effect may be executed after a reach selection notice effect, a reach promotion notice effect may be executed after a reach promotion notice effect, or a reach execution notice effect may be executed after a reach execution notice effect. In this way, by showing the player the same notice effect multiple times in one change, it is possible to give the player a strong impression of one notice effect.

In the above example, in the redo pattern, one SP reach performance is executed first, and then one redo performance is executed, but multiple SP reach performances and multiple redo performances may be executed. Specifically, for example, when the variation pattern "SP reach 1" is selected, the SP reach performance of the variation pattern selected from the variation patterns "SP reach 1," "SP reach 2," or "SP reach 3" may be executed halfway, and then a redo performance may be executed, and then a predetermined SP reach performance may be executed halfway, and then a second redo performance may be executed, and then the SP reach performance of "SP reach 1" may be executed.

In the above example, when the redo effect is displayed, the SP reach effect that was previously executed (immediately before the redo effect is displayed) is made invisible; however, even after the redo effect is displayed, the display of the SP reach effect may be continued, for example, in a display area in a corner of the effect display device 1600 (for example, a rectangular display area that includes the bottom right corner of the effect display device 1600 and has an area of 1/10 or less of the entire area of the effect display device 1600), while the redo effect, the reach selection notice effect after the redo effect, the reach promotion notice effect, or the reach execution notice effect are displayed. Also, the size of the display of the redo effect may be made smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device 1600 without changing the size of the display of the SP reach effect, making the displayed SP reach effect recognizable.

Therefore, the Smart Ball Crane effect (details will be described later) is an effect that can be displayed as a reach-in chance-up effect during the SP reach effect, and the Smart Ball Crane effect can be displayed as a reach-in chance-up effect in the SP reach effect displayed in the display area in the corner of the effect display device 1600. In this way, the player can see the reach effect that was previously displayed, which increases the player's interest.

In addition, when the Smart Ball Croon effect, which is displayed as a reach chance up effect that can be executed during the SP reach effect, is being executed, it is possible that a preview effect including a reach selection preview effect, a reach promotion preview effect, or a reach execution preview effect may be executed multiple times (the same preview effect may be executed multiple times, or different preview effects may be executed). However, it is assumed that the reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, and reach execution preview effect will not be executed after the display of the Smart Ball Croon effect has ended.

When a specified reach performance is being executed, the reach selection notice performance may be displayed but the reach promotion notice performance may not be displayed, or the reach selection notice performance may not be displayed but the reach promotion notice performance may be displayed. Also, when a specified reach performance is being executed, the reach promotion notice performance may be displayed but the reach execution notice performance may not be displayed, or the reach promotion notice performance may not be displayed but the reach execution notice performance may be displayed. Also, when a specified reach performance is being executed, the reach execution notice performance may be displayed but the reach selection notice performance may not be displayed, or the reach execution notice performance may not be displayed but the reach selection notice performance may be displayed.

In the above example, the lottery to determine each effect to be executed in the basic pattern, rare pattern, and replay pattern is executed immediately before the start of each effect, but all lotteries to determine each effect may be executed, for example, at the start of the fluctuation.

[6-4. Winning Performance]
The winning performance will be explained. The winning performance is executed when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as the start port). However, if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 when the reserved memory number of the first special random number has reached the upper limit, and if the game ball B enters the second start port 2004 when the reserved memory number of the second special random number has reached the upper limit (entry of the game ball B into the start port in these cases is also referred to as over entry), the winning performance will not be executed.

When game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-entry), a lottery is drawn to see whether or not to execute a winning performance based on the lottery result (obtained from advance judgment information) of the ball entering the starting hole, the variation pattern selected for the variation corresponding to the ball entering the hole (obtained from advance judgment information), and a predetermined probability.

When the game ball B enters the starting hole when the special symbol change is not being performed, the winning performance is executed with a predetermined probability based on the judgment information (lottery result and change pattern information obtained in the start judgment process at the start of the special symbol change corresponding to the ball entering) rather than the pre-judgment information. The probability of executing the winning performance may differ depending on the number of reserved special random numbers, or may be the same regardless of the number of reserved special random numbers, or may differ only for some reserved numbers (for example, the probability of executing the winning performance when reserve 1 to 3 are reserved (the first to third special random numbers are reserved and stored) is the same, but the probability of executing the winning performance is high or low only when reserve 4 is reserved (the fourth special random number is reserved and stored)). Note that although the winning performance can be executed if the game ball B does not enter the starting hole as an over-entry, if the lottery result (pre-judgment information and the judgment information) based on the game ball B entering the starting hole before the ball entering is a jackpot, the ball entering will not cause the winning performance to be executed.

For example, the winning performance can be executed only when the ball enters the game corresponding to the variation selected as the variation pattern "Normal Long Reach", "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", or "SP Reach 3". For example, if the lottery result based on the ball entering the starting hole of the game ball B, excluding over entry, is a miss, the winning performance is executed with a probability of 0/256 if "Normal Long Reach" is selected as the variation pattern of the variation corresponding to the ball, with a probability of 40/256 if "SP Reach 1" is selected as the variation pattern of the variation corresponding to the ball, with a probability of 60/256 if "SP Reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern of the variation corresponding to the ball, and with a probability of 80/256 if "SP Reach 3" is selected as the variation pattern of the variation corresponding to the ball.

Also, for example, if the lottery result based on the entry of game ball B into the starting hole, excluding over entry, is a jackpot, if "normal long reach" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the entry, the winning effect is executed with a probability of 10/256, if "SP reach 1" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the entry, the winning effect is executed with a probability of 64/256, if "SP reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the entry, the winning effect is executed with a probability of 96/256, and if "SP reach 3" is selected as the variation pattern corresponding to the entry, the winning effect is executed with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, even if a winning effect has been executed, if a normal long reach is executed in the variation that was the target of the winning effect, it is confirmed that it is a jackpot. In this way, a big win is confirmed when the winning effect and the normal long reach effect are executed, but it is also possible to apply other reach effects instead of the normal long reach effect, and a win may be confirmed when the winning effect and a predetermined advance notice effect different from the winning effect are executed, rather than the winning effect and a predetermined reach effect.

In other words, whether "Normal Long Reach", "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", or "SP Reach 3" is selected as the variation pattern, the probability that the winning effect will be executed is equal to or lower than the probability that the winning effect will not be executed. Also, the jackpot expectancy of a variation corresponding to a ball that has a winning effect executed is higher than the jackpot expectancy of a variation corresponding to a ball that has not had a winning effect executed. Specifically, for example, the jackpot expectancy of an SP Reach 3 (Final Battle Reach) that has a winning effect executed is higher than the jackpot expectancy of an SP Reach 3 that has not had a winning effect executed.

The winning performance may be, for example, a performance in which the light guide plate provided in the pachinko machine 1 is illuminated in a predetermined manner, a special winning sound is output, a predetermined operation unit having a vibration speaker is vibrated, and/or a special display is made on the performance display device 1600 (for example, a zone display that is displayed from the start of the winning performance until the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, or an effect display that is displayed from the start of the winning performance and can be hidden until the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the winning). The winning performance indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the fluctuation corresponding to the winning. The performance may be displayed or output continuously until a predetermined timing after the target fluctuation starts, or a part of the performance (for example, the illumination of the light guide plate) may end before the target fluctuation starts, but a different performance (for example, a special display on the performance display device 1600) may continue even after the target fluctuation starts.

[6-5. Notice of SP Reach Performance]
Below, we will explain specific examples of the preview effects (reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, and reach execution preview effect) for the SP reach effect when the fluctuation pattern ``SP reach 1,'' ``SP reach 2,'' or ``SP reach 3'' is selected.

[6-5-1. Reach selection notice]
The reach selection notice performance, which is an example of the first special performance, will be described below. In the reach selection notice performance, the title display of three reach performances with the same jackpot expectation (shooting reach, shark fishing reach, and quoits reach, all of which are reach performances with three stars) is switched in order. The reach performance of the title displayed when a predetermined time (e.g., 8.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the reach selection notice performance is executed after the end of the reach selection notice performance.

In the reach selection preview performance, the reach title display can be switched by operating the pressing operation unit 303, but the title display of the reach performance also switches every time a predetermined time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has passed, regardless of whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated and the timing of the operation. In this way, while the player can manually switch the title display, the title display also switches automatically.

Therefore, it is possible, but not easy, for the player to operate the pressing operation unit 303 at the right time so that the reach title display that appears when a predetermined time (e.g., 8.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the reach selection preview performance becomes the title display of the reach performance desired by the player (in other words, the reach performance executed after the reach selection preview performance becomes the reach performance desired by the player).

In this way, the reach selection notice performance can provide a gameplay that makes the player think about when and how many times they should operate the pressing operation unit 303 to execute the desired reach performance, and by having the player perform such operations, the player can exercise and refresh his or her mind. In particular, although all of the reach performances that can be selected in the reach selection notice performance indicate the same likelihood of winning, the gameplay allows the player to enjoy the operation of selecting a reach performance, and the player can also enjoy the reach performance that he or she was able to select by his or her own operation.

Figure 40 shows an example of a timing chart for the reach selection notice performance. The timing chart shown in Figure 40 is a timing chart for the case where the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the reach selection notice performance.

From 0 seconds until 1 second into the reach selection preview performance, the title "Shooting Reach" is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 1 second into 1.5 seconds into the performance display device 1600, a slide display is displayed that switches from the title display of "Shooting Reach" to the title display of "Shark Fishing Reach."

While the slide display is being executed, at least a portion of the display of the reach title before the slide and at least a portion of the display of the reach title after the slide are displayed on the performance display device 1600. In other words, during the slide display from 1 second to 1.5 seconds after the start, at least a portion of the display of the title for the shooting reach and at least a portion of the display of the title for the shark fishing reach are displayed.

From 1.5 seconds to 2.5 seconds into the game, the title "Shark Fishing Reach" is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 2.5 seconds to 3 seconds into the game, a slide display is displayed on the performance display device 1600, which switches from the title display of "Shark Fishing Reach" to the title display of "Quoit Toss Reach". In this case, as above, two reach titles are displayed (the title display of "Shark Fishing Reach" and the title display of "Quoit Toss Reach").

From 3 seconds to 4 seconds into the game, the title "Quoits Reach" is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 4 seconds to 4.5 seconds into the game, a slide display is displayed on the performance display device 1600, switching from the title display of "Quoits Reach" to the title display of "Shooting Reach". In this case, two reach titles are displayed (title display of "Quoits Reach" and title display of "Shooting Reach") in the same manner as above. From 4.5 seconds into the game, the title of "Shooting Reach" is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the same display as from 0 seconds into the game is repeated. In other words, the reach selection preview performance displays a periodic cycle of 4.5 seconds per cycle.

By repeating the periodic display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the displays contained in the periodic display, and these displays are more likely to leave an impression on the player. In other words, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the display of each reach title and each slide in the reach selection preview performance.

In this way, the reach title display is displayed for 1 second, and then the slide display to the next reach title is displayed for 0.5 seconds, and this display is repeated until 8.5 seconds have passed since the reach selection preview performance began. Note that the 8.5 seconds from the start of the reach selection preview performance is the valid operation period for the pressing operation unit 303.

As shown in the example of Figure 40, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the reach selection preview performance, the title of the Quoits Reach is displayed on the performance display device 1600 8.5 seconds after the start of the reach selection preview performance (the end of the effective operation period), and therefore the Quoits Reach is selected as the reach performance to be executed after the end of the reach selection preview performance.

From 8.5 seconds until 9.5 seconds into the reach selection preview performance, a confirmation display of the reach performance selected as the reach performance to be executed after the end of the reach selection preview performance (a confirmation display of the quoits reach in the example of Figure 40) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 9.5 seconds into the reach selection preview performance, the reach performance selected in the reach selection preview performance (quoits reach in the example of Figure 40) is executed.

Figures 41 and 42 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a reach selection notice performance. Figures 41 and 42 show an example of a performance when the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the reach selection notice performance. Figure 41 (A) shows the state when the reach selection notice performance has started. From the start of the reach selection notice performance until the reach to be executed is decided (that is, from the start of the reach selection notice performance until 8.5 seconds have passed since the start of the reach selection notice performance, which is also during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303), the performance display device 1600 displays a reach title display frame 1651 inside which displays the reach title (and stars indicating the expectation level of that reach), a button image 1633 that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a gauge 1634 that indicates the remaining time of the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303.

In FIG. 41(A), the title of the shooting reach, which is an example of the first special display, and stars indicating the expectation level are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651. Note that the display area on the performance display device 1600 for displaying the area defined by the reach title display frame 1651 and the inside of the reach title display frame 1651 is an example of a special area that is part of the display area of the performance display device 1600.

In FIG. 41(B), a slide display from the title display of the shooting reach (and stars indicating the expectation level) to the title display of the shark fishing reach (and stars indicating the expectation level) is displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651. In the slide display, the reach title before the slide appears to disappear to the left of the reach title display frame 1651, and the reach title after the slide appears from the right side of the reach title display frame 1651. Also, as described above, during the slide display period, at least a part of the reach title before the slide and at least a part of the reach title after the slide are visible. Note that the amount of the gauge 1634 decreases according to the remaining time of the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 from FIG. 41(A) to FIG. 42(G) described later. Note that the shape (outline) and size of the reach title display frame 1651 do not change when the slide display or the slide display described later is being performed.

In Figure 41 (C), the slide display in Figure 41 (B) has ended, and the title of Shark Fishing Reach, which is an example of the second special display, and stars indicating the degree of expectation are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651. Even if the reach title displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651 changes (the same applies to Figure 41 (E) described below), the shape (outer lines) and size of the reach title display frame 1651 do not change. Note that the reach title display frame 1651 may be made up of straight lines only, as shown in Figure 41 etc., or it may be made up of straight lines and curves, or it may be made up of curves only.

In Figure 41 (D), a slide display is displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651, from the title display of Shark Fishing Reach to the title display of Quoits Reach. In Figure 41 (E), the slide display of Figure 41 (D) ends, and the title of Quoits Reach and stars indicating the degree of expectation are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651. In Figure 41 (F), a slide display is displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651, from the title display of Quoits Reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation) to the title display of Shooting Reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation).

In FIG. 42(G), the slide display in FIG. 41(F) has ended, and the title of Quoits Reach and stars indicating the degree of expectation are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651. In FIG. 42(G), the display has returned to the same as in FIG. 41(A), except for the remaining time of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, indicated by the gauge 1634. As mentioned above, until 8.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the reach selection notice performance, the same performances as in FIG. 41(A) to FIG. 41(F) are repeated (however, the remaining time of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, indicated by the gauge 1634, decreases).

Figure 42 (H) shows the state where 8.5 seconds have passed since the start of the reach selection notice performance, i.e., the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 has ended. As described above, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the reach selection notice performance, the title of the Quoits Reach and a star indicating the expectation level are displayed when the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 ends, and Quoits Reach is selected as the reach performance for the winning/losing performance.

In Figure 42 (H), the quoits reach decision display is displayed across the entire display area of the performance display device 1600. In this decision display, the title of the quoits reach and stars indicating the expectation level are enlarged and the reach title display frame 1651 is hidden (the button image 1633 and gauge 1634 are hidden when the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 ends, that is, when the decision display is displayed). When one second has elapsed since the start of the display of the quoits reach decision display, the reach selection preview performance ends and the quoits reach is executed.

In the above example, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is always valid during the reach selection preview performance, but there may be a period during which the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not valid during the reach selection preview performance. For example, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 may not be valid until a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display of FIG. 41(A) begins, or the title of the reach selection preview performance may be displayed for a predetermined time at the start of the reach selection preview performance, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 may not be valid during the title display period. In addition, the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 may end just before the end of the reach selection preview performance (e.g., 0.5 seconds remaining).

Figure 43 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the reach selection notice performance. Figure 43 shows an example of the performance when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the reach selection notice performance. Figure 43 (B2) shows a state in which a performance similar to that of Figure 41 (B) is being performed, that is, a sliding display is displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651 from the title display of the shooting reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation) to the title display of the shark fishing reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation).

Figure 43 (C2) shows the state in Figure 43 (B2) where the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated. If the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the effective operation period of the reach selection preview performance, a new slide display will be performed even if the reach title is being displayed or a slide display is being displayed.

In FIG. 43 (B2), a slide display is being performed from the title display of the shooting reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation) to the title display of the shark fishing reach (and stars indicating the degree of expectation), and when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated at this time, a slide display is started in FIG. 43 (C2) to the title display of the quoits reach, which is displayed next to the title display of the shark fishing reach (the title display after the slide in the slide display).

Figure 43 (D2) shows a state in which the slide display of the title display of the Quoits Reach continues due to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. In the slide display due to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, at least a part of the title display of the Shooting Reach and at least a part of the title display of the Shark Fishing Reach are displayed in Figure 43 (C2), and at least a part of the title display of the Shark Fishing Reach and at least a part of the title display of the Quoits Reach are displayed in Figure 43 (D2), but there are also cases in which at least a part of the title display of the Shooting Reach, at least a part of the title display of the Shark Fishing Reach, and at least a part of the title display of the Quoits Reach are displayed simultaneously. Specifically, if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated immediately after the start of the slide display, a new slide display will start, and in such a case, three reach titles will be displayed. For example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly, three or more reach titles may be displayed simultaneously, or, to prevent three or more reach titles from being displayed simultaneously, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 may be considered valid but not reflected in the presentation.

The slide display that is executed in response to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 starts, for example, when the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected, and continues for 0.5 seconds from the start timing.

Figure 43 (E2) shows a state in which the sliding display of the Quoits Reach title display as a result of the pressing operation unit 303 being operated has ended, and the Quoits Reach title display (and the display of stars indicating the degree of expectation) is being performed, with the same presentation as in Figure 41 (E) being performed (except for the remaining time of the valid operation period indicated by the gauge 1634).

If a slide display is being performed 8.5 seconds after the reach selection preview performance begins (the end of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303), the reach performance corresponding to the reach title that was scheduled to be displayed immediately after the end of the slide display is selected as the reach performance for the winning or losing performance. In other words, for example, if the slide display of FIG. 43 (B2) is being performed 8.5 seconds after the reach selection preview performance begins, the shark fishing reach is selected as the reach performance for the winning or losing performance, and if the slide display of FIG. 43 (C2) or FIG. 43 (D2) is being performed 8.5 seconds after the reach selection preview performance begins, the quoits reach is selected as the reach performance for the winning or losing performance.

In the examples of Figures 41 to 43, the reach selection notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, but the reach selection notice performance may also be executed while the decorative symbols are not in a reach state (for example, it may be before the reach state is formed, or it may be a state in which the reach state is formed but the left decorative symbol and the center decorative symbol that form the reach state are not visible). If the reach selection notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, the player can enjoy the reach selection notice performance with heightened expectations, and if the reach selection notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are not in a reach state, the player can concentrate on the reach selection notice performance without being distracted by the reach state.

In addition, in the examples of Figures 41 to 43, the reach selection preview performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and a pending display corresponding to the pending change are displayed, but the reach selection preview performance may be executed while only one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is displayed, or the reach selection preview performance may be executed while neither is displayed.

If the reach selection notice performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to the ongoing change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach selection notice performance while recognizing the degree of expectation of that change indicated by the pending display, and if the reach selection notice performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to a pending change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach selection notice performance for the ongoing change while looking forward to the next or subsequent changes.

In addition, if the reach selection notice performance is executed while at least one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is not displayed, the player can concentrate on the reach selection notice performance without being distracted by the pending display of at least one of the changes.

As an example of an expectation effect that indicates the expected jackpot probability of the ongoing fluctuations and is different from the reach selection notice effect, there is a display of a shooting star (different from the star indicating the expected probability displayed with the reach title, and displayed in a different display mode from the star indicating the expected probability) flowing as a background display on the effect display device 1600. The display of the shooting star flowing can also be executed while the reach selection notice effect is being executed. By executing the display of the shooting star flowing during the execution of the reach selection notice effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation during the reach selection notice effect. Also, the reach selection notice effect may be executed when the display of the shooting star flowing is displayed.

When the reach selection notice performance is being executed, a specific one of the multiple movable bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 may be operable, and for example, the operation of the specific movable body may increase the chance of winning (i.e., the expectation of a jackpot increases when the specific movable body operates).

When the display of the reach title displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance changes (for example, when a sliding display is made from the Shooting Reach title to Shark Fishing Reach, and/or when a sliding display is being made (such as in FIG. 41 (B))), it is desirable that a sound corresponding to the change is not output. If a sound corresponding to the change were to be output, there is a risk that the player would be given unnecessary expectations even though there is no difference in the likelihood of a jackpot when the display of the reach title displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance changes.

However, a specified sound may be output when the title Shooting Reach is displayed in the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance. In the reach selection preview performance, a cyclic display is performed in which the display of three reach titles is repeated, and since the Shooting Reach is the first display in the cycle display, a specified sound may be output when the title Shooting Reach is displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the cycle has completed one cycle (or that the cycle has started).

Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a star change effect executed during a reach selection notice performance. As mentioned above, when the game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), a winning effect can be executed. However, when the game ball B enters the starting hole during a reach selection notice performance (excluding over-winning), not only a winning effect but also a star change effect, which is an example of a second special effect (an effect including a display of a decrease in black stars and a display of rotating black stars), can be executed. Note that, as described above, since the reach selection notice performance may be executable when the decorative pattern does not form a reach state, the star change effect that can be executed during the reach selection notice performance may also be executable when the decorative pattern does not form a reach state.

When game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance (excluding over-winning), whether the fluctuation for which the reach selection notice performance is being performed is a jackpot fluctuation or a miss fluctuation, and whether the star change performance will be performed is determined by a lottery based on a predetermined allocation.

For example, during the reach selection notice performance that is executed in a jackpot fluctuation, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the star change performance is executed with a distribution of 64/256, and the star change performance is not executed with a distribution of 192/256. Also, for example, during the reach selection notice performance that is executed in a miss fluctuation, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the star change performance is executed with a distribution of 255/256, and the star change performance is not executed with a distribution of 1/256.

Therefore, when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance (excluding over-entry), if the star change performance is executed, the expected jackpot probability of the fluctuation during execution is 0.08%, and if the star change performance is not executed, the expected jackpot probability of the fluctuation during execution is 37.65%. In other words, the expected jackpot probability of the fluctuation during execution is higher when the star change performance is not executed than when the star change performance is executed during the reach selection notice performance.

The rate of miss fluctuations is much higher than the rate of hit fluctuations, and when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance during a miss fluctuation (excluding over-winning), the star change performance is executed with an extremely high rate, so when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance (excluding over-winning), the star change performance is executed with an extremely high rate.

Details will be given later, but in the star change performance, the number of black stars displayed decreases, and the black stars rotate. Therefore, if the star change performance is not executed when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice performance (excluding over-entry), that is, if the number of black stars does not decrease and the black stars do not rotate, this suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In Fig. 44(A), 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the reach selection notice performance, and the pressing operation unit 303 has not been operated, and the same performance as in Fig. 41(C) is being performed. In Fig. 44(B), in the state of Fig. 44(A), game ball B has entered the starting hole (not an over-entry), so it has been decided that a star change performance should be performed, and the star change performance is being performed.

In the star change effect, the number of black stars displayed, which indicate the degree of expectation of a reach effect, is reduced by one. Specifically, in FIG. 44(B), an effect is displayed on the black star displayed on the far right side inside the reach title display frame 1651, and the black star changes to a white star.

Furthermore, in the star change performance, a rotating display is performed of black stars (except those that have been changed to white stars) that indicate the degree of expectation of a reach performance. As shown in FIG. 44(B), a rotating display is performed of black stars displayed inside the reach title display frame 1651 (note that in FIG. 44(B) to FIG. 44(D), semicircular arrows are drawn around the black stars, but this is to clearly show that the black stars are rotating towards or away from the performance display device 1600, and the arrows are not actually displayed on the performance display device 1600). Note that the reach selection notice performance continues even while the star change performance is being performed.

In Figure 44(C), the star change effect has progressed further, and the black star indicating the expectation of the reach effect has rotated further. In Figure 44(D), the star change effect has progressed further, and the black star indicating the expectation of the reach effect has rotated further and completed exactly one rotation (i.e., the black star has returned to its original display).

In addition, the rotation of the black stars in the star-changing performance continues even after the black stars have completed one rotation. In other words, the star-changing performance includes a cyclic display that is repeated periodically. This cyclic display makes it easier for the player to recognize the display of black stars after the number of stars in the star-changing performance has been changed (i.e., the degree of expectation after the change).

As mentioned above, the confirmation display of the selected reach is displayed 8.5 seconds after the reach selection notice performance begins, but when the confirmation display is displayed while the star change performance is being executed, it is recommended to make the rotating black star (cycle display) in the star change performance invisible (before the reach performance indicated by the confirmation display begins), and then return the star indicating the expectation level to the state it was in before the star change performance began. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the reach title indicated by the confirmation display.

On the other hand, even if the confirmation display is displayed while the star-changing performance is being executed, the rotating black star in the star-changing performance may be displayed, and the rotating black star may be made semi-transparent and hidden at the time when the reach performance indicated by the confirmation display starts. In other words, the rotating black star is displayed even when the reach performance is being executed.

In addition, even if the confirmation display is displayed while the star change performance is being executed, the black star in the star change performance may be displayed in a rotating manner, and the rotating black star may be hidden at the point when the reach performance indicated by the confirmation display starts.

The star change performance may also be displayed until the end of the ongoing variation. In this case, the reach performance may be performed while shrinking all of the display inside the reach title display frame 1651 and displaying it in a corner of the performance display device 1600 (for example, a rectangular display area including the bottom right corner of the performance display device 1600 and having an area of 1/10 or less of the entire area of the performance display device 1600), or the reach performance may be performed while shrinking only the rotating display of the black stars inside the reach title display frame 1651 and displaying it in a corner of the performance display device 1600. In either pattern, the size of the display may not change but the display position may change, or the size of the display may not change but the display position may change.

The rotation period (one cycle) of the black stars is, for example, 4.5 seconds, the same as one cycle in the reach selection announcement performance as a cyclical display. In this way, if the length of one cycle is the same, the player can be made to think that there may be some kind of relationship between the periodic rotation of the black stars and the periodic display of the reach selection announcement, which increases interest. Also, the rotation period (one cycle) of the black stars may be, for example, longer or shorter than one cycle in the reach selection announcement performance as a cyclical display.

If one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cycle display is longer, the player can concentrate on selecting the reach performance, and if the rotation period (one cycle) of the black star is longer, the player can easily notice that the black star is rotating. However, regardless of whether the rotation period (one cycle) of the black star or one cycle in the reach selection preview performance as a cycle display is longer, it is preferable that the longer cycle (one cycle) is shorter than the shorter cycle (two cycles).

In addition, in the star change performance, there may be multiple display modes of the stars indicating the expectation of the reach performance, and the expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on the display mode selected from the multiple display modes. For example, the multiple display modes may include multiple display modes in which the rotating stars are the same color but have different rotation speeds, multiple display modes in which the rotating stars are the same rotation speed but different colors, or multiple display modes in which the stars indicating the expectation of the reach performance have different colors and rotation speeds.

As shown in Figures 44(B) to 44(D), in the star-changing performance, the black star rotates towards you or towards you in the direction towards you on the performance display device 1600 (more precisely, the display appears to rotate in three dimensions on a two-dimensional display surface), so while this rotation is taking place (i.e., during the cycle display), the outline line (shape) of the black star displayed on the performance display device 1600 changes (for example, the outline line of the star becomes squashed vertically or returns to its original shape).

Note that pending displays corresponding to changes that are in progress and pending displays corresponding to changes that are on hold may be dynamically cycled with a predetermined time period as one cycle (e.g., these pending displays rotate), but unlike the rotating black star display in the star-changing performance, the outer lines of these pending displays may not change even while the cycling display is being performed, or, like the rotating black star display in the star-changing performance, the outer lines of the pending displays may change while the cycling display is being performed.

Also, as mentioned above, since the reach selection notice performance may be executable when the hold display is displayed, the star change performance that can be executed during the reach selection notice performance may also be executable when the hold display is displayed. Therefore, the black star in the star change performance and the hold display may be displayed simultaneously and both may be displayed in a cycle display with a changing outer line, or the black star in the star change performance and the hold display may be displayed simultaneously, but the black star in the star change performance may be displayed in a cycle display with a changing outer line and the hold display may be displayed in a cycle display with an unchanging outer line.

The rotation (cycle display) of the black star in the star change performance is performed inside the reach title display frame 1651 as described above, so that the player does not have to move his/her gaze from the reach title display frame 1651. The rotation (cycle display) of the black star in the star change performance may be displayed so as to straddle the inside and outside of the reach title display frame 1651, or may be displayed outside the reach title display frame 1651. Also, for example, the rotation (cycle display) of the black star in the star change performance may be highlighted outside the reach title display frame 1651 (for example, by making the rotation (cycle display) of the black star larger, or by displaying the rotation (cycle display) of the black star for one or more revolutions), and then may be displayed back inside the reach title display frame 1651, or it may be highlighted only outside the reach title display frame 1651 (without returning to the inside). Such a performance with highlighting can appeal to the player with the rotation of the black star.

Even after the number of black stars displayed, which indicate the expectation of a reach effect, is changed from three to two by the star change effect, when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice effect (excluding over-winning), a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the star change effect, and if it is decided that the star change effect will be executed, a performance is performed in which the number of black stars displayed, which indicate the expectation of a reach effect, is changed from two to one in the star change effect. After the number of black stars displayed, which indicates the expectation of a reach effect, is changed to one by the star change effect, even if game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach selection notice effect, a lottery is not held to determine whether or not to execute the star change effect, i.e., the star change effect is not performed.

In the example of the star change performance described above, the number of displayed black stars indicating the expectation of the reach performance is decreased by one (black stars change to white stars), but in the star change performance, the number of displayed black stars indicating the expectation of the reach performance may be increased by one (white stars change to black stars). In this case, only the stars that change from white to black in the star change performance may rotate periodically as described above (i.e., the outer line changes). Specifically, for example, when a star changes from 3 to 4 in the star change performance, the fourth white star from the left changes to a black star, and only the changed star rotates.

In addition, when the fourth white star from the left in the star change performance changes to a black star (i.e. the expectation of the reach performance changes from 3 stars to 4 stars) and the changed fourth star from the left is rotating, if it is decided to execute a further star change performance when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over entry), a new star change performance will be executed while the star is rotating. In other words, while the fourth black star from the left is rotating, the fifth white star from the left changes to a black star (i.e. the expectation of the reach performance changes from 4 stars to 5 stars), and the changed fifth star from the left also rotates periodically as described above (i.e. the outer line changes).

At this time, it is desirable to display the rotation cycle of the fifth black star from the left in the star change performance that starts later to match the rotation cycle of the fourth black star from the left in the star change performance that started earlier (i.e., the cycles of these two stars are not out of sync). This makes it easier for the player to recognize that both of the rotating stars are stars that have changed due to the star change performance, and makes it easier for the player to recognize that the original expectation level was three stars. Note that in the star change performance during one fluctuation, there is no decrease in which a black star becomes a white star, and no increase in which a white star becomes a black star. Also, when an increase in which a white star becomes a black star occurs, the star showing the original expectation level may also be displayed in a rotational display (cyclic display).

When the above-mentioned redo pattern is selected, if game ball B enters the starting hole while the reach selection notice performance is being executed first (excluding an over win), the star change performance starts and the rotating display (cycle display) of black stars begins, and even if the reach selection notice performance ends and the redo performance starts, the rotating display (cycle display) of black stars in the star change performance continues to be displayed, and even if the reach selection notice performance that is executed again after the redo performance starts, the rotating display (cycle display) of black stars in the star change performance continues to be displayed. In this way, even if the reach selection notice performance that is executed first ends, the rotating display of black stars in the star change performance continues, so the player can recognize that the "redo pattern" has been selected.

In a redo pattern, when a reach selection notice performance is executed again after a redo performance, the position of the spinning black star in the star change performance may continue to be displayed without change (from the position where the black star was displayed when the previous reach selection notice performance before the redo performance was executed), or the spinning black star may be hidden. By continuing to display the black star but not changing its display position, the continuously displayed black star looks better. Also, if a redo performance is executed multiple times in one change, an appropriate combination of continuing to display/not displaying the spinning black star at the end of the first reach selection notice performance and continuing to display/not displaying the spinning black star at the end of the second reach selection notice performance may be executed.

If the lottery to decide whether or not to execute the winning effect has been won (and the winning effect has not yet been executed), the winning effect will be cancelled if the lottery is won under the following conditions with the following specified probability. The lottery to decide whether or not to cancel the winning effect and the cancellation process are carried out, for example, after the lottery to decide whether or not to execute the star change effect.

Specifically, for example, if the current fluctuation is a miss fluctuation and the lottery result is that the star change effect is executed, the winning effect is canceled with a probability of 0/256 (it may be 1/256, i.e., there may be a possibility that the winning effect is canceled); if the current fluctuation is a miss fluctuation and the lottery result is that the star change effect is not executed, the winning effect is canceled with a probability of 128/256; if the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation and the lottery result is that the star change effect is executed, the winning effect is canceled with a probability of 256/256 (it may be 255/256, i.e., there may be a possibility that the winning effect is not canceled); if the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation and the lottery result is that the star change effect is not executed, the winning effect is canceled with a probability of 256/256 (it may be 255/256, i.e., there may be a possibility that the winning effect is not canceled).

In other words, if the current variation is a losing variation and a lottery result has been obtained in which a star change effect is executed, if a lottery result is obtained in which a winning effect is executed, the winning effect will always be executed without being canceled. In this way, if the above lottery result is obtained in a losing variation, the winning effect will always be executed in addition to the star change effect, so that the player's sense of anticipation can be sufficiently heightened even in the case of a losing variation.

Also, if the current variation is a losing variation and a lottery result is obtained in which the star change effect will not be executed, when a lottery result in which a winning effect will be executed is obtained, the winning effect may or may not be executed. If the star change effect is not executed in a losing variation, the player's expectations are not high, and the winning effect may be executed, which can increase the player's expectations, or the winning effect may not be executed, which allows the player to proceed calmly without unnecessarily increasing their expectations. In other words, the player's expectations can be balanced.

In addition, if the variation being performed is a jackpot variation, regardless of the lottery result of whether or not a star change effect will be executed, if the lottery result indicates that a winning effect will be executed, the winning effect will be canceled (not executed). In a jackpot variation, there is a high possibility that many effects that heighten the player's sense of anticipation and tension will be executed for a long period of time, so by canceling the winning effect in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of anticipation and tension from being increased to an extreme degree.

[6-5-2. Reach promotion notice]
The following describes the reach promotion notice performance, which is an example of the first specific performance. Figure 45 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the reach promotion notice performance. Specifically, Figure 45 (A), Figure 45 (B), and Figure 45 (C) are examples of timing charts of the reach promotion notice performance when the goldfish scooping reach, the dart reach, and the bell throwing reach are selected as the reach performance as the winning or losing performance. The execution timing of the first specific performance can be executed at various times before the reach performance is executed, such as simultaneously with the start of the fluctuation, between the start of the fluctuation and the pseudo consecutive, between the pseudo consecutive, or during the normal reach.

First, the timing chart in Figure 45 (A) will be described, that is, the timing chart of the reach promotion notice performance when the goldfish scooping reach is selected as the reach performance for the winning/losing performance. From 0 seconds to 1 second after the start of the reach promotion notice performance, a blackout display is performed on the performance display device 1600. From 1 second to 2 seconds after the start, a reach title fade-in display is performed on the performance display device 1600, in which the blackout display gradually becomes brighter and the reach title gradually becomes visible (for example, the fade-in ends at the start of 2 seconds). Note that here, a reach title fade-in display of the title of Goldfish Scooping Reach is performed.

From 2 seconds to 3 seconds into the game, the reach title of the goldfish scooping reach is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 3 seconds to 4 seconds into the game, a confirmation display of the goldfish scooping reach, which is the reach performance selected as the reach performance to be executed after the reach promotion notice performance ends, is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the reach promotion notice performance ends 4 seconds into the game. When the reach promotion notice performance ends, the goldfish scooping reach, which is the reach performance indicated by the confirmation display, is executed.

Next, we will explain the timing chart in Figure 45 (B), that is, the timing chart of the reach promotion notice performance when the dart reach is selected as the reach performance for the winning or losing performance. From 0 seconds to 3 seconds into the reach promotion notice performance, the same performance as in Figure 45 (A) is performed.

From 3 seconds to 4 seconds into the game, the reach title of Dart Reach is displayed on the performance display device 1600; that is, the title of a reach with a higher expectation than Goldfish Scooping Reach is displayed (it has been promoted to a reach with a higher expectation). From 4 seconds to 5 seconds into the game, the decision display of Dart Reach, which is the reach effect selected as the reach effect to be executed after the end of the reach promotion notice effect, is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the reach promotion notice effect ends 5 seconds into the game. When the reach promotion notice effect ends, Dart Reach, which is the reach effect indicated by the decision display, is executed.

When changing from the display of the reach title of the goldfish scooping reach to the display of the reach title of the dirt reach, the change may be made by displaying a specified effect display etc. so as to overlap the display of the reach title of the goldfish scooping reach before the change, or the change may be made without displaying the specified effect display etc. When a specified effect display etc. is performed, it may be displayed so as to overlap the display of the reach title of the dirt reach after the change. It is preferable that the time during which the reach title and effect of the goldfish scooping reach before the change are displayed is shorter than the time during which only the reach title of the goldfish scooping reach before the change is displayed (it can be longer). It is also preferable that the time during which the reach title and effect of the dirt reach after the change are displayed is shorter than the time during which only the reach title of the dirt reach after the change is displayed (it can be longer).

Next, we will explain the timing chart of Figure 45 (C), that is, the timing chart of the reach promotion announcement performance when the bell throwing reach is selected as the reach performance for the winning/losing performance. From 0 seconds to 4 seconds after the start of the reach promotion announcement performance, the same performance as in Figure 45 (B) is performed. Note that when changing from the display of the goldfish scooping reach reach title to the display of the dart reach reach title, the display and display time of the aforementioned effect display etc. may be applied.

From 4 seconds to 5 seconds after the start, the reach title of Bell Throw Reach is displayed on the performance display device 1600, that is, the title of a reach with a higher expectation than Dart Reach is displayed (it has been promoted to a reach with a higher expectation). From 5 seconds to 6 seconds after the start, a confirmation display of Bell Throw Reach, which is the reach effect selected as the reach effect to be executed after the reach promotion notice effect ends, is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and 6 seconds after the start, the reach promotion notice effect ends. When the reach promotion notice effect ends, the bell throw reach, which is the reach effect indicated by the confirmation display, is executed. Note that when changing from the display of the reach title of Dart Reach to the display of the reach title of Bell Throw Reach, the display and display time of the aforementioned effect display may be applied.

In this way, in the reach promotion preview performance, after a blackout display and a fade-in display, the title of the Goldfish Scooping Reach, which has the lowest chance of winning (among the reach performances as the winning/losing performances selected in the variation pattern "SP Reach 2"), is displayed first, but then a hotter reach performance (a reach performance with a high chance of winning) is executed as the title display changes. Therefore, the player watches the reach promotion preview performance while wishing "for the title display to change!", increasing the player's interest.

The aforementioned reach selection notice effect is displayed when the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is enabled, but the reach promotion notice effect is displayed when the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not enabled. This increases the variety of effects, allowing players to enjoy a variety of effects. Note that the reach promotion notice effect may also be displayed when the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is enabled.

Figures 46 and 47 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a reach promotion notice performance. Figure 46 (A) shows the state in which the reach promotion notice performance has started, with a blackout display being displayed on the performance display device 1600. Note that in Figure 46 (A), even when the blackout display is being performed, the decorative pattern, the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change, and the pending display corresponding to the pending change are displayed, but the decorative pattern may also be blacked out and hidden, or at least one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change may also be blacked out and hidden.

In the example of Figure 46 (A), when the reach promotion notice performance starts, a blackout display is suddenly displayed on the performance display device 1600, but it is also possible to gradually transition to the state of Figure 46 (A) (gradually lowering the brightness of the performance display device 1600 and finally displaying a blackout), or to use a whiteout display or a display of the shutters closing instead of the blackout display. Note that if a whiteout display or a display of the shutters closing is used instead of the blackout display, the reach title fade-in display in Figure 46 (B) described below will be a display corresponding to that.

In FIG. 46(B), the reach title fade-in display is being performed. In FIG. 46(B), the blackout gradually becomes brighter, and the reach title display frame 1652 and the title of the goldfish scooping reach and the stars indicating the expectation level displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652 gradually become visible. If the decorative pattern, the reserved display corresponding to the ongoing change, and the reserved display corresponding to the pending change are hidden at the stage of FIG. 46(A), the reach title fade-in display may gradually make the decorative pattern, the reserved display corresponding to the ongoing change, and the reserved display corresponding to the pending change visible, or may gradually make a part of it visible (for example, the decorative pattern and the reserved display corresponding to the ongoing change are gradually made visible, but the reserved display corresponding to the pending change remains hidden). In addition, the display area on the performance display device 1600 for displaying the area defined by the reach title display frame 1652 and the inside of the reach title display frame 1652 is an example of a specific area that is a part of the display area of the performance display device 1600.

The reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion notice performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection notice performance described above may be displayed at the same position, and may also have the same display size. This prevents the player from missing the reach title display frame 1651 and the reach title display frame 1652. The reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion notice performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection notice performance described above may have the same display size but different display positions, or the display size and display position may be different. At least a part of the display position of the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion notice performance and at least a part of the display position of the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection notice performance described above may overlap, or may not overlap. In addition, the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion preview performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the previously described reach selection preview performance may be displayed in an area encompassed by an area in which the other is displayed.

In FIG. 46(C), the Goldfish Scooping Reach title is displayed; that is, the title of the Goldfish Scooping Reach, which is an example of the first specific display, and stars indicating the expectation level are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652.

When the goldfish scooping reach is selected as the reach effect for the winning/losing effect, a transition occurs from FIG. 46 (C) to FIG. 47 (D2). In FIG. 47 (D2), a confirmation display of the goldfish scooping reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the confirmation display, the title of the determined reach and stars indicating the expected level are enlarged and the reach title display frame 1652 is hidden. When one second has elapsed since the start of the confirmation display of the goldfish scooping reach in FIG. 47 (D2), the reach promotion notice effect ends and the goldfish scooping reach is executed.

When a dart reach or bell toss reach is selected as the reach effect for the winning or losing effect, a transition occurs from FIG. 46(C) to FIG. 47(D1). In FIG. 47(D1), the dart reach title is displayed, that is, the title of the dart reach, which is an example of the second specific display, and stars indicating the expectation level are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652. When a dart reach is selected as the reach effect for the winning or losing effect, a transition occurs from FIG. 47(D1) to FIG. 47(E2). In FIG. 47(E2), a decision display for the dart reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When one second has elapsed since the start of the decision display for the dart reach in FIG. 47(E2), the reach promotion notice effect ends and the dart reach is executed.

When the bell throw reach is selected as the reach effect for the winning/losing effect, a transition occurs from FIG. 47 (D1) to FIG. 47 (E1). In FIG. 47 (E1), the bell throw reach title is displayed, that is, the title of the bell throw reach and stars indicating the expectation level are displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652. In FIG. 47 (F), the confirmation display of the bell throw reach is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When one second has elapsed since the start of the confirmation display of the bell throw reach in FIG. 47 (F), the reach promotion notice effect ends and the bell throw reach is executed.

In the examples of Figures 46 and 47, the reach promotion preview performance is executed while the decorative symbols are forming a reach state, but the reach promotion preview performance may also be executed while the decorative symbols are not forming a reach state (for example, it may be before the reach state is formed, or it may be in a state where the reach state is formed but the left decorative symbol and center decorative symbol forming the reach state are not visible).

If the reach promotion preview performance is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, the player can enjoy the reach promotion preview performance with growing anticipation, and if the reach promotion preview performance is executed while the decorative symbols are not in a reach state, the player can concentrate on the reach promotion preview performance without being distracted by the reach state.

In the examples of Figures 46 and 47, the reach promotion preview performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and a pending display corresponding to the pending change are displayed, but the reach promotion preview performance may be executed while only one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is displayed, or the reach promotion preview performance may be executed while neither is displayed.

If a reach promotion preview performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to an ongoing change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach promotion preview performance while recognizing the degree of expectation of that change indicated by the pending display, and if a reach promotion preview performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to a pending change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach promotion preview performance for the ongoing change while looking forward to the next or subsequent changes.

In addition, if the reach promotion preview performance is executed while at least one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is not displayed, the player can concentrate on the reach promotion preview performance without being distracted by the pending display.

The aforementioned display of shooting stars as an expected effect (an expected effect different from the reach promotion announcement effect) can also be executed while the reach promotion announcement effect is being executed. By executing the display of shooting stars while the reach promotion announcement effect is being executed, the sense of anticipation during the reach promotion announcement effect can be increased. Also, the reach promotion announcement effect may be executed when the display of shooting stars is displayed.

When the reach selection notice performance is being executed, a specific movable body among the multiple movable bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 is operable, and when the specific movable body operates, the chances increase, but it is desirable that the specific movable body is unable to operate when the reach promotion notice performance is being executed. The reach promotion notice performance is a performance that itself increases the expectation level, so there is no need to increase the chances by the movement of the movable body, but in the reach selection notice performance, one of the reach performances with the same expectation level is selected, so the player's expectations are increased if there is a chance increase performance due to the movement of the movable body.

It is possible to make it impossible to operate the specified movable body when the reach selection preview performance is being executed, but to make it possible to operate the specified movable body when the reach promotion preview performance is being executed, or to make it possible or impossible to operate the specified movable body both when the reach selection preview performance is being executed and when the reach promotion preview performance is being executed.

When the operation of a specified movable body is enabled, the operation of the specified movable body may be started when the reach selection notice performance or the reach promotion notice performance is being executed, or the specified movable body may be operated before the reach selection notice performance and/or the reach promotion notice performance is executed, and the reach selection notice performance or the reach promotion notice performance may be started when the specified movable body is operating.

As mentioned above, when the display of the reach title displayed within the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance changes (for example, when it changes from the title Shooting Reach to the title Shark Fishing Reach), it is desirable that a sound corresponding to the change is not output, but when the display of the reach title displayed within the reach title display frame 1652 during the reach promotion preview performance changes (for example, when it changes from the title Goldfish Scooping Reach to the title Dart Reach), it is desirable that a sound corresponding to the change is output.

In the reach promotion preview performance, when the reach title displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652 changes, the likelihood of a jackpot increases, so the sound makes the player more aware of the increased likelihood of a jackpot, giving him or her a sense of elation. However, it is also possible to prevent the sound corresponding to the change from being output at the time of the change, in which case only the player can detect it (other players cannot tell by the sound), which has the effect of entertaining only the player who is playing (reducing the embarrassment of missing).

In addition, during the reach promotion announcement performance, the star rotation performance described below may be executed. In the star rotation performance executed during the reach promotion announcement performance, the stars indicating the expectation level displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652 are displayed in the same manner as the star change performance executed during the reach selection announcement performance (however, the performance in which the black stars decrease (indicating a decrease in the expectation level) is not executed).

In other words, in the star spinning performance, a cyclical display is performed in which a black star displayed within the reach title display frame 1652 spins with or without an effect display (the outline of the black star changes while it is spinning). However, the period of the cyclical display of the black star in the star spinning performance (i.e. the time it takes for the black star to complete one rotation) is, for example, 2.0 seconds, the same as the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview performance (goldfish scooping reach title display, dart reach title display, and bell throwing reach title display).

The cycle of the cyclical display of black stars in the star rotation performance is the same as the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview performance, so that the reach title display changes every time the cyclical display of black stars completes exactly one revolution, and the reach performance is ultimately executed when the black stars complete one revolution, allowing the player to understand the timing of the change in the reach title display and the timing of the execution of the reach performance, thereby reducing the player's sense of tension.

The period in which the cyclical display of black stars in the star spinning performance may be longer or shorter than the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview performance. If the period in which the cyclical display of black stars in the star spinning performance is longer than the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview performance, the cyclical display of black stars in the star spinning performance will continue for at least one cycle during the display period of each reach title display, thereby reducing the player's tension regarding the reach performance.

On the other hand, if the period of the cyclical display of black stars in the star spinning performance is shorter than the display period of each reach title display in the reach promotion preview performance, the cyclical display of black stars in the star spinning performance will last for less than one cycle, which can increase the player's sense of tension regarding the reach performance.

As mentioned above, the confirmation display for the selected reach is displayed 3 seconds (if Goldfish scooping reach is selected), 4 seconds (if Dart reach is selected), or 5 seconds (if Bell tossing reach is selected) after the reach promotion announcement performance begins; however, when the confirmation display is displayed while the star spinning performance is being executed, it is recommended to make the black stars (cycle display) spinning in the star spinning performance invisible (before the reach performance indicated by the confirmation display begins), and then return the stars indicating the expectation level to the state they were in before the star spinning performance began. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the reach title indicated by the confirmation display.

On the other hand, even if the decision display is displayed while the star spinning effect is being executed, the black star in the star spinning effect may be displayed spinning, and the spinning black star may be made semi-transparent and hidden when the reach effect indicated by the decision display starts. In other words, the spinning black star is displayed even when the reach effect is being executed.

Even if the decision display is displayed while the star spinning effect is being executed, the black stars in the star spinning effect may be displayed in a rotating manner, and the black stars displayed in a rotating manner may be hidden when the reach effect indicated by the decision display begins. The star spinning effect may also be displayed until the end of the ongoing fluctuation. By displaying the star spinning effect even when the reach effect is being executed, the player can be informed of the likelihood of a jackpot even during the reach effect.

The star spinning effect is an example of a second specific effect. Below, explanations of some of the effects executed in the star spinning effect and lotteries related to star spinning that are similar to the star changing effect will be omitted as appropriate.

As mentioned above, pending displays corresponding to changes in progress and pending displays corresponding to changes that are on hold may be dynamically cycled with a predetermined time period as one cycle (e.g., these pending displays rotate), but unlike the rotating black star display in the rotating star performance, the outer lines of these pending displays may not change even while the cycling display is being performed, or, like the rotating black star display in the rotating star performance, the outer lines of the pending displays may change while the cycling display is being performed.

Also, as mentioned above, since the reach promotion preview effect may be executable when the hold display is displayed, the star rotation effect that can be executed during the reach promotion preview effect may also be executable when the hold display is displayed. Therefore, the black star in the star rotation effect and the hold display may be displayed simultaneously and both may be displayed in a cycle display in which the outer line changes, or the black star in the star rotation effect and the hold display may be displayed simultaneously, but the black star in the star rotation effect may be displayed in a cycle display in which the outer line changes and the hold display may be displayed in a cycle display in which the outer line does not change.

As described above, the reach promotion preview effect may be executable when the decorative symbols are not forming a reach state, so the star spinning effect that can be executed during the reach promotion preview effect may also be executable when the decorative symbols are not forming a reach state.

When game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach promotion notice performance (excluding over-winning), whether the fluctuation for which the reach promotion notice performance is being performed is a big win fluctuation or a miss fluctuation, and whether the star rotation performance will be performed is determined by a lottery based on a predetermined allocation.

For example, during the reach promotion notice performance executed in the jackpot fluctuation, when game ball B enters the starting hole (except when over-winning), the star rotation performance is executed with a distribution of 65/256, and the star change performance is not executed with a distribution of 191/256. Also, for example, during the reach promotion notice performance executed in the miss fluctuation, when game ball B enters the starting hole (except when over-winning), the star rotation performance is executed with a distribution of 254/256, and the star rotation performance is not executed with a distribution of 2/256. Therefore, when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach promotion notice performance (except when over-winning), the jackpot expectation rate in the fluctuation when the star rotation performance is executed is 0.08%, and the jackpot expectation rate in the fluctuation when the star rotation performance is not executed is 37.65%. In other words, during the reach promotion announcement performance, the expectation of a jackpot due to the fluctuation during the performance is higher if the star spinning performance is not performed than if the star spinning performance is performed.

Since the rate of miss fluctuations is much higher than that of jackpot fluctuations, and the star rotation effect is executed at an extremely high rate when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach promotion notice performance during a miss fluctuation (excluding over-winning), the star rotation effect is executed at an extremely high rate when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach promotion notice performance (excluding over-winning). In the star rotation effect, as mentioned above, the black star display rotates. Therefore, if the star rotation effect is not executed when game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach promotion notice performance (excluding over-winning), that is, if the black star display does not rotate, it suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

As described above, in the star rotation effect executed during the reach promotion notice effect, a cyclic display is performed in which the black stars indicating the degree of expectation displayed inside the reach title display frame 1652 rotate with or without effects. Note that in the star rotation effect, there may be multiple display modes of the stars indicating the degree of expectation of the reach effect, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on the display mode selected from the multiple display modes.

For example, the multiple display modes may include multiple display modes in which the stars indicating the expectation level (e.g., three stars when the expectation level is three stars) are the same color but have different rotation speeds, or multiple display modes in which the stars indicating the expectation level of a reach performance are different colors but have the same rotation speed, or multiple display modes in which the stars indicating the expectation level of a reach performance are different colors and have different rotation speeds.

The rotation (cycle display) of the black stars in the star rotation performance is performed inside the reach title display frame 1652 as described above, which allows the player to avoid moving their gaze from the reach title display frame 1652. The rotation (cycle display) of the black stars in the star rotation performance may be displayed so as to straddle both the inside and outside of the reach title display frame 1652, or may be displayed outside the reach title display frame 1652.

In addition, for example, the rotation of the black star (cycle display) in the star rotation effect may be highlighted outside the reach title display frame 1652 (for example, by enlarging the rotation of the black star (cycle display) or by displaying the rotation of the black star (cycle display) more than one revolution) and then returning to the inside of the reach title display frame 1652, or the highlighting may only be performed outside the reach title display frame 1652 (without returning to the inside). Such a highlighting effect can appeal to the player's attention to the rotation of the black star.

When the above-mentioned redo pattern is selected, if game ball B enters the starting hole while the reach promotion notice performance is being executed first (excluding over-winning), the star rotation performance starts, and the spinning display (cycle display) of black stars begins. Even if the reach promotion notice performance ends and the redo performance starts, the spinning display (cycle display) of black stars in the star rotation performance continues to be displayed, and even if the reach promotion notice performance executed again after the redo performance starts, the spinning display (cycle display) of black stars in the star rotation performance continues to be displayed. In this way, even if the reach promotion notice performance executed first ends, the spinning display of black stars in the star rotation performance continues, so the player can recognize that the "redo pattern" has been selected.

In a redo pattern, when a reach promotion announcement performance is executed again after a redo performance, the position of the spinning black star in the star spinning performance may continue to be displayed without changing (from the position where the black star was displayed when the previous reach promotion announcement performance before the redo performance was executed), or the spinning black star may be hidden. By continuing to display the black star but not changing its display position, the continuously displayed black star looks better. Also, if a redo performance is executed multiple times in one change, an appropriate combination of continuing to display/not displaying the spinning black star at the end of the first reach promotion announcement performance and continuing to display/not displaying the spinning black star at the end of the second reach promotion announcement performance may be executed.

If the lottery to decide whether or not to execute the winning effect has been won (and the winning effect has not yet been executed), the winning effect will be cancelled if the lottery is won under the following conditions with the following specified probability. The lottery to decide whether or not to cancel the winning effect and the cancellation process are carried out, for example, after the lottery to decide whether or not to execute the star change effect.

Specifically, for example, if the current fluctuation is a miss fluctuation and the lottery result is that the star change effect is executed, the winning effect is canceled with a probability of 0/256 (it may be 1/256, i.e., there may be a possibility that the winning effect is canceled); if the current fluctuation is a miss fluctuation and the lottery result is that the star change effect is not executed, the winning effect is canceled with a probability of 128/256; if the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation and the lottery result is that the star change effect is executed, the winning effect is canceled with a probability of 256/256 (it may be 255/256, i.e., there may be a possibility that the winning effect is not canceled); if the current fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation and the lottery result is that the star change effect is not executed, the winning effect is canceled with a probability of 256/256 (it may be 255/256, i.e., there may be a possibility that the winning effect is not canceled).

In other words, if the current variation is a losing variation and a lottery result has been obtained in which a star change effect is executed, if a lottery result is obtained in which a winning effect is executed, the winning effect will always be executed without being canceled. In this way, if the above lottery result is obtained in a losing variation, the winning effect will always be executed in addition to the star change effect, so that the player's sense of anticipation can be sufficiently heightened even in the case of a losing variation.

[6-5-3. Reach execution notice performance]
The reach execution notice effect, which is an example of the first predetermined effect, will be described below. The reach execution notice effect is an effect that suggests that the game will develop into a final battle reach. In the reach execution notice effect, an effect is performed in which a character and equipment for the character are selected.

If the character's equipment is complete during the reach execution preview performance, a final battle reach performance with high odds of a big win will be executed, but if there is incomplete equipment (armor is selected but no weapon is), the character will not be able to defeat the enemy and will most likely be defeated (a miss).

As mentioned above, in the reach execution preview performance, the character who will battle in the final battle reach and the equipment of that character can be customized (the player can select the character of their choice and equip that character with the armor of their choice), so even if the character does not pick up a weapon in the reach execution preview performance (i.e., even if defeat (miss) is likely), it can distract the player.

Figure 48 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the reach execution notice performance. From 0 seconds until 1 second into the reach execution notice performance, the weapon collection start performance is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From 1 second until 3 seconds into the performance display device 1600, a character selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to enable the player to select one character from multiple characters. From 3 seconds until 4 seconds into the performance display device 1600, a character determination display is displayed to show the one selected character.

From 4 seconds to 6 seconds into the game, a head gear selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to allow the player to select one piece of head gear from multiple pieces of head gear. From 6 seconds to 7 seconds into the game, a head gear decision display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to show the selected piece of head gear.

From 7 seconds to 9 seconds into the game, a body armor selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to allow the player to select one piece of body armor from multiple pieces of body armor. From 9 seconds to 10 seconds into the game, a body armor decision display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to show the selected piece of body armor.

From 10 seconds to 12 seconds, a foot equipment selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to allow the player to select one piece of foot equipment from multiple pieces of foot equipment. From 12 seconds to 13 seconds, a foot equipment decision display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to show the selected piece of foot equipment.

From 13 seconds to 15 seconds, a weapon selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to allow one weapon to be selected from multiple weapons (the player cannot select the weapon). From 15 seconds to 16 seconds, a weapon decision display is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to show the selected weapon. Note that in the weapon selection display, it is possible that no weapon is selected ("X" is selected). In this case, a display is made on the weapon decision display indicating that no weapon could be selected.

From 16 seconds to 19 seconds after the start, a result display showing the selected head gear, body gear, and foot gear, as well as the selected weapon, is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and when 19 seconds have passed since the start, the reach execution preview performance ends. When the reach execution preview performance ends, a display corresponding to the result is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (a display showing whether or not it will develop into a final battle reach is displayed, and if it develops into a final battle reach, a display showing the selected character equipped with the selected head gear, body gear, and foot gear, as well as the selected weapon is displayed).

Note that the time intervals for the silhouettes of multiple pieces of armor to be filled in are the same, but for example, the time for displaying head armor selection may be set to 3 seconds and the time for displaying foot armor selection to 1 second, so that the silhouettes are not filled in at regular intervals, or the time from when the silhouette of a relatively later (later) piece of body armor is filled in to when the silhouette of the foot armor is filled in may be longer than the time from when the silhouette of a relatively earlier (first) character is filled in to when the silhouette of the head armor is filled in, or the time from when the silhouette of a relatively later (later) piece of body armor is filled in to when the silhouette of the foot armor is filled in may be shorter than the time from when the silhouette of a relatively earlier (first) character is filled in to when the silhouette of the head armor is filled in.

In addition, in the reach execution preview performance, when each selection display (character selection display, head armor selection display, body armor selection display, foot armor selection display, and weapon selection display) is displayed, it is the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303, and the total length of these effective operation periods is 10 seconds. On the other hand, in the reach selection preview performance described above, the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 is from the start to 8.5 seconds, that is, the length of the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 is 8.5 seconds.

In other words, the length of the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 differs between the reach execution notice performance and the reach selection notice performance (the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 in the reach execution notice performance is longer). Since the reach execution notice performance is executed in a variable pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach selection notice performance, the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 in the reach execution notice performance is longer, allowing the player to enjoy operating the press operation unit 303 for a longer period of time in the reach execution notice performance.

The length of the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 may be the same for the reach execution notice performance and the reach selection notice performance, or the effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 in the reach selection notice performance may be longer than the (total) effective operation period of the press operation unit 303 in the reach execution notice performance.

As described above, when each selection display (character selection display, head armor selection display, body armor selection display, foot armor selection display, and weapon selection display) is displayed during the reach execution preview performance, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is valid, but when each decision display (character decision display, head armor decision display, body armor decision display, foot armor decision display, and weapon decision display) is displayed, the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is invalid.

Figures 49, 50, and 51 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a reach execution notice performance. Figure 49 (A) shows the state in which the reach execution notice performance has started, and the message "Collect weapons and defeat the enemy!" is displayed as the weapon collection start performance displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In FIG. 49 (B), the character selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. From the start of the character selection display until halfway through the result display, the performance display device 1600 displays a selected equipment display frame 1653. Inside the selected equipment display frame 1653, the selected characters and equipment are displayed (unselected characters and equipment are displayed, for example, as silhouettes). Note that the display area on the performance display device 1600 for displaying the area defined by the selected equipment display frame 1653 and the inside of the selected equipment display frame 1653 is an example of a predetermined area that is part of the display area of the performance display device 1600.

The selected equipment display frame 1653 may be made up of straight lines only, as shown in FIG. 49, etc., or it may be made up of straight lines and curves, or it may be made up of curves only. Also, it is desirable that the display size of the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection notice performance described above are the same, but are displayed in different positions. This prevents the player from missing the reach title display frame 1651 and the selected equipment display frame 1653.

The selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection notice performance described above may be displayed in the same display size and in the same display position, or may have different display sizes and display positions. At least a portion of the display position of the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and at least a portion of the display position of the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection notice performance described above may overlap, or may not overlap. The selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection notice performance described above may be displayed in an area contained in an area in which the other is displayed.

It is also desirable that the display size of the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion notice performance described above are the same, but that their display positions are different. This prevents the player from missing the reach title display frame 1652 and the selected equipment display frame 1653.

The selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion notice performance described above may be displayed in the same display size and in the same display position, or may have different display sizes and display positions. At least a portion of the display position of the selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and at least a portion of the display position of the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion notice performance described above may overlap, or may not overlap. The selected equipment display frame 1653 in the reach execution notice performance and the reach title display frame 1652 in the reach promotion notice performance described above may be displayed in an area contained in an area in which the other is displayed.

In addition, in the character selection display, multiple characters (male and female characters) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and a blinking aura is displayed around one of the multiple characters. The character for which the aura is displayed is switched every time a predetermined time has passed.

When the character selection display starts, the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 starts, and the effective operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the effective operation period started (the same timing as when the display of the character selection display ends). When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the effective operation period, the character whose aura is displayed is selected.

In addition, in each of the character selection display, head armor selection display, body armor selection display, foot armor selection display, and favorite selection display, from the start of the selection display until the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the selection display ends, a button image 1633 that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 and a gauge 1634 that indicates the remaining time of the effective operation period are displayed.

In FIG. 49 (C), the character determination display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the character determination display, the character selected in the character selection display is highlighted outside the equipment display frame 1653 for approximately 0.2 seconds (such as by displaying a blinking or effect of the selected character) and moves toward the silhouette of the character in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and when the movement is complete, the silhouette changes to a color (the selected character). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the character selection display, the movement display is not performed and the character displayed in the selected equipment display frame 1653 remains as a silhouette.

In FIG. 49 (D), a head armor selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the head armor selection display, multiple head armor pieces (blue head armor pieces, green head armor pieces, red head armor pieces, and yellow head armor pieces) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and a flashing aura is displayed around one of the multiple head armor pieces. The head armor piece that displays the aura changes every time a predetermined time has passed. Note that, although multiple head armor pieces have been described as having the same shape but different colors, multiple armor pieces with different outlines may also be displayed. This also applies to multiple body armor pieces, leg armor pieces, and weapons, which will be described later.

When the headgear selection display starts, the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 starts, and the effective operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the effective operation period started (the same timing as when the display of the headgear selection display ends). When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the effective operation period, the headgear that displays the aura is selected.

In FIG. 49 (E), the head gear selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the head gear selection display, the head gear selected in the head gear selection display is highlighted outside the equipment display frame 1653 for approximately 0.2 seconds (such as by flashing the selected head gear or displaying an effect), and then moves toward the silhouette of the head gear in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and when the movement is complete, the silhouette changes to a color (the selected head gear). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the head gear selection display, the movement display is not performed, and the head gear displayed in the selected equipment display frame 1653 remains as a silhouette.

In FIG. 49 (F), a body armor selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the body armor selection display, multiple pieces of body armor (blue body armor, green body armor, red body armor, and yellow body armor) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and a blinking aura is displayed around one of the multiple pieces of body armor. The body armor that displays the aura is switched every time a predetermined time has passed.

When the body armor selection display starts, the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 starts, and the effective operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the effective operation period started (the same timing as when the display of the body armor selection display ends). When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the effective operation period, the body armor with the aura displayed is selected.

In FIG. 50 (G), the body armor selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the body armor selection display, the body armor selected in the body armor selection display is highlighted outside the equipment display frame 1653 for approximately 0.2 seconds (e.g., the selected body armor flashes or an effect is displayed) and moves toward the silhouette of the body armor in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over a period of 0.3 seconds, and when the movement is complete, the silhouette changes to a color (the selected body armor). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the body armor selection display, the movement display is not performed and the body armor displayed in the selected equipment display frame 1653 remains as a silhouette.

In FIG. 50(H), a foot armor selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the foot armor selection display, multiple pieces of foot armor (blue foot armor, green foot armor, red foot armor, and yellow foot armor) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and a flashing aura is displayed around one of the multiple pieces of foot armor. The foot armor for which the aura is displayed changes every time a predetermined time elapses. The display in FIG. 50(H) in which a weapon and foot armor are displayed in silhouette inside the selected equipment display frame 1653 is an example of a first predetermined display.

When the foot armor selection display starts, the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 starts, and the effective operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the effective operation period started (the same timing as when the display of the foot armor selection display ends). When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the effective operation period, the foot armor with the aura displayed is selected.

In FIG. 50(I), the foot armor selection display is displayed on the display device 1600. In the foot armor selection display, the foot armor selected in the foot armor selection display is highlighted outside the equipment display frame 1653 for approximately 0.2 seconds (e.g., the selected foot armor flashes or an effect is displayed), and then moves toward the silhouette of the foot armor in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and when the movement is complete, the silhouette changes to a color (the selected foot armor). Note that if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the foot armor selection display, the movement display is not performed, and the foot armor displayed in the selected equipment display frame 1653 remains as a silhouette.

In FIG. 50(J), the weapon selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the weapon selection display, multiple weapons (an "X", a silver sword, a gold sword, and a rainbow sword) are displayed outside the equipment display frame 1653, and are rapidly repeated in an enlarged and hidden manner in the order of an "X", a silver sword, a gold sword, and a rainbow sword. The display in FIG. 50(J), in which only the weapon is displayed as a silhouette inside the selected equipment display frame 1653, is an example of a second predetermined display.

When the weapon selection display starts, the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 begins, and the valid operation period ends when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated or when two seconds have passed since the valid operation period started (the same timing as when the weapon selection display ends). A weapon is selected when the valid operation period ends (i.e. when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the valid operation period, or when two seconds have passed since the valid operation period started without the pressing operation unit 303 being operated). However, the weapon selected is determined by the lottery described above, and does not depend on the timing of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the example of Figure 50 below, it is assumed that a lottery result has been obtained in which a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display (i.e., something other than "X" is selected). In Figure 50 (K), the weapon decision display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In the weapon decision display when a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display (i.e., something other than "X" is selected), the weapon selected in the weapon selection display is highlighted outside the equipment display frame 1653 for approximately 0.2 seconds (such as by flashing the selected weapon or displaying an effect), and then moves toward the silhouette of the weapon in the selected equipment display frame 1653 over the course of 0.3 seconds, and when the movement is complete, the silhouette changes to color (the selected weapon).

In FIG. 50(L), the result display when any weapon is selected in the weapon selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this case, in the result display, the characters "Equipment Decided!!", indicating that the character and equipment have been decided, are displayed so that they overlap with the selected equipment display frame 1653 and extend beyond (the outer lines of) the selected equipment display frame 1653. By displaying the characters in this way, the player can be sure that the equipment has been decided, i.e., the weapon has also been selected, and can expect the game to progress to the final battle reach. In FIG. 50(L), the display with no silhouette inside the selected equipment display frame 1653 and the characters "Equipment Decided!!" extending beyond the outer lines of the selected equipment display frame 1653 is an example of a third predetermined display.

Note that, for example, if no head armor that the player can customize has been selected (i.e., if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated during the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the head armor selection display), at the start of the result display, for example, one head armor is determined by evenly distributing it from multiple head armors (blue head armor, green head armor, red head armor, and yellow head armor), and the character is equipped with the determined head armor in the result display. This is also the case when no character, body armor, or foot armor that the player can customize has been selected. This is also the case in the result display when no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display described below.

Figure 51 (M) shows the continuation of the result display when a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display. For example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of Figure 51 (L), a transition to Figure 51 (M) occurs. In Figure 51 (M), the selected equipment display frame 1653 is erased, and the selected character equipped with the selected head armor, body armor, foot armor, and weapon is displayed. Note that the area in which the character is displayed occupies a large proportion of the entire display area of the performance display device 1600 (e.g., more than 1/2 of the entire display area of the performance display device 1600), thereby appealing to the player that the character will be fighting in the final battle reach.

Figure 51 (N) shows the state where the final battle reach has begun after the reach execution notice performance in which a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display has ended. When a weapon is selected in the weapon selection display, the reach execution notice performance ends 3 seconds after the result display starts (i.e., the result display is displayed for 3 seconds), and the game moves to the final battle reach. Although not shown in the figure, as mentioned above, a final battle reach performance is executed with characters equipped with the armor and weapons determined in the reach execution notice performance. Note that, as mentioned above, the final battle reach performance may also be a jackpot confirmation performance.

Figure 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation when no weapon is selected in the reach execution notice presentation. In Figure 52 (J), the same presentation as in Figure 50 (J) is performed. In the example of Figure 52 below, it is assumed that the lottery result obtained is that no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display (i.e., "X" is selected).

In FIG. 52 (K2), the weapon selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. When no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display (i.e., "X" is selected), the weapon selection display shows "X" outside the selected equipment display frame 1653, and the silhouette of the weapon within the selected equipment display frame 1653 is displayed as is.

In FIG. 52 (K2), characters and armor whose silhouettes are filled in the selected equipment display frame 1653 may be returned to their silhouettes. In this case, the filled characters and armor may be returned to their silhouettes at the same time, or the filled characters and armor may be returned to their silhouettes in stages (for example, the head armor is peeled off to become a silhouette, and then the body armor is peeled off to become a silhouette). When returning to their silhouettes in stages, the determined characters and armor may be returned to their silhouettes in a random order, in a determined order (character, head armor, body armor, foot armor), or in the order determined most recently (foot armor, body armor, head armor, character).

In FIG. 52 (L2), the result display when no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In FIG. 52 (L2), the selected equipment display frame 1653 is erased, and the selected character is shown disappointed, equipped with the selected head armor, body armor, and foot armor (but no weapon). In addition, the words "It's impossible without a weapon" are displayed on the performance display device 1600. These displays ensure that the player is aware that the game will not progress to a final battle reach, and prevent the player from having unnecessary expectations.

In addition, the area in which the disappointed character is displayed may be displayed in a manner that occupies a large proportion of the entire display area of the performance display device 1600 (for example, more than half of the entire display area of the performance display device 1600), thereby more reliably conveying to the player that the final battle reach will not occur.

Figure 52 (M2) shows the state in which the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination after the reach execution preview performance has ended, in which no weapon was selected in the weapon selection display. If no weapon was selected in the weapon selection display, the reach execution preview performance ends three seconds after the result display begins (i.e., the result display is displayed for three seconds), and the decorative symbols stop in a losing combination.

The display time of the result display when no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display may be shorter (e.g., 2 seconds) than the 3 seconds that is the display time of the result display when any weapon is selected in the weapon selection display. This can reduce disappointment for the player caused by the result display when no weapon is selected in the weapon selection display, and can increase the excitement of the player caused by the result display when any weapon is selected in the weapon selection display.

In the examples of Figures 49 to 52, the reach execution notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are in a reach state, but the reach execution notice performance may also be executed while the decorative symbols are not in a reach state (for example, it may be before the reach state is formed, or it may be in a state where the reach state is formed but the left decorative symbol and center decorative symbol that form the reach state are not visible).

If the reach execution notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are forming a reach state, the player can enjoy the reach execution notice performance with growing anticipation, and if the reach execution notice performance is executed while the decorative symbols are not forming a reach state, the player can concentrate on the reach execution notice performance without being distracted by the reach state.

In addition, in the examples of Figures 49 to 52, the reach execution preview performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and a pending display corresponding to the pending change are displayed, but the reach execution preview performance may be executed while only one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is displayed, or the reach execution preview performance may be executed while neither is displayed.

If a reach execution notice performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to an ongoing change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach execution notice performance while recognizing the degree of expectation of that change indicated by the pending display, and if a reach execution notice performance is executed while a pending display corresponding to a pending change is displayed, the player can enjoy the reach execution notice performance for the ongoing change while looking forward to the next or subsequent changes.

In addition, if the reach execution notice performance is executed while at least one of the pending display corresponding to the ongoing change and the pending display corresponding to the pending change is not displayed, the player can concentrate on the reach execution notice performance without being distracted by the pending display of at least one of the changes.

The aforementioned display of shooting stars as an anticipation effect (an anticipation effect different from the reach execution notice effect) can also be executed while the reach execution notice effect is being executed. By displaying the shooting stars while the reach execution notice effect is being executed, the sense of anticipation during the reach execution notice effect can be increased. Also, the reach execution notice effect may be executed when the display of shooting stars is displayed.

The shooting star display may be able to be displayed in the reach selection preview performance but not in the reach promotion preview performance, or it may be unable to be displayed in the reach selection preview performance but able to be displayed in the reach promotion preview performance, or it may be unable to be displayed in either the reach selection preview performance or the reach promotion preview performance, or it may be able to be displayed in either the reach selection preview performance or the reach promotion preview performance.

In addition, the display of shooting stars may be able to be displayed in the reach selection preview performance but not in the reach execution preview performance, or may be unable to be displayed in the reach selection preview performance but able to be displayed in the reach execution preview performance, or may be unable to be displayed in either the reach selection preview performance or the reach execution preview performance, or may be able to be displayed in either the reach selection preview performance or the reach execution preview performance.

In addition, the display of shooting stars may be able to be displayed in reach promotion preview performances but not in reach execution preview performances, or may be unable to be displayed in reach promotion preview performances but able to be displayed in reach execution preview performances, or may be unable to be displayed in either reach promotion preview performances or reach execution preview performances, or may be able to be displayed in either reach promotion preview performances or reach execution preview performances.

When the reach selection notice performance is being executed, a specific movable body among the multiple movable bodies provided in the pachinko machine 1 is operable, and when the specific movable body operates, the chances increase, but it is desirable that the specific movable body is unable to operate when the reach execution notice performance is being executed. In the reach execution notice performance, the expectation level changes depending on the weapon that is determined, so there is no need to increase the chances by the movement of the movable body, but in the reach selection notice performance, one of the reach performances with the same expectation level is selected, so the player's sense of expectation is increased if there is a chance increase performance due to the movement of the movable body.

Note that while it may be impossible to operate the specified movable body when the reach selection notice performance is being executed, it may be possible to operate the specified movable body when the reach execution notice performance is being executed, or it may be possible or impossible to operate the specified movable body both when the reach selection notice performance is being executed and when the reach execution notice performance is being executed.

When the operation of a specified movable body is enabled, the operation of the specified movable body may be started when the reach selection notice performance or the reach execution notice performance is being executed, or the specified movable body may be operated before the reach selection notice performance or the reach execution notice performance is executed, and the reach selection notice performance or the reach execution notice performance may be started when the specified movable body is operating.

In the above example, it is preferable that the specified movable body cannot move when the reach promotion notice performance is being executed, but it is also possible that the specified movable body can move when the reach promotion notice performance is being executed, and that the chances are increased when the specified movable body moves. On the other hand, in the reach execution notice performance, it is preferable that the specified movable body cannot move when the reach execution notice performance is being executed, as described above. In the reach execution notice performance, the player has many opportunities to select armor, so the player does not think about the chances of increasing by the movement of the movable body, but in the reach promotion notice performance, the player does not have an opportunity to make a selection, so the chances of increasing by the movement of the movable body can be executed, which provides the player with a point of increased interest.

Note that although it is not possible to operate the specified movable body when the reach promotion notice performance is being executed, it may be possible to operate the specified movable body when the reach execution notice performance is being executed, or the operation of the specified movable body may be possible or impossible both when the reach promotion notice performance is being executed and when the reach execution notice performance is being executed. Note that, if the operation of the specified movable body is possible, the operation of the specified movable body may be started when the reach promotion notice performance or the reach execution notice performance is being executed, or the specified movable body may be operated before the reach promotion notice performance or the reach execution notice performance is executed, and the reach promotion notice performance or the reach execution notice performance may be started when the specified movable body is operating.

As mentioned above, when the display of the reach title displayed within the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection notice performance changes (for example, when it changes from the title Shooting Reach to the title Shark Fishing Reach), it is desirable that a sound corresponding to the change is not output, but when the silhouette of the armor displayed within the selected equipment display frame 1653 during the reach execution notice performance changes to the selected armor, it is desirable that a sound corresponding to the change is output. By outputting a sound corresponding to the change during the reach execution notice performance, it is possible to make the player aware that weapon selection will begin in a little more time, that is, that the time has come to notify the player of the expected probability of a jackpot.

In addition, any of the following combinations may be applied: when the display inside the reach title display frame 1651 during the reach selection preview performance changes from the title display of the shooting reach to the title display of the shark fishing reach, a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output; when the display changes from a state in which the weapon and leg armor are displayed as silhouettes to a state in which only the weapon is displayed as a silhouette during the reach execution preview performance, a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output; and when the display changes from a state in which only the weapon is displayed as a silhouette to a state in which there is no silhouette ("Equipment confirmed!!" is displayed beyond the outline of the selected equipment display frame 1653), a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output.

In the above example, when the reach title displayed within the reach title display frame 1652 during the reach promotion preview performance changes (for example, when the title changes from Goldfish Scooping Reach to Dart Reach), it is desirable to output a sound corresponding to the change, but it is also possible to prevent the sound corresponding to the change from being output. On the other hand, as described above, when the silhouette of the armor displayed within the selected equipment display frame 1653 during the reach execution preview performance changes to the selected armor, it is desirable to output a sound corresponding to the change.

In addition, any of the following combinations may be applied: when the display inside the reach title display frame 1652 during a reach promotion preview performance changes from a title display of Goldfish Scooping Reach to a title display of Dart Reach, a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output; when the display during a reach execution preview performance changes from a state in which the weapon and foot armor are displayed as silhouettes to a state in which only the weapon is displayed as a silhouette, a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output; and when the display during a reach execution preview performance changes from a state in which only the weapon is displayed as a silhouette to a state in which there is no silhouette ("Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed beyond the outline of the selected equipment display frame 1653), a sound corresponding to the change is/is not output.

Figure 53 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of a character equipment allocation table used in the reach execution notice performance. The character equipment allocation table 530 is stored, for example, in a peripheral control ROM. The character equipment allocation table 530 shows the allocation of characters and each piece of equipment selected in the reach execution notice performance for each special lottery result. Note that since the characters, head armor, body armor, and foot armor can be determined depending on the operation timing of the pressing operation unit 303 as described above, the allocation is not determined in the character equipment allocation table 530.

If there is a miss even when the final battle reach performance progresses (i.e., if the allocation in the fluctuation pattern table 390 is pre-determined so that the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 3" can be selected when the special lottery result is a miss), the allocation "※1" in the character equipment allocation table 530 is used.

In the distribution of "※1", the selection rate in the case of a jackpot fluctuation is "×" < Rainbow Sword < Gold Sword < Silver Sword, and the selection rate in the case of a miss fluctuation is "×" < Silver Sword < Gold Sword < Rainbow Sword. In addition, the expected probability of a jackpot is "×" < Silver Sword < Gold Sword < Rainbow Sword, and if the Rainbow Sword is selected, a jackpot is confirmed.

When the allocation of "※1" is used and "x" is selected in the big win variation, the result display will be the same as that of FIG. 52 (L2), and then the result display will be followed by the words "But I've got fists!" (special display) displayed on the performance display device 1600. When the result display has finished, a final battle reach will be executed by characters who fight with their fists.

In addition, if the final battle reach performance is reached and a jackpot is confirmed (i.e., if the allocation in the fluctuation pattern table 390 is predetermined so that the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 3" can be selected only when the special lottery result is a jackpot), the allocation "※2" in the character equipment allocation table 530 is used.

In the allocation of "※2", the selection rate for jackpot variations that grant a special chance is "X" < Rainbow Sword < Gold Sword < Silver Sword, and the selection rate for jackpot variations that do not grant a special chance is "X" = Rainbow Sword < Gold Sword < Silver Sword. Also, the expected probability of a special chance is Silver Sword < Gold Sword < Rainbow Sword = "X", and if Rainbow Sword or "X" is selected, a special chance is confirmed.

When the allocation of "※2" is used and "x" is selected in the jackpot variation that gives a probability bonus, the result display will be the same as that of FIG. 52 (L2), and then the result display will be followed by the words "But I've got fists!" (special display) displayed on the performance display device 1600, and when the result display has finished, a final battle reach will be executed with characters who fight with their fists.

The allocations in "※1" and "※2" both indicate allocations for results with different degrees of advantage obtained, but in addition to these, allocations for jackpot fluctuations with and without time-saving effects, and allocations for the number of time-saving effects applied in jackpot fluctuations with time-saving effects may also be specified.

Below, another example of the reach execution notice performance will be explained. In this another example, the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 also starts when the display of various decision displays (character decision display, head armor decision display, body armor decision display, foot armor decision display, and weapon decision display) begins. In other words, the effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 arrives during each display period from the character selection display to the weapon decision display.

In this other example, for example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated in the character selection display and the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the character determination display, the silhouette of the character displayed inside the selected equipment display frame 1653 is displayed to change to one of the multiple characters according to a predetermined allocation, for example. Specifically, for example, characters are selected from male characters and female characters in an equal distribution. Also, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the character determination display, the silhouette may not be filled, for example, a male character is selected in a 1/10 distribution, a female character is selected in a 2/10 distribution, and the silhouette is not filled in a 7/10 distribution, etc. In this case, the silhouette may be filled (i.e., one of the characters is selected) in many distributions (for example, more than 1/2), or the silhouette may not be filled in many distributions (for example, more than 1/2). Note that a similar effect can be performed for head armor, body armor, and foot armor that can be customized by the player. Also, among the determination displays, the silhouette may be filled with many allocations in the character determination display, but not filled with many allocations in the head armor determination display, and an appropriate combination may be applied, or the silhouette may be filled with many allocations in the first half of the determination display (for example, character and head armor), but not filled with many allocations in the second half of the determination display (for example, body armor and foot armor).

In this alternative example, for example, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated in the character selection display, character decision display, and head gear selection display, but is operated in the head gear decision display, the silhouette of the character that was selectable before the head gear is displayed (rather than both the character and head gear silhouettes displayed within the selected equipment display frame 1653 changing), a display is made in which the silhouette of the character is changed to one of a number of characters (e.g., selected equally from the number of characters) (note that this change may be made with a 1/2 probability).

In this case, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the operation valid period does not end, and the silhouette of the head gear that operates the pressing operation unit 303 again is displayed changing to one of the multiple head gear pieces (e.g., selected from the multiple head gear pieces in an even distribution) (note that the display may change with a probability of 1/2). In other words, if multiple customizations have not been performed, the character or part of the armor will remain as a silhouette unless the pressing operation unit 303 is operated multiple times in the confirmation display. The above also applies if the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated until the end of the body armor selection display or the end of the foot armor selection display.

In addition, for example, when the press operation unit 303 is operated in the head armor selection display when the character in the selected equipment display frame 1653 is in silhouette, or when the press operation unit 303 is operated in the body armor selection display when the character and head armor in the selected equipment display frame 1653 are in silhouette, if there are one or more characters and armor whose silhouettes have not been filled in (not selected) among those whose decision display has been completed, and the press operation unit 303 is operated in the selection display of any of the subsequent armor, the following performance will be performed. For example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the selection display of any of the subsequent armor, an effect is performed in which the silhouette of the armor is filled in, and the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303 continues thereafter, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is further operated during the operation valid period, an effect is performed in which the silhouettes that are not filled in are filled in or not filled in according to a predetermined distribution (if there are multiple silhouettes that are not filled in, an effect is performed in which the silhouettes are filled in or not filled in according to the predetermined distribution, randomly, in order from the earliest selection display, or in order from the latest selection display). Also, for example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in the selection display of any of the subsequent armor, an effect is performed in which the silhouettes that are not filled in are filled in or not filled in according to a predetermined distribution before the armor (if there are multiple silhouettes that are not filled in, an effect is performed in which the silhouettes are filled in or not filled in according to the predetermined distribution, randomly, in order from the earliest selection display, or in order from the latest selection display).

In addition, in this alternative example, if there is a silhouette portion within the selected equipment display frame 1653 at the start of the result display, for example, the equipment or character corresponding to the silhouette portion may be determined by equal lottery (however, for weapons, it may be determined by lottery based on the allocation shown in the character equipment allocation table 530), and the determined character equipped with the determined equipment may be displayed in the result display, or the equipment or character corresponding to the silhouette portion may be displayed as a silhouette in the result display.

In addition, if there is a silhouette portion within the selected equipment display frame 1653 at the start of the result display, if it is a jackpot variation, the equipment or character corresponding to the silhouette portion may be determined by equal lottery (however, for weapons, it may be determined by lottery based on the allocation shown in the character equipment allocation table 530), and the determined character equipped with the determined equipment may be displayed in the result display, or if it is a miss variation, the equipment or character corresponding to the silhouette portion may be displayed as a silhouette in the result display.

When game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning) during the reach selection notice performance or reach promotion notice performance, the previously described winning performance, star change performance, and star rotation performance are performed, but even if game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach execution notice performance, the winning performance, star change performance, and star rotation performance are not performed. Specifically, for example, when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning) during the reach execution notice performance, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform the previously described winning performance, but even if the lottery determines that the winning performance will be performed, the winning performance is canceled.

For example, even if game ball B enters the starting hole during the reach execution notice performance, a lottery is not even performed to determine whether or not to execute a star change performance or a star rotation performance. After the reach execution notice performance ends, there is a possibility that the final battle reach, which has the highest jackpot expectation, will be executed. However, if a winning performance, star change performance, or star rotation performance were executed in response to a win during the reach execution notice performance, the player might think that the jackpot expectation of the current fluctuation is lower than the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation corresponding to the win (in other words, it might not develop into the final battle reach), which could reduce the player's sense of excitement. Therefore, the winning performance, star change performance, and star rotation performance are not executed during the reach execution notice performance.

In addition, in order to give the player a sense of anticipation for the fluctuations corresponding to the entry of the game ball B into the starting hole during the reach execution notice performance, it may be possible to execute a winning performance during the reach execution notice performance. In this case, the selection of whether or not to execute a winning performance during the reach execution notice performance is the same as the selection of whether or not to execute a winning performance during the reach selection notice performance or the reach promotion notice performance, for example, and the content of the winning performance executed during the reach execution notice performance is the same as the content of the winning performance executed during the reach selection notice performance or the reach promotion notice performance, for example.

[6-6. Couple Production]
The couple performance will be described below. In the couple performance, which is an example of the second predetermined performance, a performance different from the performance when the prize is won described above is executed. When the game ball B enters the starting hole during a change (excluding over-winning), a lottery is held to see whether the different performance when the prize is won will be executed or not, depending on whether the change is a big win or a loss.

The other winning performance can be executed at any time except when a reach performance (final battle reach) is being executed as the winning/losing performance of the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" and when a reach execution notice performance is being executed. In other words, the other winning performance can be executed when a reach performance is being executed as the winning/losing performance of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2", and the other winning performance can also be executed when a reach selection notice performance or a reach promotion notice performance is being executed.

When the Final Battle Reach or Reach Execution Notice performance is being executed, the expectation of a jackpot is high, so executing the other winning performance may interfere with these performances and reduce the player's interest. On the other hand, when the Reach performance, Reach Selection Notice performance, or Reach Promotion Notice performance as the winning or losing performance of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2" are being executed, the expectation of a jackpot is not high, so executing the other winning performance can give the player a sense of expectation.

It is also possible that the aforementioned winning effect and the other winning effect are executed simultaneously. When the final battle reach is being executed, and when the reach execution notice effect is being executed, the lottery to determine whether or not the other winning effect will be executed may not be executed at all, or a lottery to determine whether or not the other winning effect will be executed may be executed, and if it is determined in the lottery that the other winning effect will be executed, the other winning effect may be canceled.

For example, when game ball B enters the starting hole in a jackpot variation (excluding over-winning), the different winning performance is executed with a distribution of 64/256, and the different winning performance is not executed with a distribution of 192/256. Also, for example, when game ball B enters the starting hole in a losing variation (excluding over-winning), the different winning performance is executed with a distribution of 255/256, and the different winning performance is not executed with a distribution of 1/256. Therefore, when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the jackpot expectation rate in the variation when the different winning performance is executed is 0.08%, and the jackpot expectation rate in the variation when the different winning performance is not executed is 37.65%.

In other words, since the rate of miss fluctuations is much higher than the rate of jackpot fluctuations, according to the above allocation, when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the different winning effect is executed with a very high rate, but if the different winning effect is not executed when game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over-winning), the expectation of a jackpot in the ongoing fluctuation is high, giving the player a sense of anticipation. Also, even if the different winning effect is executed when game ball B enters the starting hole, the player's attention can be directed to the next fluctuation.

Figure 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a couple presentation. Figure 54 (A) to Figure 54 (D) each show the display contents of the entire presentation display device 1600, and further show an enlarged view of the display contents inside the couple display frame 1654 displayed within the display area of the presentation display device 1600.

Figure 54 (A) shows the state when not fluctuating. The performance display device 1600 displays a festival background image such as lanterns, fireworks, and happi coats, decorative patterns that are stopped in a losing combination, and a couple display frame 1654. In the couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54 (A), a pure high school couple (a duo consisting of one person with "Taka" written on their torso and "male" written on their head in the figure, and another person with "Taka" written on their torso and "female" written on their head in the figure) who are attending the festival are sitting in chairs facing each other.

The display position and size of the couple display frame 1654 may be the same as the display position and size of the selected equipment display frame 1653 displayed in the reach execution notice performance (the couple display frame 1654 and the selected equipment display frame 1653 may be the same frame in the same position). Although the reach execution notice performance and the couple performance are not executed at the same time, by having the couple display frame 1654 and the selected equipment display frame 1653 be the same frame in the same position, the player only needs to focus on the same position for the reach execution notice performance and the couple performance, and does not need to move their eyes unnecessarily.

Figure 54 (B) shows the state when one game ball B has entered the starting hole and the fluctuation based on that ball has begun. The performance display device 1600 displays a festival background image such as lanterns, fireworks, and happi coats, the decorative pattern that is changing, the couple display frame 1654, and a reserved display of a specified type corresponding to the fluctuation. The display in the couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54 (B) is the same as the display in the couple display frame 1654 in Figure 54 (A) (no change).

Figure 54 (C) shows a state in which another game ball B has entered the starting hole while the fluctuation started in Figure 54 (B) is continuing. The performance display device 1600 displays a festival background image such as lanterns, fireworks, and happi coats, the decorative pattern during the fluctuation, a couple display frame 1654, a reserved display of a predetermined mode corresponding to the fluctuation, and a reserved display of a predetermined mode corresponding to one of the pending fluctuations.

The display in couple display frame 1654 in FIG. 54(C) (i.e., when a first change is put on hold while a change is being made) may change from the display in couple display frame 1654 in FIG. 54(B). This change in the display in couple display frame 1654 is an example of the other winning effect described above, and whether or not this change is made is determined based on the above-mentioned allocation of whether or not the other winning effect is made.

For example, within couple display frame 1654, a new university student couple (a duo consisting of one person with "big" written on their torso and "male" written at their head in the figure, and another person with "big" written on their torso and "female" written at their head in the figure) is displayed behind the high school couple, and the university student couple is displayed as if whispering to the high school couple, "You two make a good couple," and the high school couple that was previously displayed appears to look embarrassed.

The newly displayed college student couple is displayed as a periodic dynamic display with a predetermined time as one cycle, and although the outline of the college student couple changes in this periodic dynamic display, the display position of the college student couple remains unchanged until the ongoing change ends. The high school student couple is displayed as a periodic dynamic display (cycle display) with a predetermined time as one cycle, and the outline of the high school student couple does not change in this periodic dynamic display (for example, a dynamic display is performed in which the hands of the high school student couple move around slightly).

In Fig. 54(D), the fluctuation started in Fig. 54(B) continues, and one more game ball B enters the starting hole after Fig. 54(C). The performance display device 1600 displays a festival background image such as lanterns, fireworks, and happi coats, the decorative pattern during the fluctuation, a couple display frame 1654, a reserved display of a predetermined mode corresponding to the fluctuation, and a reserved display of a predetermined mode corresponding to each of the two pending fluctuations.

The display in couple display frame 1654 in FIG. 54(D) (i.e., when a second change is put on hold while a change is being made) may change from the display in couple display frame 1654 in FIG. 54(C). Note that the display in couple display frame 1654 may also change if a third or fourth change is put on hold while a change is being made. If a second, third, or fourth change is put on hold while a change is being made, the display in couple display frame 1654 changes depending on the hold status of the first change.

For example, if a college student couple is not displayed in couple display frame 1654 at the timing of FIG. 54(C) (i.e., when the first change is put on hold), the college student couple will not be displayed in couple display frame 1654 at the timing of FIG. 54(D) (i.e., even when the second or subsequent changes are put on hold). Also, for example, if a college student couple is displayed in couple display frame 1654 as shown in FIG. 54(C) (when the first change is put on hold), the second and subsequent college student couples will be additionally displayed in couple display frame 1654 as shown in FIG. 54(D) (even when the second or subsequent changes are put on hold).

If, for example, when the second or subsequent reserved couples are changed, whether or not to display the second through fourth college couples were to be decided by the same lottery as for the display of the first college couple, there is a high probability that a different winning performance will be executed in the event of a losing change, so if the fourth college couple is displayed, it would indicate to the player that there is an extremely high possibility that the change is a losing one. Therefore, as described above, the second through fourth college couples are displayed if the first college couple is displayed, and are not displayed if the first college couple is not displayed.

The college student couple additionally displayed in the couple display frame 1654 in FIG. 54(D) may be the same image as the college student couple displayed from FIG. 54(C) because they are twins with the college student couple displayed from FIG. 54(C), or they may be different images from the college student couple displayed from FIG. 54(C) because they are different people from the college student couple displayed from FIG. 54(C).

In addition, in FIG. 54(D), the newly displayed college student couple is displayed as a periodic dynamic display with a predetermined time as one cycle, and although the outline of the college student couple changes in this periodic dynamic display, the display position of the college student couple remains unchanged until the ongoing change is completed (however, the college student couple is displayed in a position different from the position in which they were displayed in FIG. 54(C), but it is advisable to display them at the same height so that the player can easily recognize that a new college student couple has been displayed). Note that in FIG. 54(D), the high school student couple displayed within the couple display frame 1654 continues to be displayed in the same way as in FIG. 54(C), for example.

The college student couple added in FIG. 54(C) or FIG. 54(D) may be displayed in a display mode selected from a plurality of display modes with different jackpot expectation rates. The plurality of display modes may be, for example, a display mode in which a dynamic display of the college student couple whispering "You two make a great couple" loops (a cyclic display is performed), a display mode in which a dynamic display of the college student couple whispering "You two make a great couple" followed by a "Go for it" motion loops (a cyclic display is performed), or other modes in which the cyclic display time is different, or the message "You two are such a good couple" may be displayed instead of the message "You make a great couple" and the cyclic display time may be the same but the display mode may be different.

The cyclical display of high school couples and university student couples in the couple presentation is performed inside the couple display frame 1654 as described above. This allows the player to keep their gaze on the couple display frame 1654. The cyclical display of high school couples and university student couples in the couple presentation may be displayed both inside and outside the couple display frame 1654, or may be displayed outside the couple display frame 1654.

In addition, for example, a cyclic display of a high school couple or a university student couple in a couple presentation may be highlighted outside the couple display frame 1654, and then displayed back inside the couple display frame 1654. Such a presentation with highlighting can appeal to the player with the cyclic display of a high school couple or a university student couple.

The cycle of the university student couple's cyclic display in the couple performance is, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is the same as the time from when only the foot armor and weapon are displayed in silhouette in the reach execution notice performance to when only the weapon is displayed in silhouette (that is, the sum of the display time of 2.0 seconds for the foot armor selection display and the display time of 0.5 seconds for the foot armor silhouette to be hidden in the foot armor decision display). Since another winning performance (the display performance of the university student couple) is displayed with a high probability when the game ball B enters the starting hole (the probability of displaying is higher than the probability of not being displayed), the cycle of the university student couple's cyclic display in the couple performance is, for example, the same as the time from when only the foot armor and weapon are displayed in silhouette in the reach execution notice performance to when only the weapon is displayed in silhouette, the player can sense in advance how long the time in the reach execution notice performance will be, and the player's sense of tension in selecting foot armor when the reach execution notice performance is executed can be reduced.

In addition, the period for the cycle of displaying the college student couple in the couple performance may be longer or shorter than, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is the time it takes from when the state in which only the leg armor and weapon are displayed in silhouette in the reach execution preview performance starts until the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette changes.

If the cycle of the college student couple's cyclic display in the couple performance is shorter than the time from when the state in which only foot armor and weapons are displayed in silhouette begins to when the state changes to when only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution preview performance, the player will know in advance that it will take a long time to select foot armor when the reach execution preview performance is executed, and can select their preferred foot armor with plenty of time to spare. On the other hand, if the cycle of the college student couple's cyclic display in the couple performance is longer than the time from when the state in which only foot armor and weapons are displayed in silhouette begins to when the state changes to when only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution preview performance, the player will know in advance that they will need to select foot armor quickly when the reach execution preview performance is executed, and can select their preferred foot armor with a sense of tension.

The period for the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance may be, for example, 3.0 seconds, which is the same as the duration of the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution preview performance (i.e., the sum of 0.5 seconds, which is the time from when the silhouette of the leg armor is hidden in the leg armor decision display until the leg armor decision display ends, plus 2.0 seconds, which is the display time of the weapon selection display, plus 0.5 seconds, which is the display time until the silhouette of the weapon is hidden in the weapon decision display), or it may be longer or shorter than this 3.0 seconds.

In addition, the period in the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance may be, for example, 3.0 seconds, the same as the time from when only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution preview performance until it changes to when "Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed without a silhouette (i.e., the sum of the time from when the weapon selection display begins to when the result display begins, which is 3.0 seconds), or it may be longer or shorter than this 3.0 seconds.

Since another winning effect (display effect of a college student couple) is highly likely to be displayed when game ball B enters the starting hole (it is more likely to be displayed than not to be displayed), the period in the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple effect is the same as the duration of the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution notice effect, or the time from when the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette begins to when the state changes to when "Equipment Decided!!" is displayed without a silhouette, allowing the player to know in advance how long the time in the reach execution notice effect will be, reducing the tension the player feels when selecting weapons when the reach execution notice effect is executed.

In addition, if the period in the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance is shorter than the duration of the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution notice performance, or the time from when the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette begins to when the state changes to a state in which "Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed without a silhouette, the player can take their time to operate the pressing operation unit 303 in the weapon selection display when the reach execution notice performance is executed.

If the period in the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance is longer than the duration of the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette in the reach execution notice performance, or the time from when the state in which only the weapon is displayed in silhouette begins until the state in which "Equipment Confirmed!!" is displayed without a silhouette, the player will know in advance that he or she will need to quickly operate the pressing operation unit 303 to select a weapon when the reach execution notice performance is executed, and will be able to perform the operation with a sense of tension.

The period for the cycle of displaying the college student couple in the couple performance may be, for example, 1.5 seconds, the same as the duration of the state in which "Equipment Decided!!" is displayed without a silhouette in the reach execution preview performance, or it may be longer or shorter than this 1.5 seconds.

Since another winning effect (display effect of a college student couple) is highly likely to be displayed when game ball B enters the starting hole (it is more likely to be displayed than not), the period in the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple effect is the same as the duration of the reach execution notice effect, allowing the player to know in advance how long the duration of the reach execution notice effect will be, easing the player's tension when reviewing the characters, armor, and weapons that were finally decided upon when the reach execution notice effect was executed.

In addition, if the period in the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance is shorter than the duration of the state in which "Equipment Decided!!" is displayed without a silhouette in the reach execution preview performance, the duration is longer, so the player can calmly reconfirm the character, armor, and weapon that were finally decided when the reach execution preview performance was executed.

In addition, if the period in the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance is shorter than the duration of the state in which "Equipment Decided!!" is displayed without a silhouette in the reach execution preview performance, the player will know in advance that the duration is short, and will be able to recognize in advance that it would be better to quickly recheck the character, armor, and weapon that were finally decided when the reach execution preview performance was executed.

Note that the reach execution notice performance may be executable when the university student couple is cycled in the couple performance, but in order to allow the player to concentrate on the reach execution notice performance, it is desirable to hide the university student couple (cycle display) in the couple performance when the reach execution notice performance is executed while the university student couple is cycled in the couple performance. Note that the university student couple that is hidden due to the reach execution notice performance being executed while the university student couple is cycled in the couple performance may be able to be re-displayed when or after the reach execution notice performance has ended (i.e., it may or may not be re-displayed).

In addition, if a college student couple is hidden due to the execution of a reach-execution notice performance while the college student couple is being cyclically displayed in the couple performance, the college student couple may be able to be redisplayed if a game ball B enters the starting hole after the reach-execution notice performance ends (for example, after a miss pattern in which no weapon is selected as shown in FIG. 52 is displayed) and before the pattern is determined in the ongoing variation, or may not be able to be redisplayed even if the ball enters at that timing.

The hidden college couple reappears when or after the reach execution notice performance ends, allowing players who have been enjoying the cycle of the college couple to enjoy the cycle again. The hidden college couple does not reappear when the reach execution notice performance ends, allowing players to focus on the final battle reach that has an extremely high chance of winning after the reach execution notice performance ends.

In addition, when a college student couple is cyclically displayed in a couple performance and a reach execution preview performance is executed, if the college student couple is made invisible, and re-displays when or after the reach execution preview performance ends, the re-displayed college student couple may be cyclically displayed (as they were before they were made invisible), or may not be cyclically displayed.

By displaying the re-displayed college student couple in a cyclical manner, the player's attention can be drawn to the re-displayed college student couple, and by not displaying the re-displayed college student couple in a cyclical manner, the player's attention is not drawn so much to the college student couple, so the player can focus on the final battle reach, which has an extremely high chance of winning and can be executed after the reach execution notice performance has ended.

In addition, when the redisplayed college student couple is cycled, the redisplay may be cycled in the same display mode as before it was hidden, or in a different display mode than before it was hidden (for example, before it was hidden, the display mode was a loop of a dynamic display of the college student couple whispering "You two make a great couple," but after it is redisplayed, the display mode may be a loop of a dynamic display of the college student whispering to the couple "You two make a great couple" followed by a "Go for it" gesture).

As mentioned above, the Final Battle Battle Reach, which is executed as a reach effect for the winning/losing effect of the variation pattern "SP Reach 3", and the couple effect are never executed at the same time. If a college student couple (cycle display) is displayed in the couple effect before the Final Battle Battle Reach starts, it is recommended that the college student couple (cycle display) in the couple effect be hidden when the Final Battle Battle Reach starts.

When the performance of the final battle reach ends, the college student couple (cycle display) in the couple performance will re-display. Note that even if the performance of the final battle reach ends, there may be cases where the college student couple (cycle display) in the couple performance does not re-display, but it is desirable that the rate at which they re-display is higher than the rate at which they do not re-display (the rate at which they re-display may be lower than the rate at which they do not re-display).

[6-7. Reach chance up effect]
The following describes the chance-up effect during a reach. In the middle of the reach effect as a winning or losing effect in the fluctuation of the fluctuation patterns "SP reach 1", "SP reach 2", and "SP reach 3", the smart ball croon effect is executed as an effect suggesting the probability of a big win in the fluctuation (it may be executed with a predetermined probability, or it may be executed without fail). The smart ball croon effect can be executed in the middle of the reach effect as a winning or losing effect in the fluctuation of the fluctuation patterns "SP reach 1", "SP reach 2", and "SP reach 3". In other words, the smart ball croon effect can be executed in the reach effect as a winning or losing effect executed after passing through the reach selection notice effect, in the reach effect as a winning or losing effect executed after passing through the reach promotion notice effect, and in the reach effect as a winning or losing effect executed after passing through the reach execution notice effect.

Note that the reach performance as a winning or losing performance in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 3" is an example of a first reach performance, and the reach performance as a winning or losing performance in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2" is an example of a second reach performance. Also, the reach performance as a winning or losing performance in the fluctuation of the fluctuation patterns "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", and "SP Reach 3" are all examples of special reach performances.

The smart ball crane effect is not performed in fluctuation patterns where reach effects are not executed, such as "shortened fluctuation" or "normal fluctuation," and in fluctuation patterns where SP reach is not executed, such as "normal reach" or "normal long reach." The smart ball crane effect is an example of a chance-up effect during a reach.

In the smart ball crane performance, two or three (multiple) cranes are displayed on the performance display device 1600, and each crane has two holes. In addition, a numerical value such as "+ XX%" is written on each hole of each crane. In the smart ball crane performance, a ball is shown rolling on each crane and entering one of the holes, and the sum of the numerical values written on the holes on each crane that the ball entered indicates the probability of a jackpot during the fluctuations that are occurring.

Figure 55 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of a pattern allocation table for determining the presentation pattern of the Smart Ball Croon presentation. The values of the pattern allocation table 550 are determined for each of the fluctuation patterns "SP Reach 1", "SP Reach 2", and "SP Reach 3". The pattern allocation table 550 in Figure 55 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 3", and the pattern allocation tables 550 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns "SP Reach 1" and "SP Reach 2" are omitted from the illustration.

The pattern allocation table 550 is stored, for example, in a peripheral control ROM. The pattern allocation table 550 indicates, for example, a performance pattern number 5501, a lower left crane number 5502, a lower right crane number 5503, an upper middle crane number 5504, a total 5505, an allocation 5506, and an expectation level 5507.

The performance pattern number 5501 indicates a number that identifies the performance pattern executed in the smart ball krun performance. The bottom left krun number 5502, the bottom right krun number 5503, and the top middle krun number 5504 indicate the numbers written in the left hole and the right hole of the bottom left krun, the bottom right krun, and the top middle krun displayed on the performance display device 1600, respectively. The bottom left krun, the bottom right krun, and the top middle krun are krunes that are displayed in the bottom left, bottom right, and top middle, respectively, within the display area of the performance display device 1600 in the smart ball krun performance.

In addition, in each Smart Ball Crew performance pattern, the ball enters the hole that corresponds to the underlined numbers in the bottom left Crew number 5502, bottom right Crew number 5503, and top middle Crew number 5504. Note that the top middle Crew is not displayed in the performance patterns "Pattern 1" to "Pattern 25."

The total 5505 indicates the sum of the underlined numbers (i.e., the numbers corresponding to the holes into which the ball falls in each of the crunes) in the lower left crune number 5502, the lower right crune number 5503, and the upper center crune number 5504. The allocation 5506 indicates the allocation of each performance pattern when the smart ball crune performance is performed in a jackpot fluctuation and when it is performed in a miss fluctuation.

The expectation level 5507 indicates the probability of a big win when each performance pattern is selected. As shown in FIG. 55, the numerical values of the holes into which the ball enters in each Kuruan and the allocation of each performance pattern are determined so that the total value of the numerical values corresponding to the holes into which the ball enters in each Kuruan indicated by the sum 5505 and the probability of a big win indicated by the expectation level 5507 are approximately the same value regardless of which performance pattern is selected. For example, in the case of pattern 18, the probability of a big win is indicated as 70% in the smart ball Kuruan performance (the probability of a big win is indicated as 70% by the performance in which the ball enters 30% of the holes (left hole) of the lower left Kuruan and 40% of the holes (right hole) of the lower right Kuruan), and the expectation level for an actual big win is also 70.01%.

Figures 56 and 57 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the Smart Ball Croon effect. Figures 56 and 57 explain an example in which the Smart Ball Croon effect is executed when the variation pattern "SP Reach 3" varies.

Figure 56 (A) shows the state where the Final Battle Reach, which is a reach performance as a winning/losing performance of the variation pattern "SP Reach 3", has started, and the title of the Final Battle Reach is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Figure 56 (B) shows the state where the Final Battle Reach continues. The performance display device 1600 displays a display of a character determined in the reach execution notice performance, equipped with each of the armor and weapons determined in the reach execution notice performance described above, facing off against an enemy character.

Figure 56 (C) shows the state when the smart ball crane performance has started. In Figure 56 (C), three smart ball display areas 1655 are displayed on the performance display device 1600, superimposed on the display of Figure 56 (B) (i.e., while the display of the final showdown battle reach performance is being displayed). Each smart ball display area 1655 displays a lever for shooting a ball and a ball, and a display is made of the lever shooting the ball.

For example, the display priority of the smart ball display area 1655 is higher than the display priority of the character in the final battle reach performance (i.e., the smart ball display area 1655 is displayed closer to the player than the character), but is lower than the display priority of the decorative pattern and the reserved display (i.e., the decorative pattern and the reserved display are displayed closer to the player than the smart ball display area 1655).

In the smart ball crane performance, when a performance pattern in which the lower left crane, the lower right crane, and the upper center crane are displayed is selected from the pattern allocation table 550, three smart ball display areas 1655 are displayed as shown in FIG. 56 (C), and when a performance pattern in which only the lower left crane and the lower right crane are displayed is selected, two smart ball display areas 1655 are displayed in FIG. 56 (C). When a performance pattern in which only the lower left crane and the lower right crane are displayed is selected, the central smart ball display area 1655 of the three smart ball display areas 1655 is hidden, and the two smart ball display areas 1655 are displayed symmetrically around the center line of the display area of the performance display device 1600.

When the ball is launched in Figure 56 (C), the display transitions to Figure 56 (D). In Figure 56 (D), a crown is displayed, and the ball revolves (for example, clockwise) around each crown. Note that the position on the crown of the ball revolving around each crown is the same for all crowns. In other words, the dynamic revolving display of the ball on each crown is synchronized. Note that the revolving display of the ball is a periodic cyclic display with a predetermined time period as one period (one cycle).

The length of the cycle in the orbiting display of the ball is, for example, 4.5 seconds, the same as one cycle in the reach selection advance notice performance as a cyclical display. By having the length of the cycle in the orbiting display of the ball be the same as one cycle in the reach selection advance notice performance as a cyclical display, the player can know the cycle of the other cycle by checking the cycle of one cycle display, which makes the player feel good.

The length of the period in the orbiting display of the ball may be longer or shorter than, for example, 4.5 seconds, which is one cycle in the reach selection notice performance as a cycle display. By making the length of the period in the orbiting display of the ball longer than one cycle in the reach selection notice performance as a cycle display, the player can concentrate on selecting the reach performance in the reach selection notice performance, and by making the length of the period in the orbiting display of the ball shorter than one cycle in the reach selection notice performance as a cycle display, the player can easily notice that the ball is orbiting on the crane in the smart ball crane performance. Regardless of whether the period in the orbiting display of the ball or one cycle in the reach selection notice performance as a cycle display is longer, it is desirable that one cycle of the longer cycle is shorter than two cycles of the shorter cycle, but one cycle of the longer cycle may be longer than two cycles of the shorter cycle.

In addition, because the orbital display of the ball on each crown is synchronized, the period of the orbital display of the ball on each crown is the same. This allows the player to follow the movement of the ball orbiting on one crown and understand the movement of the ball orbiting on other crowns, reducing eye strain for the player. The display of the ball orbiting on each crown is an example of a periodic display.

If the rotation display of the ball on all the krunks is perfectly synchronized, some players may get bored with the same movement, so the rotation direction (periodic display mode) of the ball on at least one of the multiple krunks displayed may be different. For example, when three krunks are displayed, the rotation direction of the ball on one krunk is forward rotation, and the rotation direction of the ball on the remaining two krunks is reverse rotation (for example, clockwise rotation is forward rotation and counterclockwise rotation is reverse rotation).

The display position of the bottom left crown is the same whether the ball rotates forward or backward on the bottom left crown. The same is true for the bottom right crown and the top middle crown. This means that in order to see the crown, the player only needs to look at the same display position regardless of the direction in which the ball rotates.

In addition, for example, in the smart ball crane performance executed in the reach performance as a winning/losing performance in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2", the rotation direction of all the balls on the crane may be reverse or may be forward. By having the rotation direction of all the balls on the crane rotate in the reverse direction, it is possible to make the player feel that the expectation of a jackpot may have increased. In addition, when the rotation direction of the balls on the crane rotates in the reverse direction, the expectation of a jackpot may actually be increased. Specifically, for example, the holes and values into which the balls will enter are determined so that when the rotation direction of the balls on the crane rotates in the reverse direction, the balls are more likely to enter holes with larger values (resulting in a higher expectation of a jackpot).

Also, for example, in the smart ball crune performance executed in the reach performance (final battle reach) as a winning or losing performance in the variation of the variation pattern "SP reach 3", the rotation direction of the balls on all the crunes may be all forward rotation, or all reverse rotation. The display of the ball orbiting on the crune in the smart ball crune performance executed in the reach performance as a winning or losing performance in the variation of the variation pattern "SP reach 1" or "SP reach 2" and the display of the ball orbiting on the crune in the smart ball crune performance executed in the reach performance as a winning or losing performance in the variation of the variation pattern "SP reach 3" are related displays that differ only in the rotation direction, or are the same display that has the same rotation direction.

In the smart ball crane performance executed in the reach performance (final battle reach) as a winning or losing performance in the variation of the variation pattern "SP reach 3", the display of the balls on the crane rotating is an example of a first periodicity display. Also, in the smart ball crane performance executed in the reach performance as a winning or losing performance in the variation of the variation pattern "SP reach 1" or "SP reach 2", the display of all the balls on the crane rotating in reverse is an example of a second periodicity display. Also, the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance described above is an example of a third periodicity display. Note that it is possible to display the second periodicity display before the first periodicity display, but it is preferable that it is not possible to display the second periodicity display after the first periodicity display.

When the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance is displayed, a reach performance is executed as a winning/losing performance of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2", and even if all the balls on the crane are displayed in reverse rotation in the smart ball crane performance during the reach performance, it is desirable to continue displaying the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance. When the game ball B enters the starting hole while the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance is continuously displayed, it is desirable to display a new cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance (the number of college student couples increases). By simultaneously displaying the balls on the crane rotating in reverse rotation and the cycle display of the college student couple, and by enabling the display of additional college student couples, the player's sense of expectation can be synergistically increased.

In addition, when the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple performance is not displayed, a reach performance is executed as a winning/losing performance of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2", and when the smart ball crane performance during the reach performance displays all the balls on the crane rotating in reverse in the smart ball crane performance, if game ball B enters the starting hole (excluding over winning), it is desirable to display the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple performance. By simultaneously displaying the balls on the crane rotating in reverse and the cycle display of the university student couple, the player's sense of expectation can be synergistically increased.

On the other hand, when the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance is not displayed, the Final Battle Battle Reach, which is a reach performance as a winning or losing performance of "SP Reach 3", is executed, and in the smart ball performance during the reach performance, when all the balls on the crane are displayed rotating in a forward direction, it is desirable that the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance not be displayed even if game ball B enters the starting hole (whether it is an over-winning or not). This is because the Final Battle Battle Reach is originally a reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, and if the couple performance is performed, the player's attention may be diverted to the couple performance, reducing interest.

If the cycle display of the college couple in the couple performance is displayed before the start of the final battle reach, which is the reach performance as the winning/losing performance of "SP Reach 3", the cycle display of the college couple in the couple performance is hidden when the final battle reach starts in order to focus the player on the final battle reach, which has a high expectation of a big win. Then, when the final battle reach ends, the cycle display of the college couple in the couple performance is redisplayed. It is also possible that the cycle display of the college couple in the couple performance is not redisplayed even when the final battle reach ends, but in that case, the rate of redisplay may be higher (or lower) than the rate of not redisplaying. If the cycle display of the college couple in the couple performance is redisplayed when the final battle reach ends, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment even if the final battle reach is notified of a loss, and if the cycle display of the college couple in the couple performance is not redisplayed, it is possible to calm the player who is disappointed by the loss of the final battle reach.

In addition, when the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance is displayed and the reach performance as the winning/losing performance of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1" or "SP Reach 2" ends, the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance may continue to be displayed or may be hidden. For example, the cycle display of the college student couple may be forcibly hidden at the end of the reach performance, or whether the cycle display of the college student couple will continue to be displayed or hidden at the end of the reach performance may be determined by lottery based on a predetermined ratio (the ratio for continuing to display the cycle display of the student couple may be higher, lower, or the same as the ratio for hiding it).

When the reach effect ends, the cycle display of the college student couple can be either continued or hidden. If it continues to be displayed, the player's sense of anticipation can be prevented from decreasing even when the reach effect ends, and if it is hidden, the player's feelings can be calmed as the reach effect ends.

Note that, as mentioned above, the display of the Kroon, in which the ball rotates in the reverse direction, may be displayed at the same time as the cycle display of the college student couple, so in order to improve the visibility of both displays, the display positions (areas) of the Kroon, in which the ball rotates in the reverse direction, and the cycle display of the college student couple are different. Also, as mentioned above, it is desirable for the display position of the Kroon to be the same whether the ball is rotating forward or backward, so inevitably the display positions (areas) of the Kroon, in which the ball rotates in the forward direction, and the cycle display of the college student couple are also different.

The display of the kreun in which the ball rotates in the reverse direction may be displayed in a different display position (a position where the display areas do not overlap) from the display of the kreun in which the ball rotates in the forward direction, and in a smaller display size than the display of the kreun in which the ball rotates in the forward direction. In particular, the display positions (areas) of the display of the kreun in which the ball rotates in the forward direction, the display of the kreun in which the ball rotates in the reverse direction, and the cycle display of the college student couple may not overlap. Furthermore, the display positions (areas) of the display of the kreun in which the ball rotates in the forward direction and the display of the kreun in which the ball rotates in the reverse direction may overlap part of the display position (area) of the cycle display of the college student couple.

The length of the period of the orbital display of the ball on the crown (regardless of whether it is rotating forward or backward) may be 4.0 seconds, which is a different time from the 2.5 seconds that is the period of the cycle display of the college student couple in the couple performance.

In addition, in the smart ball crane performance executed in the reach performance (final battle reach) as a winning or losing performance in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern "SP reach 3", the length of the period in which the balls on the crane rotate is called the first time, in the smart ball crane performance executed in the reach performance as a winning or losing performance in the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern "SP reach 1" or "SP reach 2", the length of the period in which all the balls on the crane rotate in the opposite direction is called the second time, and the length of the period of the cycle display of the university student couple in the couple performance described above is called the third time. As the relationship between the first time, second time, and third time, any of the following is adopted.

The first time, the second time, and the third time may all be the same length, such as the first time = the second time = the third time. Also, the first time = the second time < the third time, the first time = the second time > the third time, the first time = the third time < the second time, the first time = the third time > the second time, the second time = the third time < the first time, or the second time = the third time > the first time. Also, the first time, the second time, and the third time may all be different lengths, such as the first time < the second time < the third time, the first time < the third time < the second time, the second time < the first time < the third time, the second time < the third time < the first time, the third time < the first time < the second time, or the third time < the second time < the first time. If the first time, the second time, and the third time have periods of the same length, the player will be able to easily remember the periods of the same length. Also, if the first time, the second time, and the third time have periods of different lengths, the player will be able to enjoy a presentation with a long period of time.

The number of Kruun displayed in FIG. 56(D) corresponds to the performance pattern selected from the pattern allocation table 550, and is the same as the number of balls shot out. In addition, the numerical values written in each hole of each Kruun in the performance display device 1600 correspond to the performance pattern selected from the pattern allocation table 550.

When two krunks are displayed, a lower left krunk and a lower right krunk are displayed, and when three krunks are displayed, a lower left krunk, a lower right krunk and an upper middle krunk are displayed; however, the display positions (display height (position in the y-axis direction on the performance display device 1600)) of the lower left krunk and the lower right krunk when two krunks are displayed are the same as the display positions (display height (position in the y-axis direction on the performance display device 1600)) of the lower left krunk and the lower right krunk when three krunks are displayed.

In other words, when two crunes are displayed and when three crunes are displayed, the player can understand that the bottom left crune and the bottom right crune are the same crune, and when three crunes are displayed, in addition to the bottom left and bottom right crunes that are the same as when two crunes are displayed, an upper middle crune is also displayed, giving the player a sense of anticipation when three crunes are displayed.

It is preferable that the area in which each craune is displayed is displayed in a position that is included in the area surrounded by the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance. This means that when the smart ball craune performance is performed in the reach performance that has passed through the reach selection preview performance, the player does not need to move their eyes.

The area in which each crane is displayed may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the area surrounded by the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance. A cyclical display of a ball orbiting is performed in each crane, and a cyclical display of reach title displays is performed in sequence within the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance. Therefore, by positioning the area in which each crane is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the area surrounded by the reach title display frame 1651 in the reach selection preview performance, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that although these displays are all cyclical displays, they are not related to each other.

In the examples of Figures 56 and 57, when the crane is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the display of the final battle reach performance continues to be displayed behind the crane (the final battle reach performance is progressing), but when the crane is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the display of the final battle reach performance may be made non-displayable.

In Figure 56 (E), the display of the ball revolving around each crown continues. In Figure 56 (F), the display of the ball revolving around each crown continues, and the position of the ball revolving around each crown has returned to the same position as in Figure 56 (D) (the ball has completed one revolution around the crown). Note that in order to give the player a sense of tension for a long time, the ball will not enter the hole in the crown before it has completed one revolution around the crown.

In Figure 57 (G), the display of the ball orbiting each of the krunks has finished, and the ball on each krunks is displayed entering the hole. For example, when the display of the ball orbiting is on its third lap, the ball is displayed entering the hole in the krunks.

Figure 57 (H) shows the state where the ball has entered the hole of each krun. In Figure 57 (H), the ball has entered the "+30%" hole in all kruns. Effects are displayed around the numbers corresponding to the holes into which the ball has entered, to appeal to the player that the ball has entered the "+30%" hole in each krun. Note that in the example of Figure 57 (H), the ball is displayed as entering the hole with the same number for all kruns, but there may be a performance pattern in which the ball enters a hole with a different number for only one krun, and there may be a performance pattern in which the ball enters a hole with a different number for all kruns. Note that in Figures 56 (B) to 57 (H), the same display of the final battle reach performance is shown on the drawing, but the final battle reach performance progresses each time.

When a certain amount of time has passed since the ball entered the hole of each craune, the smart ball craune performance ends, and only the final battle reach performance continues to be executed. Figure 57 (I) shows the state where the smart ball craune performance has ended and the continuation of the final battle reach performance is being performed.

Figure 58 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance in which a ball rotates on a krun in a smart ball krun performance. In other words, Figure 58 is a diagram showing only the display of a ball rotating on a krun in the smart ball krun performance shown in Figures 56 and 57.

As shown in Figures 58(A) to 58(H), the ball is displayed circling the crown. After Figure 58(H), the display returns to Figure 58(A), causing the ball to circulate around the crown at least once.

Note that while the ball shown in Figures 58(A) to 58(H) is rotating around the krunk, the outline of the figure consisting of the krunk and the ball may change. For example, in Figure 58(A), the outline of the figure consisting of the krunk and the ball is shaped such that about the upper half of the ball protrudes from the upper center of the ellipse indicated by the krunk, while in Figure 58(B), the outline of the figure consisting of the krunk and the ball is shaped such that most of the upper part of the ball protrudes from the upper right corner of the ellipse indicated by the krunk.

While the orbital display in which the ball revolves around the crown is being performed, the outline of the figure consisting of the crown and the ball may continue to change constantly, or there may be a period during which the outline of the figure consisting of the crown and the ball does not change, such as the period shown in Figures 58(D) to 58(F) (during this period the outline maintains the elliptical shape indicated by the crown (because the ball does not go beyond the crown)).

In addition, in the rotation display in which the ball rotates around the crown, the rotation speed of the ball may be either high or low (for example, the rotation speed of the ball may be selected based on a predetermined allocation such that the probability of a jackpot being expected is lower when the ball rotates around the crown than when the ball rotates around the crown at a low speed). It is desirable that the outer line of the figure consisting of the crown and the ball be different when the ball rotates around the crown at a high speed and when the ball rotates around the crown at a low speed.

In addition, while FIG. 58 shows an example in which the ball rotates forward on the krun, if the ball rotates backward on the krun, the outline of the figure consisting of the krun and the ball may continue to change constantly while the orbital display in which the ball orbits on the krun is being performed, or there may be a period in which the outline of the figure consisting of the krun and the ball does not change, such as the period in FIG. 58(D) to FIG. 58(F), or the outline of the figure consisting of the krun and the ball may not change at all.

In the examples of Figures 56 and 57, the display of the smart ball crune effect starts during the execution of a final battle reach, which is an example of an SP reach, but the display of the smart ball crune effect may start before the SP reach is performed (for example, while the title of the SP reach is being displayed or before that title is displayed). In this way, the smart ball crune effect suggests to the player the likelihood of a jackpot beforehand, and the SP reach effect starts, allowing the player to enjoy the SP reach effect while feeling an appropriate degree of expectation (i.e., without being overly hopeful or overly disappointed).

There is also a pattern in which the smart ball crune performance is executed when an SP reach is being executed, without executing the reach selection notice performance. For example, when the basic pattern is selected in the variation pattern "SP reach 2"/"SP reach 3", a pattern can be realized in which the smart ball crune performance is executed when an SP reach is being executed, after the reach promotion notice performance/reach execution notice performance is executed, or without a notice performance being executed (i.e. the reach selection notice performance is not executed).

Also, for example, in the variation of the variation pattern "SP Reach 1", if the basic pattern is selected, a pattern can be realized in which the advance notice performance is not performed (i.e. the reach selection advance notice performance is not executed) and the smart ball crune performance is executed when the SP reach is being executed. Also, it is possible to prevent the reach selection advance notice performance from being executed after the smart ball crune performance when the SP reach is being executed ends and before the variation in which the SP reach was executed ends. In this way, by not executing the reach selection advance notice performance before or after the smart ball crune performance is executed, the player can concentrate on the smart ball crune performance without getting tired from the selection operation in the reach selection advance notice performance.

In addition, it is preferable that the smart ball crune performance is not displayed again after the display of the smart ball crune performance has ended (i.e., the smart ball crune performance can be executed only once per change), but it may be possible for the smart ball crune performance to be displayed multiple times per change. If the smart ball crune performance is not displayed again after the display of the smart ball crune performance has ended, the player's attention can be focused on the smart ball crune performance, and if the smart ball crune performance can be displayed multiple times per change, the player's sense of expectation will not be significantly reduced even if a low expectation level is indicated by the first smart ball crune performance.

As described above, when a redo effect executed in a redo pattern is displayed, the SP reach effect (any of the special reach effects) that was displayed immediately before the redo effect was displayed may continue to be displayed in the display area in the corner of the effect display device 1600 even after the redo effect is displayed. In other words, when a redo effect is performed in the middle of an SP reach effect in which a crane effect is being performed in a smart ball crane effect (when a periodic display in which the outer line changes within one cycle, with a specified time period being one cycle (i.e., a circling display in which the ball revolves around the crane) is being performed), the SP reach effect in which the crane effect is being performed can be continued to be displayed, and the redo effect and the reach selection notice effect, reach promotion notice effect, or reach execution notice effect that follows the redo effect and the redo effect can be executed. Furthermore, if the replay effect can be executed multiple times with one change, the SP reach effect in which the crane effect is being performed can be continuously displayed while the preview effect including the reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, or reach execution preview effect can be executed multiple times (the same preview effect may be executed multiple times, or different preview effects may be executed). This allows the player to enjoy the SP reach effect in which the crane effect is being performed while watching the preview effect after the replay effect. However, as mentioned above, the reach selection preview effect, reach promotion preview effect, and reach execution preview effect will not be executed after the display of the smart ball crane effect has ended.

When the basic pattern or rare pattern described above is selected, at least one of the reach selection notice performance, reach promotion notice performance, and reach execution notice performance will not be executed. Therefore, even if a variation pattern in which a special reach performance is executed is selected, the special reach performance will be executed without going through the reach selection notice performance, reach promotion notice performance, or reach execution notice (for example, without going through the reach selection notice performance), and the crane performance in the smart ball crane performance may be executed in the special reach performance.

In addition, during the Kroon performance in the smart ball Kroon performance (when a periodic display in which the outer line changes within one cycle (i.e., a circular display in which the ball orbits on the Kroon) is being performed, with a predetermined time being one cycle), an effective operation period for the pressing operation unit 303 occurs, and an imitation image of the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed on the performance display device 1600, making it possible to execute the first operation performance or the second operation performance described below (there are cases where the first operation performance or the second operation performance is executed, and cases where neither the first operation performance nor the second operation performance is executed).

First, the first operation presentation will be described. In the first operation presentation, the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs when the ball is orbiting on the kuruan, and a simulated image of the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600. When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303, a presentation in which the numerical value written in at least one hole on at least one kuruan increases may be performed. Note that even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303, the orbit display in which the ball orbits on the kuruan continues. By performing a presentation in which the numerical value written in the hole increases in the first operation presentation, a sense of exhilaration can be given to the player. Note that the presentation in which the numerical value increases (effect display, etc.) does not affect the orbit display (such as resetting the cycle), but the presentation in which the numerical value increases (effect display, etc.) may be displayed so as to overlap with the orbit display, or may not be displayed so as to overlap with it.

An example of the process for realizing the first operation performance is as follows. First, after selecting a performance pattern from the pattern allocation table 550, it is decided whether or not to execute the first operation performance, for example according to a predetermined allocation. However, if "Pattern 1" is selected as the performance pattern, the first operation performance is not executed. If it is decided not to execute the first operation performance, the kuruens and the numerical values of the holes of each kuruen indicated by the selected performance pattern are displayed.

When it is decided to execute the first operation presentation, a presentation pattern with a lower expectation 5507 than the selected presentation pattern (for example, if the jackpot expectation of pattern 17 is determined to be 60%, pattern 9 is displayed with a lower expectation than that) is selected as the initial display presentation pattern (for example, randomly), and the numbers of the holes of the cranes and each crane shown by the initial display presentation pattern are displayed. When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated (for example, a so-called single press or a so-called long press) during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 in the first operation presentation, the numbers of the holes of each crane that are higher in the selected presentation pattern than in the initial display presentation pattern are displayed to increase to the numbers in the selected presentation pattern. In addition, a difference obtained by subtracting the number of the holes in the initial display presentation pattern from the number of the holes in the selected presentation pattern may be displayed together with the increase.

When determining the performance pattern as the initial display performance pattern, the movement of the ball revolving around the crown continues (the movement of the ball revolving around the initial display performance pattern and the determined performance pattern is the same), so the hole into which the ball enters does not change in the determined performance pattern. Therefore, for example, if the determined performance pattern is pattern 17, the ball enters the left hole in the lower left crown and the left hole in the lower right crown, so the pattern that can be determined as the initial display performance pattern is determined from among performance patterns that have a lower hit expectation rate (displayed numerical value) than the determined performance pattern and that enter the left hole in the lower left crown and the left hole in the lower right crown. Therefore, for example, if the determined performance pattern is pattern 17, pattern 10 or pattern 12 will not be selected (because at least one of the holes into which the ball enters is different from pattern 17 in both patterns 10 and 12). Also, if the determined performance pattern is pattern 17, pattern 17 may be displayed as the initial display performance pattern, and a performance may be set in which the numerical value does not increase even if the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. Furthermore, the number of cranes will not differ between the determined presentation pattern and the initially displayed presentation pattern, and if the number of cranes displayed in the determined presentation pattern is three, the number of cranes displayed in the initially displayed presentation pattern will also be three.

The display of the ball orbiting around the crown may end during the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 (transitioning to a presentation showing which hole the ball will land in), or the display of the ball orbiting around the crown may end after the valid operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 ends (transitioning to a presentation showing which hole the ball will land in).

Next, the second operation presentation will be described. In the second operation presentation, the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs when the ball is revolving on the crown, and a simulated image of the pressing operation unit 303 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600. When the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303, the display of the ball revolving on the crown is hidden, and if the variation being performed is a big win variation, either the message "Congratulations!" or the message "Sorry?" is displayed on the presentation display device 1600 (for example, selected by a predetermined allocation), and if the variation being performed is a miss variation, the message "Sorry?" is displayed on the presentation display device 1600. If the message "Congratulations!" is displayed in the second operation presentation, the player can be given an extremely strong sense of elation, and even if the message "Sorry?" is displayed, it is not confirmed that it is a miss and the SP reach presentation continues, so the player will not be disappointed.

In the second operation presentation, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during the operation valid period of the pressing operation unit 303, the variation being performed is a jackpot variation and the message "Congratulations!" is displayed, the orbital display of the ball on the crown may be hidden, and when the variation being performed is a jackpot variation and the message "Too bad?" is displayed, or when the variation being performed is a miss variation (if it is a miss variation, the message "Too bad?" is displayed), the orbital display of the ball on the crown may not be hidden. In this way, the non-display of the orbital display of the ball on the crown functions as a confirmation presentation, and if the confirmation presentation appears, the player can be given an extremely strong sense of elation, and even if the confirmation presentation does not appear, it is not confirmed that it is a miss, and the crown presentation and SP reach presentation continue, so the player will not be disappointed.

In addition, in the second operation presentation when a jackpot fluctuation is being executed, the pressing operation unit 303 may be operated during the operation effective period of the pressing operation unit 303 to make the orbital display of the ball on the crown invisible, and then the orbital display of the ball on the crown may be redisplayed. In this way, the orbital display of the ball on the crown may be executed multiple times, giving the player a sense of superiority.

When an effective operation period of the pressing operation unit 303 occurs during the Kruun performance in the smart ball Kruun performance and the first or second operation performance is executed, it is desirable that the orbiting display of the ball in the Kruun performance (a periodic display in which the outline line changes within one cycle) does not end (is not made invisible) during the effective operation period. If the orbiting display of the ball in the Kruun performance ends during the effective operation period, the degree of expectation is indicated by the hole in the Kruun performance in which the ball entered during the first or second operation performance, and the player will not be able to enjoy the operation in the first or second operation performance and the performance that appears as a result of that operation.

The above is one form of the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to slot machines, gaming machines that combine the pachinko machine 1 with a slot machine, pachinko machines in which the gaming ball B circulates within the machine without the player touching the gaming ball B, medal-less slot machines, etc.

The present invention has been described in detail above with reference to the attached drawings, but the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations, and includes various modifications and equivalent configurations within the spirit of the appended claims.

1 Pachinko machine, 303 Press operation unit, 354 Speaker, 381 Press detection sensor, 1310 Main control board, 1510 Peripheral control board, 1600 Performance display device

Claims (1)

An acquisition means for acquiring start information when a start condition is satisfied;
a determination means for determining whether to grant a benefit based on start information in which a start condition is satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
A pattern changing means for changing a pattern when the determination is made by the determination means;
a storage means for storing a predetermined number of pieces of start information that the start condition is not satisfied among the start information acquired by the acquisition means;
A storage display means for displaying that the information is stored in the storage means;
a pre-determination means for determining whether the determination means should determine to grant a privilege based on the start information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied, before the determination by the determination means is made;
A performance determination means for determining a performance based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A performance display device on which the performance is displayed;
An operation means operable by a player,
The performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The first predetermined performance is a performance in which a first predetermined display is performed using a predetermined area that is a part of the display area of the performance display device, the first predetermined display changes to a second predetermined display by changing the display mode inside the first predetermined display, and the second predetermined display can be changed to a third predetermined display including a display that protrudes outside the outline of the first predetermined display, and the change from the first predetermined display to the second predetermined display does not confirm the award of the bonus, but the change from the second predetermined display to the third predetermined display confirms the award of the bonus,
The second predetermined effect is different from the display by the memory display means, and is an effect in which an outline line changes and a cyclic display is performed with a predetermined time period as a cycle,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the start condition is satisfied when the memory means stores a number of the start information that is less than the predetermined number, the second predetermined performance may be performed, but when the first predetermined performance is being performed and the memory means stores a number of the start information that is less than the predetermined number, the second predetermined performance will not be performed even if the start condition is satisfied.

Images